CA2278196C - Audio content player methods, systems, and articles of manufacture - Google Patents
Audio content player methods, systems, and articles of manufacture Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- CA2278196C CA2278196C CA002278196A CA2278196A CA2278196C CA 2278196 C CA2278196 C CA 2278196C CA 002278196 A CA002278196 A CA 002278196A CA 2278196 A CA2278196 A CA 2278196A CA 2278196 C CA2278196 C CA 2278196C
- Authority
- CA
- Canada
- Prior art keywords
- content
- user
- end user
- media content
- information
- Prior art date
- Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
- Expired - Fee Related
Links
- 238000000034 method Methods 0.000 title claims abstract description 57
- 238000004519 manufacturing process Methods 0.000 title description 4
- 230000004044 response Effects 0.000 claims description 58
- 238000003780 insertion Methods 0.000 claims description 23
- 230000037431 insertion Effects 0.000 claims description 23
- 238000004891 communication Methods 0.000 claims description 6
- 238000012360 testing method Methods 0.000 description 41
- 230000009471 action Effects 0.000 description 29
- 239000000463 material Substances 0.000 description 20
- 238000012552 review Methods 0.000 description 19
- 150000002500 ions Chemical class 0.000 description 18
- 238000003860 storage Methods 0.000 description 16
- 230000006870 function Effects 0.000 description 14
- 239000003550 marker Substances 0.000 description 13
- 230000001737 promoting effect Effects 0.000 description 12
- 230000008569 process Effects 0.000 description 11
- 230000006399 behavior Effects 0.000 description 10
- 230000000694 effects Effects 0.000 description 9
- 230000001419 dependent effect Effects 0.000 description 7
- 238000005259 measurement Methods 0.000 description 7
- 230000000007 visual effect Effects 0.000 description 7
- 230000000052 comparative effect Effects 0.000 description 6
- 238000010586 diagram Methods 0.000 description 6
- 230000008713 feedback mechanism Effects 0.000 description 4
- 230000011664 signaling Effects 0.000 description 4
- BSFODEXXVBBYOC-UHFFFAOYSA-N 8-[4-(dimethylamino)butan-2-ylamino]quinolin-6-ol Chemical compound C1=CN=C2C(NC(CCN(C)C)C)=CC(O)=CC2=C1 BSFODEXXVBBYOC-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 208000002193 Pain Diseases 0.000 description 3
- 208000003443 Unconsciousness Diseases 0.000 description 3
- 238000013459 approach Methods 0.000 description 3
- 230000008859 change Effects 0.000 description 3
- 238000004590 computer program Methods 0.000 description 3
- 230000000977 initiatory effect Effects 0.000 description 3
- 238000012544 monitoring process Methods 0.000 description 3
- 239000000523 sample Substances 0.000 description 3
- 241000894007 species Species 0.000 description 3
- 101000657326 Homo sapiens Protein TANC2 Proteins 0.000 description 2
- 102100034784 Protein TANC2 Human genes 0.000 description 2
- 230000003139 buffering effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000001186 cumulative effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000009826 distribution Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000005516 engineering process Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000008676 import Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000003993 interaction Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000007726 management method Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000000737 periodic effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000010926 purge Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000011084 recovery Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000002441 reversible effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 239000011435 rock Substances 0.000 description 2
- 230000001360 synchronised effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 235000019640 taste Nutrition 0.000 description 2
- 238000012546 transfer Methods 0.000 description 2
- FDQGNLOWMMVRQL-UHFFFAOYSA-N Allobarbital Chemical compound C=CCC1(CC=C)C(=O)NC(=O)NC1=O FDQGNLOWMMVRQL-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 241000726103 Atta Species 0.000 description 1
- 101100355997 Bacillus subtilis (strain 168) recA gene Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 229910001369 Brass Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- NLZUEZXRPGMBCV-UHFFFAOYSA-N Butylhydroxytoluene Chemical compound CC1=CC(C(C)(C)C)=C(O)C(C(C)(C)C)=C1 NLZUEZXRPGMBCV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 241000282465 Canis Species 0.000 description 1
- 241001342895 Chorus Species 0.000 description 1
- 101100126168 Escherichia coli (strain K12) intE gene Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 101100301301 Escherichia coli (strain K12) recE gene Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 241000282326 Felis catus Species 0.000 description 1
- 101100194706 Mus musculus Arhgap32 gene Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 241000282320 Panthera leo Species 0.000 description 1
- 102100026827 Protein associated with UVRAG as autophagy enhancer Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 101710102978 Protein associated with UVRAG as autophagy enhancer Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 235000014443 Pyrus communis Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 244000269722 Thea sinensis Species 0.000 description 1
- 241000053227 Themus Species 0.000 description 1
- 101100194707 Xenopus laevis arhgap32 gene Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 240000008042 Zea mays Species 0.000 description 1
- 235000005824 Zea mays ssp. parviglumis Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 235000002017 Zea mays subsp mays Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 238000009825 accumulation Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000009286 beneficial effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000005540 biological transmission Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000015572 biosynthetic process Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000004397 blinking Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000010951 brass Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000012790 confirmation Methods 0.000 description 1
- 235000005822 corn Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 238000001514 detection method Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000000706 filtrate Substances 0.000 description 1
- 244000144992 flock Species 0.000 description 1
- 239000006260 foam Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000002452 interceptive effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 210000002414 leg Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 239000007788 liquid Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000004973 liquid crystal related substance Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000012986 modification Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000004048 modification Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000003287 optical effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000008520 organization Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000036316 preload Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000012545 processing Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000000047 product Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000033764 rhythmic process Effects 0.000 description 1
- 235000002020 sage Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 238000005070 sampling Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000007787 solid Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000005236 sound signal Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000001228 spectrum Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000003068 static effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 229930193551 sterin Natural products 0.000 description 1
- 238000013519 translation Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000012795 verification Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000003442 weekly effect Effects 0.000 description 1
Classifications
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04H—BROADCAST COMMUNICATION
- H04H20/00—Arrangements for broadcast or for distribution combined with broadcast
- H04H20/65—Arrangements characterised by transmission systems for broadcast
- H04H20/76—Wired systems
- H04H20/82—Wired systems using signals not modulated onto a carrier
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G06—COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
- G06F—ELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
- G06F3/00—Input arrangements for transferring data to be processed into a form capable of being handled by the computer; Output arrangements for transferring data from processing unit to output unit, e.g. interface arrangements
- G06F3/16—Sound input; Sound output
- G06F3/165—Management of the audio stream, e.g. setting of volume, audio stream path
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G06—COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
- G06Q—INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGY [ICT] SPECIALLY ADAPTED FOR ADMINISTRATIVE, COMMERCIAL, FINANCIAL, MANAGERIAL OR SUPERVISORY PURPOSES; SYSTEMS OR METHODS SPECIALLY ADAPTED FOR ADMINISTRATIVE, COMMERCIAL, FINANCIAL, MANAGERIAL OR SUPERVISORY PURPOSES, NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- G06Q20/00—Payment architectures, schemes or protocols
- G06Q20/08—Payment architectures
- G06Q20/12—Payment architectures specially adapted for electronic shopping systems
- G06Q20/123—Shopping for digital content
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G06—COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
- G06Q—INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGY [ICT] SPECIALLY ADAPTED FOR ADMINISTRATIVE, COMMERCIAL, FINANCIAL, MANAGERIAL OR SUPERVISORY PURPOSES; SYSTEMS OR METHODS SPECIALLY ADAPTED FOR ADMINISTRATIVE, COMMERCIAL, FINANCIAL, MANAGERIAL OR SUPERVISORY PURPOSES, NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- G06Q30/00—Commerce
- G06Q30/02—Marketing; Price estimation or determination; Fundraising
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G11—INFORMATION STORAGE
- G11B—INFORMATION STORAGE BASED ON RELATIVE MOVEMENT BETWEEN RECORD CARRIER AND TRANSDUCER
- G11B27/00—Editing; Indexing; Addressing; Timing or synchronising; Monitoring; Measuring tape travel
- G11B27/10—Indexing; Addressing; Timing or synchronising; Measuring tape travel
- G11B27/102—Programmed access in sequence to addressed parts of tracks of operating record carriers
- G11B27/105—Programmed access in sequence to addressed parts of tracks of operating record carriers of operating discs
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G11—INFORMATION STORAGE
- G11B—INFORMATION STORAGE BASED ON RELATIVE MOVEMENT BETWEEN RECORD CARRIER AND TRANSDUCER
- G11B27/00—Editing; Indexing; Addressing; Timing or synchronising; Monitoring; Measuring tape travel
- G11B27/10—Indexing; Addressing; Timing or synchronising; Measuring tape travel
- G11B27/34—Indicating arrangements
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04H—BROADCAST COMMUNICATION
- H04H60/00—Arrangements for broadcast applications with a direct linking to broadcast information or broadcast space-time; Broadcast-related systems
- H04H60/35—Arrangements for identifying or recognising characteristics with a direct linkage to broadcast information or to broadcast space-time, e.g. for identifying broadcast stations or for identifying users
- H04H60/46—Arrangements for identifying or recognising characteristics with a direct linkage to broadcast information or to broadcast space-time, e.g. for identifying broadcast stations or for identifying users for recognising users' preferences
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
- H04L65/00—Network arrangements, protocols or services for supporting real-time applications in data packet communication
- H04L65/60—Network streaming of media packets
- H04L65/75—Media network packet handling
- H04L65/762—Media network packet handling at the source
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
- H04L67/00—Network arrangements or protocols for supporting network services or applications
- H04L67/14—Session management
- H04L67/142—Managing session states for stateless protocols; Signalling session states; State transitions; Keeping-state mechanisms
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
- H04L67/00—Network arrangements or protocols for supporting network services or applications
- H04L67/14—Session management
- H04L67/146—Markers for unambiguous identification of a particular session, e.g. session cookie or URL-encoding
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
- H04L67/00—Network arrangements or protocols for supporting network services or applications
- H04L67/2866—Architectures; Arrangements
- H04L67/30—Profiles
- H04L67/306—User profiles
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
- H04L9/00—Cryptographic mechanisms or cryptographic arrangements for secret or secure communications; Network security protocols
- H04L9/40—Network security protocols
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04H—BROADCAST COMMUNICATION
- H04H60/00—Arrangements for broadcast applications with a direct linking to broadcast information or broadcast space-time; Broadcast-related systems
- H04H60/35—Arrangements for identifying or recognising characteristics with a direct linkage to broadcast information or to broadcast space-time, e.g. for identifying broadcast stations or for identifying users
- H04H60/47—Arrangements for identifying or recognising characteristics with a direct linkage to broadcast information or to broadcast space-time, e.g. for identifying broadcast stations or for identifying users for recognising genres
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
- H04L65/00—Network arrangements, protocols or services for supporting real-time applications in data packet communication
- H04L65/1066—Session management
- H04L65/1101—Session protocols
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
- H04L69/00—Network arrangements, protocols or services independent of the application payload and not provided for in the other groups of this subclass
- H04L69/30—Definitions, standards or architectural aspects of layered protocol stacks
- H04L69/32—Architecture of open systems interconnection [OSI] 7-layer type protocol stacks, e.g. the interfaces between the data link level and the physical level
- H04L69/322—Intralayer communication protocols among peer entities or protocol data unit [PDU] definitions
- H04L69/329—Intralayer communication protocols among peer entities or protocol data unit [PDU] definitions in the application layer [OSI layer 7]
Abstract
A method of playing audio content using a computer including steps of displaying a graphical radio dial (1200) indicating the audio content, receiving data via an electronic network (1206), the data encoding the (1212) audio content, and playing the audio content. A method of operation of a server interacting with users to provide personalized content to each of the users. Personalized content is communicated to a first user by communicating first audio content associated with a broadcast to a first user location, selecting second content based upon a first user profile; and communicating a first signal to the first user location.
Description
I i AUDIO CONTENT PLAYER METHODS, SYSTEMS, AND ARTICLES OF MANUFACTURE
Technical Field The present invention relates to methods and systems for distributing and playing audio content.
Background of the Invention An increasing number of audio content items are becoming accessible via the Internet. Many radio stations now simulcast their over-the-air broadcast via the Internet. Some television networks are also IS simulcasting their over-the-air or cable broadcasts via the Internet. In addition, archived items such as archived radio programs, speeches, and music are also available via the Internet.
An audio content item is communicated to an end user's computer using either streamed data or a data file. The end user's computer decodes the streamed data or the data file using audio player software. Examples of audio player software include RealPlayer from Real Networks and Netscape Media Player from Netscape. The 25 audio player software directs the computer to play back the audio content item.
Services such as AudioNet"(www.audionet.com) and Timecast*(www.timecast.com) provide directories for audio content items available via the Internet. Using 30 these services, the end user can select an audio content item for playback using his/her computer. However, interaction between the audio player software and the service may be limited to that necessary to play back the audio content item.
* Trademark User feedback to movies and music is also currently of interest.
Movie Critic (at www.moviecritic.com) recommends movies of potential interest to an end user in return for an end user's rating of a movie he/she has seen. Billboard magazine and its associated Web site provide music rankings based on sales and air play.
Broadcast Architecture provides a service for testing audio playlists. A methodology employed by Broadcast Architecture comprises physically assembling one or more listeners to test a playlist, playing one or more songs to the listeners, and receiving rating signals from the listeners. The rating signals are generated by listeners turning up or down a dial depending on whether they like or dislike a song.
The rating signals can be plotted in a time series to interpret the results.
Summary of the Invention The present invention seeks to overcome the disadvantages of the prior art associated with audio content player methods, systems and articles of manufacture.
According to one aspect of the invention, a method of operation for a server that interacts with a plurality of client apparatuses to provide personalized content to each client apparatus is provided.
The method characterized by the steps of: communicating a broadcast stream of media content, including a first media content and control data associated with the first media content from the server to a particular client apparatus of the plurality of client apparatuses, wherein the control data indicates at least one insertion point of the first media content; retrieving a user profile associated with the particular client apparatus; selecting a second media content based on the user profile; and communicating the second media content and a control signal associated with the second media content from the server to the particular client apparatus, wherein the control signal instructs the particular client apparatus to insert the second media content at the at least one insertion point of the first media content.
According to another aspect of the invention, a method of operation for a server that interacts with a plurality of client apparatuses to provide personalized content to each client apparatus is provided. The method characterized by the steps of: communicating a broadcast stream of media content, including a first media content and control data associated with the first media content from the server to a particular client apparatus of the plurality of client apparatuses, wherein the control data indicates a schedule of insertion times; retrieving a user profile associated with the particular client apparatus; selecting a second media content based on the user profile; and communicating the second media content from the server to the particular client apparatus, wherein the particular client apparatus maintains a time clock to determine when to insert the second media content into the first media content based on the control data.
The "Summary of the Invention" does not necessarily disclose all the inventive features. The inventions may reside in a sub-combination of the disclosed features.
Brief Description of the Drawings The invention is pointed out with particularity in the appended claims. However, other features of the invention are described in the following detailed description in conjunction with the accompanying drawings in which:
FIG. 1 is a block diagram of an embodiment of a system for providing audio content via an electronic network;
FIG. 2 is a first display window in an embodiment of a graphical user interface;
FIG. 3 is a display of a portion of the graphical user interface including selection attribute indicators;
FIG. 4 is an illustration of an embodiment of a streaming indicator;
FIG. 5 is an illustration of an embodiment of volume controls;
Technical Field The present invention relates to methods and systems for distributing and playing audio content.
Background of the Invention An increasing number of audio content items are becoming accessible via the Internet. Many radio stations now simulcast their over-the-air broadcast via the Internet. Some television networks are also IS simulcasting their over-the-air or cable broadcasts via the Internet. In addition, archived items such as archived radio programs, speeches, and music are also available via the Internet.
An audio content item is communicated to an end user's computer using either streamed data or a data file. The end user's computer decodes the streamed data or the data file using audio player software. Examples of audio player software include RealPlayer from Real Networks and Netscape Media Player from Netscape. The 25 audio player software directs the computer to play back the audio content item.
Services such as AudioNet"(www.audionet.com) and Timecast*(www.timecast.com) provide directories for audio content items available via the Internet. Using 30 these services, the end user can select an audio content item for playback using his/her computer. However, interaction between the audio player software and the service may be limited to that necessary to play back the audio content item.
* Trademark User feedback to movies and music is also currently of interest.
Movie Critic (at www.moviecritic.com) recommends movies of potential interest to an end user in return for an end user's rating of a movie he/she has seen. Billboard magazine and its associated Web site provide music rankings based on sales and air play.
Broadcast Architecture provides a service for testing audio playlists. A methodology employed by Broadcast Architecture comprises physically assembling one or more listeners to test a playlist, playing one or more songs to the listeners, and receiving rating signals from the listeners. The rating signals are generated by listeners turning up or down a dial depending on whether they like or dislike a song.
The rating signals can be plotted in a time series to interpret the results.
Summary of the Invention The present invention seeks to overcome the disadvantages of the prior art associated with audio content player methods, systems and articles of manufacture.
According to one aspect of the invention, a method of operation for a server that interacts with a plurality of client apparatuses to provide personalized content to each client apparatus is provided.
The method characterized by the steps of: communicating a broadcast stream of media content, including a first media content and control data associated with the first media content from the server to a particular client apparatus of the plurality of client apparatuses, wherein the control data indicates at least one insertion point of the first media content; retrieving a user profile associated with the particular client apparatus; selecting a second media content based on the user profile; and communicating the second media content and a control signal associated with the second media content from the server to the particular client apparatus, wherein the control signal instructs the particular client apparatus to insert the second media content at the at least one insertion point of the first media content.
According to another aspect of the invention, a method of operation for a server that interacts with a plurality of client apparatuses to provide personalized content to each client apparatus is provided. The method characterized by the steps of: communicating a broadcast stream of media content, including a first media content and control data associated with the first media content from the server to a particular client apparatus of the plurality of client apparatuses, wherein the control data indicates a schedule of insertion times; retrieving a user profile associated with the particular client apparatus; selecting a second media content based on the user profile; and communicating the second media content from the server to the particular client apparatus, wherein the particular client apparatus maintains a time clock to determine when to insert the second media content into the first media content based on the control data.
The "Summary of the Invention" does not necessarily disclose all the inventive features. The inventions may reside in a sub-combination of the disclosed features.
Brief Description of the Drawings The invention is pointed out with particularity in the appended claims. However, other features of the invention are described in the following detailed description in conjunction with the accompanying drawings in which:
FIG. 1 is a block diagram of an embodiment of a system for providing audio content via an electronic network;
FIG. 2 is a first display window in an embodiment of a graphical user interface;
FIG. 3 is a display of a portion of the graphical user interface including selection attribute indicators;
FIG. 4 is an illustration of an embodiment of a streaming indicator;
FIG. 5 is an illustration of an embodiment of volume controls;
FIG. 6 is an illustration of an example of a portion of a display window upon receiving a user-initiated selection of a radio category control;
FIG. 7 is an il:iustration of an example of a graphical radio dial for selecting Internet or other electronic network broadcasts;
FIG. 8 is an example illustration of using a location attribute field;
FIG. 9 i.s an example of a second display region providing auxiliary :information about a particular station;
FIG. 10 is an example of a programming guide in a second display region;
FIG. 11 is an illustration of an example of a portion of the interface displayed upon receiving a user-initiated selection of an events category control;
FIG. 12 is an example illustration of using a time attribute f ie:ld;
FIG. 13 is an example illustration of using an event attribute f ie:ld;
FIG. 14 is an illustration of an example of a notification prompt:;
FIG. 15 illustrates an example of the second display region displaying auxiliary information about an event ;
FIG. 16 is an illustration of an example of a portion of the interface displayed upon receiving a user-initiatESd selection of the library category control;
FIG. 17 shows an example of text in the fields associated with an approach to navigating to library material;
FIG. 18 shows an indicator of which chapter is current and the nwnber of chapters that exist;
FIG. 7 is an il:iustration of an example of a graphical radio dial for selecting Internet or other electronic network broadcasts;
FIG. 8 is an example illustration of using a location attribute field;
FIG. 9 i.s an example of a second display region providing auxiliary :information about a particular station;
FIG. 10 is an example of a programming guide in a second display region;
FIG. 11 is an illustration of an example of a portion of the interface displayed upon receiving a user-initiated selection of an events category control;
FIG. 12 is an example illustration of using a time attribute f ie:ld;
FIG. 13 is an example illustration of using an event attribute f ie:ld;
FIG. 14 is an illustration of an example of a notification prompt:;
FIG. 15 illustrates an example of the second display region displaying auxiliary information about an event ;
FIG. 16 is an illustration of an example of a portion of the interface displayed upon receiving a user-initiatESd selection of the library category control;
FIG. 17 shows an example of text in the fields associated with an approach to navigating to library material;
FIG. 18 shows an indicator of which chapter is current and the nwnber of chapters that exist;
FIG. 19 :~llustra.tes an example of the second display region being used to provide auxiliary information about a title;
FIG. 20 :is an :il.lustration of an example of a portion the interface displayed upon receiving a of user-initiated selection of a music category control;
FIG. 21 chows an indicator of which track is current and the number of tracks that exist;
FIG. 22 illustrates an example of a search feature provided n the second display region;
i FIG. 23 illustrates an example of search results displayed in 'the sect>nd display region;
FIG. 24 illustrates an example of a listening booth feature provided in t:he second display region;
FIG. 25 is an example of a second display for the listening booth feature;
FIG. 26 is an example of a third display for the listening booth feature;
FIG. 27 is an example display provided upon selecting the contr~o7_;
FIG. 28 depicts an example of a portion of the interface displayed upon selecting an icon;
FIG. 29 illustrates an example of a card organizer display for a smart card feature;
FIG. 30 is an example portion of the interface displayed in response to a drag-and-drop operation;
FIG. 31 shows a display of a defaults area initiated upon selecting a second graphical button;
FIG. 32 shows a display of a payment options area initiated upon selecting a third graphical button;
FIG. 33 is an example portion of the interface displayed in respon.s~a to a drag-and-drop operation of a playlist smart card.
to the fourth portion;
FIG. 34 :is an example portion of the interface displayed in response to a drag-and-drop operation of a promotions smart card. to the fourth portion;
FIG. 35 :is a screen shot of a first preferred 5 embodiment of the graphical user interface in the radio content mode;
FIG. 36 is a screen shot showing a content selection intE=rface i.n the first preferred embodiment;
FIG. 37 is a s~~z-een shot of a second preferred embodiment of the g=raphical user interface;
FIG. 38 is a screen shot of the second preferred embodiment in a radio player mode;
FIG. 39 is a screen shot of the second preferred embodiment in an ev~ar~ts player mode;
FIG. 40 is a flow chart of an embodiment of a method of providing t:he graphical user interface;
FIGS. 41 to 43 are block diagrams summarizing a site map for .an embodiment of the graphical user interface;
FIG. 44 is a flow chart summarizing steps performed in an embodiment of a method of playing first audio content using a computer;
FIG. 45 is a flow chart summarizing steps in an embodiment of a method of obtaining user feedback to music content;
FIG. 46 is a flow chart summarizing steps in an embodiment of a method of assisting operation of an audio content player,;
FIG. 47 is a screen shot of a third embodiment of the graphical user interface;
FIG. 48 is an example of a first display in a preferred embodiment of a listening booth or rating room feature;
FIG. 20 :is an :il.lustration of an example of a portion the interface displayed upon receiving a of user-initiated selection of a music category control;
FIG. 21 chows an indicator of which track is current and the number of tracks that exist;
FIG. 22 illustrates an example of a search feature provided n the second display region;
i FIG. 23 illustrates an example of search results displayed in 'the sect>nd display region;
FIG. 24 illustrates an example of a listening booth feature provided in t:he second display region;
FIG. 25 is an example of a second display for the listening booth feature;
FIG. 26 is an example of a third display for the listening booth feature;
FIG. 27 is an example display provided upon selecting the contr~o7_;
FIG. 28 depicts an example of a portion of the interface displayed upon selecting an icon;
FIG. 29 illustrates an example of a card organizer display for a smart card feature;
FIG. 30 is an example portion of the interface displayed in response to a drag-and-drop operation;
FIG. 31 shows a display of a defaults area initiated upon selecting a second graphical button;
FIG. 32 shows a display of a payment options area initiated upon selecting a third graphical button;
FIG. 33 is an example portion of the interface displayed in respon.s~a to a drag-and-drop operation of a playlist smart card.
to the fourth portion;
FIG. 34 :is an example portion of the interface displayed in response to a drag-and-drop operation of a promotions smart card. to the fourth portion;
FIG. 35 :is a screen shot of a first preferred 5 embodiment of the graphical user interface in the radio content mode;
FIG. 36 is a screen shot showing a content selection intE=rface i.n the first preferred embodiment;
FIG. 37 is a s~~z-een shot of a second preferred embodiment of the g=raphical user interface;
FIG. 38 is a screen shot of the second preferred embodiment in a radio player mode;
FIG. 39 is a screen shot of the second preferred embodiment in an ev~ar~ts player mode;
FIG. 40 is a flow chart of an embodiment of a method of providing t:he graphical user interface;
FIGS. 41 to 43 are block diagrams summarizing a site map for .an embodiment of the graphical user interface;
FIG. 44 is a flow chart summarizing steps performed in an embodiment of a method of playing first audio content using a computer;
FIG. 45 is a flow chart summarizing steps in an embodiment of a method of obtaining user feedback to music content;
FIG. 46 is a flow chart summarizing steps in an embodiment of a method of assisting operation of an audio content player,;
FIG. 47 is a screen shot of a third embodiment of the graphical user interface;
FIG. 48 is an example of a first display in a preferred embodiment of a listening booth or rating room feature;
FIG. 49 i.s an example of a second display for reviewing rated items in an embodiment of a listening booth or rating room.:Feature;
FIG. 50 is an example of third display for rating a an item in t of a listening booth a preferred embodimen or rating room feature;
FIG. 51 is a view of an embodiment of the graphical rating tool;
FIG. 52 :~s an example modified third display, of a in an embodiment booth or rating room of a listening feature, onceall of: the tracksfor an item have been rated;
FIG. 53 is an example of the second display, in an embodiment a listening booth or rating room feature, of updated basedupon a submission of ratings for the item;
FIG. 54 :is an example fourth display in an of a embodiment a listening booth or rating room feature;
of FIG. 55 :is an example fifth display in an of a embodiment a listening booth or rating room feature;
of FIG. 56 .is an E=_xample sixth display in an of a embodiment a lisi~e.ning boothor rating room feature;
of FIG. 57 is a block diagramsummarizing a site map for an embodiment of the listening booth or rating room feature; and FIG. 58 is a black diagramof an embodiment of a content entry subsy:~t:em.
FIG. 50 is an example of third display for rating a an item in t of a listening booth a preferred embodimen or rating room feature;
FIG. 51 is a view of an embodiment of the graphical rating tool;
FIG. 52 :~s an example modified third display, of a in an embodiment booth or rating room of a listening feature, onceall of: the tracksfor an item have been rated;
FIG. 53 is an example of the second display, in an embodiment a listening booth or rating room feature, of updated basedupon a submission of ratings for the item;
FIG. 54 :is an example fourth display in an of a embodiment a listening booth or rating room feature;
of FIG. 55 :is an example fifth display in an of a embodiment a listening booth or rating room feature;
of FIG. 56 .is an E=_xample sixth display in an of a embodiment a lisi~e.ning boothor rating room feature;
of FIG. 57 is a block diagramsummarizing a site map for an embodiment of the listening booth or rating room feature; and FIG. 58 is a black diagramof an embodiment of a content entry subsy:~t:em.
Detailed Desc~ri.ption of Preferred Embodiments FIG. 1 is a block diagram of an embodiment of a system for providing audio content via an electronic network 100. Preferably, the electronic network 100 includes the Internet, the World Wide Web, an intranet, an extranet, or an on-line service such as America Online or WebTV.
The system comprises a server 102 which communicates with a plurality of client apparatus 104 including a client apparatus 106 via the electronic network 100. The server 102 includes a computer 110 having a processor 1:L2, a memory 114, and a storage device 116. The server 102 has a transceiver 120 such as a modem, a. network adapter, or a wireless transceiver which interfaces with the electronic network 100.
The client apparatus 106 can have a variety of forms, including bu.t not limited to, a general purpose computer, a network:~~omputer, a network television, an Internet television, and a wireless device. Regardless of its form, the client apparatus 106 typically includes a processor 1.22 in communication with at least one input device 124, ~~ tran~;ceiver 126, a memory 130, at least one storage device 132, a display device 134, and an audible output device 136. Optionally, the client apparatus 10E~ includes a smart card reader 140.
The processor 122 can include a microprocessor, an application-:specific integrated circuit, or another suitable integrated circuit. The memory 130 can include a read-only memory and/or a random access memory in communication with the processor 122. The transceiver 126 can include a modem, a network adapter, or a wireless transceiver to communicate signals via the electronic nEStwork 100. The at least one input device 124 can include a keyboard, a pointing device, and/or a touch screen for recE~iving user-initiated events, actions, and selections from an end user. The at least one storage device 1:32 can include a floppy disk drive, a PC card storage device, an optical drive, a Digital Video Disk (17VD) drive, a Compact Disk Read Only Memory (CD-ROM) drive, or a hard drive to store computer-readable data. The display device 134 can include a. monitor such as a liquid crystal display or a cathode ray tu.b~~ to display a graphical user interface. The audible output device 136 can include a sound card and/or one or more speakers to play audio content to the end user.
A content delivery component 141, including a player 142, reside; on the server 102 to assist in selecting, re>.trievi.ng, and playing the audio content.
The player 19:2 includes a computer program or other form of software c>r firmware which directs the server 102 and the client apparatus 106 to provide a graphical user interface for. selecting, retrieving, and playing back audio content:. More particularly, the computer program is operative to process and respond to user-initiated events, actions, and selections made using the at least one input device 124, to select, retrieve, and playback the audio content using the audio output device 136.
Preferably, i:he connputer program includes one or more of Hyper Text Marking Language (HTML) code, an applet (e. g.
a JAVA applei~ ) , an<i animation plug-in code ( a . g .
Shockwave code) to provide the graphical user interface.
The player 1~~2 is <~ccessible via the electronic network 100 by a dedicated electronic address such as "http://www.audiosense.com" or another URL (Uniform Resource Loc<~tor).
The player 14:2 accesses audio content either locally from the server 102 or remotely from a server 144, and conununica~~es the audio content to the client apparatus 106 using streaming technology. The server 144 can include, for example, a server from which AudioNet~content is accessible.
The player 142 is operable in two modes: a browse mode and a search mode. The search mode provides a user-invoked function for performing a key-word, text-based search for content. The browse mode supports a categorical search for content using a visual interface.
The content is categorized into a plurality of l0 categories of content to assist in browsing for content.
Preferably, the categories include a radio category, an events category, a library category, and a music category.
The player 142 is responsive to either a smart card 146 or a virtual smart card stored at one or more of the client apparatus 106 and the server 102. The actual or virtual smart card can be used to separate access to content from the content itself. Further, the actual or physical smart card can act as a preference key to uniquely personalize a player for an individual in a consistent manner across all entry points or platforms.
For a virtual smart card in this case, the client side provides a key to the server side of the preferences.
Optionally, the player 142 can provide a second 25 visual interface having a smaller window that appears in the background. The smaller window provides a subset of the controls of the full graphical user interface. The subset of controls can include controls for selecting between programmed presets. For example, the smaller 3o window can illustrate the presets.
The player 142 can cooperate with a browser program and/or a streaming audio plug-in program executed by the client apparatus 106. Examples of the browser program include, but are not limited to, Netscape Navigator and 35 Microsoft Internet Explorer': Examples of the streaming audio plug-in program include, but are not limited to:
RealAudio*and RealPlayer from Real Networks, VxTreme and Netshow from Microsoft Corporation, VDOnet from VDO*, TrueStream from Motorola, LiquidAudio, and other active 5 streaming formats. Alternatively, the player 142 can include a stand-alone, application-based software program that is executed by the client apparatus 106.
In this case, it is preferred that the software program be operable without requiring interaction with a browser 10 program. The software program cooperates with a network access routine executed by the client apparatus 106.
It is noted that in general, the system can include a plurality of servers such as the server 102. Each of the servers is identified by a corresponding site IS identification code. Each of the servers can include a database 148 for managing and monitoring the operation of the system. In this case, each database 148 can include a set of global parameters stored in its storage device 116. One global parameter includes a listening 20 time threshold parameter. If an end user listens to an audio item for a duration that attains or exceeds the listening time threshold, a listenership entry is recorded in the database 148; otherwise, no entry is recorded. Other global parameters include user 25 permission parameters, and parameters for system level performance reports.
In general, some parameters are maintained for all of the databases. These parameters include those necessary to the operation and the performance of the 30 system. Here, a parameter generated at one database site can be communicated to each of the other database sites. Each parameter change is entered with time and date stamps to reference its value at a specified time and date. This information can be of use in generating 35 system reports.
The system comprises a server 102 which communicates with a plurality of client apparatus 104 including a client apparatus 106 via the electronic network 100. The server 102 includes a computer 110 having a processor 1:L2, a memory 114, and a storage device 116. The server 102 has a transceiver 120 such as a modem, a. network adapter, or a wireless transceiver which interfaces with the electronic network 100.
The client apparatus 106 can have a variety of forms, including bu.t not limited to, a general purpose computer, a network:~~omputer, a network television, an Internet television, and a wireless device. Regardless of its form, the client apparatus 106 typically includes a processor 1.22 in communication with at least one input device 124, ~~ tran~;ceiver 126, a memory 130, at least one storage device 132, a display device 134, and an audible output device 136. Optionally, the client apparatus 10E~ includes a smart card reader 140.
The processor 122 can include a microprocessor, an application-:specific integrated circuit, or another suitable integrated circuit. The memory 130 can include a read-only memory and/or a random access memory in communication with the processor 122. The transceiver 126 can include a modem, a network adapter, or a wireless transceiver to communicate signals via the electronic nEStwork 100. The at least one input device 124 can include a keyboard, a pointing device, and/or a touch screen for recE~iving user-initiated events, actions, and selections from an end user. The at least one storage device 1:32 can include a floppy disk drive, a PC card storage device, an optical drive, a Digital Video Disk (17VD) drive, a Compact Disk Read Only Memory (CD-ROM) drive, or a hard drive to store computer-readable data. The display device 134 can include a. monitor such as a liquid crystal display or a cathode ray tu.b~~ to display a graphical user interface. The audible output device 136 can include a sound card and/or one or more speakers to play audio content to the end user.
A content delivery component 141, including a player 142, reside; on the server 102 to assist in selecting, re>.trievi.ng, and playing the audio content.
The player 19:2 includes a computer program or other form of software c>r firmware which directs the server 102 and the client apparatus 106 to provide a graphical user interface for. selecting, retrieving, and playing back audio content:. More particularly, the computer program is operative to process and respond to user-initiated events, actions, and selections made using the at least one input device 124, to select, retrieve, and playback the audio content using the audio output device 136.
Preferably, i:he connputer program includes one or more of Hyper Text Marking Language (HTML) code, an applet (e. g.
a JAVA applei~ ) , an<i animation plug-in code ( a . g .
Shockwave code) to provide the graphical user interface.
The player 1~~2 is <~ccessible via the electronic network 100 by a dedicated electronic address such as "http://www.audiosense.com" or another URL (Uniform Resource Loc<~tor).
The player 14:2 accesses audio content either locally from the server 102 or remotely from a server 144, and conununica~~es the audio content to the client apparatus 106 using streaming technology. The server 144 can include, for example, a server from which AudioNet~content is accessible.
The player 142 is operable in two modes: a browse mode and a search mode. The search mode provides a user-invoked function for performing a key-word, text-based search for content. The browse mode supports a categorical search for content using a visual interface.
The content is categorized into a plurality of l0 categories of content to assist in browsing for content.
Preferably, the categories include a radio category, an events category, a library category, and a music category.
The player 142 is responsive to either a smart card 146 or a virtual smart card stored at one or more of the client apparatus 106 and the server 102. The actual or virtual smart card can be used to separate access to content from the content itself. Further, the actual or physical smart card can act as a preference key to uniquely personalize a player for an individual in a consistent manner across all entry points or platforms.
For a virtual smart card in this case, the client side provides a key to the server side of the preferences.
Optionally, the player 142 can provide a second 25 visual interface having a smaller window that appears in the background. The smaller window provides a subset of the controls of the full graphical user interface. The subset of controls can include controls for selecting between programmed presets. For example, the smaller 3o window can illustrate the presets.
The player 142 can cooperate with a browser program and/or a streaming audio plug-in program executed by the client apparatus 106. Examples of the browser program include, but are not limited to, Netscape Navigator and 35 Microsoft Internet Explorer': Examples of the streaming audio plug-in program include, but are not limited to:
RealAudio*and RealPlayer from Real Networks, VxTreme and Netshow from Microsoft Corporation, VDOnet from VDO*, TrueStream from Motorola, LiquidAudio, and other active 5 streaming formats. Alternatively, the player 142 can include a stand-alone, application-based software program that is executed by the client apparatus 106.
In this case, it is preferred that the software program be operable without requiring interaction with a browser 10 program. The software program cooperates with a network access routine executed by the client apparatus 106.
It is noted that in general, the system can include a plurality of servers such as the server 102. Each of the servers is identified by a corresponding site IS identification code. Each of the servers can include a database 148 for managing and monitoring the operation of the system. In this case, each database 148 can include a set of global parameters stored in its storage device 116. One global parameter includes a listening 20 time threshold parameter. If an end user listens to an audio item for a duration that attains or exceeds the listening time threshold, a listenership entry is recorded in the database 148; otherwise, no entry is recorded. Other global parameters include user 25 permission parameters, and parameters for system level performance reports.
In general, some parameters are maintained for all of the databases. These parameters include those necessary to the operation and the performance of the 30 system. Here, a parameter generated at one database site can be communicated to each of the other database sites. Each parameter change is entered with time and date stamps to reference its value at a specified time and date. This information can be of use in generating 35 system reports.
To provide additional features, the server 102 includes a customer profile component 150, a music testing component 152, an audience measuring component 154, a promotions component 156, an advertising component 16C~, a listener feedback component 162, and a transactions component 164. Each of these components includes a computer program module or other form of software or firmware to direct the server 102 to provide its associate>.d feat.u:re.
to The cust:omer profile component 150 stores and manages a table of end user data. The end user data includes a record comprising one or more of a name, an address, a login, an electronic mail address, preferences, and demographics for each end user.
Examples of E:nd users include listeners and other consumers, bnoadca~~ters, and promoters (e. g. record labels). Opt:ionall.y, the customer profile component 150 purges a record after a predetermined period of inactivity oj: its associated end user.
Each record in the table has a unique identification code, herein referred to as CustomerID, to identify its as:~ociated end user. The customer profile component 150 performs a check to ensure that only one Cust:omerID is created for each user. The CustomerID is used throughout the system to identify a particular end user. Each end user enters his/her unique login to access his/her preferences when using the player 1~~2.
Several levels of customer profiles can exist. In a guest level, a generic CustomerID is created without requesting profile information. A message allowing a user to creave a profile is presented whenever a customizing :feature or a music testing capability is used. Listener feedback and advertising information is tracked for awests who do not create a profile. All such responses for guests are grouped together.
In a baaic cu,>tomer level, a CustomerID is created to provide the pref=e=rences capabilities of the system using a basic' profile. A unique login name and password is included i.n the e=nd user record. The login name and password is entered by the end user to access his/her profile. Specific demographic information may be requested from the end user before gaining basic customer stat=us .
In a pre=ferred customer level, a CustomerlD is created with a more' detailed profile than the basic customer level. In addition to the profile information in the basic customer level, the preferred customer level can rec;uire t=hat an address of the end user be maintained in the end user record. In return, the end user is provided with exclusive features such as being enabled for promotions described herein.
The cust=omer profile component 150 is provided to allow preferE,nces t:o be available regardless of where the end user is acc=essing the system. For example, the end user can acres:~ the player 142 at either the client apparatus lOEi or a client apparatus 104 using his/her preferences in the customer profile component 150.
The mus=ic testing component 152 provides a user interface (a:Lso ref-_e.rred to herein as a listening booth or a rating room feature) for a music testing service.
The music to:sting :service allows record labels and other promoters to test new music releases. The music testing component 152 manages the mechanics of the testing.
The audience measuring component 154 monitors and records data assoc=iated with a listening behavior of each end use=r when using the player 142. Based upon the data, one or more audience measurement reports are generated. 'I'he audience measurement reports may be of particular interest to music directors of radio stations. The' audience measuring component 154 can provide a "Arbitron--like" rating system for radio on the Internet that is familiar to terrestrial radio broadcasters.
The prom~~tions component 156 tracks the performance of promotions offerE~d to elicit responses using the music testing component 152. The promotions component 156 further m<nnages the administration of the music testing component 152 in providing a delivery vehicle for promotional item; such as rated albums.
The advertising component 160 manages audible and visible advertisements presented by the player 142. The audible advertisements can be inserted into the audio stream to replace audible advertisements played by a broadcaster (~=_.g. a radio station). The visible advertisements can be displayed in any of several areas of the display device 134.
The listener feedback component 162 receives and manages feedb~~ck me~sc~ages from end users . The feedback messages can :pertain to the system for providing audio content, the :broadc~a:~ters (e.g. radio stations), the content (e.g. events), or advertising. Preferably, the feedback messages are entered using the player 142. The listener feedback component 162 identifies the content and/or the broadcaster presented to the end user at the time his/her feedback message was generated. Using this information, a suitable destination for routing the feedback message is determined. The listener feedback component 162 can include an electronic mail server to route the feedback mE~ssages. The listener feedback component 162 can further generate reports based upon the feedback.
The tran.sactio~n,s component 164 is used to process transactions performcad by end users and clients.
to The cust:omer profile component 150 stores and manages a table of end user data. The end user data includes a record comprising one or more of a name, an address, a login, an electronic mail address, preferences, and demographics for each end user.
Examples of E:nd users include listeners and other consumers, bnoadca~~ters, and promoters (e. g. record labels). Opt:ionall.y, the customer profile component 150 purges a record after a predetermined period of inactivity oj: its associated end user.
Each record in the table has a unique identification code, herein referred to as CustomerID, to identify its as:~ociated end user. The customer profile component 150 performs a check to ensure that only one Cust:omerID is created for each user. The CustomerID is used throughout the system to identify a particular end user. Each end user enters his/her unique login to access his/her preferences when using the player 1~~2.
Several levels of customer profiles can exist. In a guest level, a generic CustomerID is created without requesting profile information. A message allowing a user to creave a profile is presented whenever a customizing :feature or a music testing capability is used. Listener feedback and advertising information is tracked for awests who do not create a profile. All such responses for guests are grouped together.
In a baaic cu,>tomer level, a CustomerID is created to provide the pref=e=rences capabilities of the system using a basic' profile. A unique login name and password is included i.n the e=nd user record. The login name and password is entered by the end user to access his/her profile. Specific demographic information may be requested from the end user before gaining basic customer stat=us .
In a pre=ferred customer level, a CustomerlD is created with a more' detailed profile than the basic customer level. In addition to the profile information in the basic customer level, the preferred customer level can rec;uire t=hat an address of the end user be maintained in the end user record. In return, the end user is provided with exclusive features such as being enabled for promotions described herein.
The cust=omer profile component 150 is provided to allow preferE,nces t:o be available regardless of where the end user is acc=essing the system. For example, the end user can acres:~ the player 142 at either the client apparatus lOEi or a client apparatus 104 using his/her preferences in the customer profile component 150.
The mus=ic testing component 152 provides a user interface (a:Lso ref-_e.rred to herein as a listening booth or a rating room feature) for a music testing service.
The music to:sting :service allows record labels and other promoters to test new music releases. The music testing component 152 manages the mechanics of the testing.
The audience measuring component 154 monitors and records data assoc=iated with a listening behavior of each end use=r when using the player 142. Based upon the data, one or more audience measurement reports are generated. 'I'he audience measurement reports may be of particular interest to music directors of radio stations. The' audience measuring component 154 can provide a "Arbitron--like" rating system for radio on the Internet that is familiar to terrestrial radio broadcasters.
The prom~~tions component 156 tracks the performance of promotions offerE~d to elicit responses using the music testing component 152. The promotions component 156 further m<nnages the administration of the music testing component 152 in providing a delivery vehicle for promotional item; such as rated albums.
The advertising component 160 manages audible and visible advertisements presented by the player 142. The audible advertisements can be inserted into the audio stream to replace audible advertisements played by a broadcaster (~=_.g. a radio station). The visible advertisements can be displayed in any of several areas of the display device 134.
The listener feedback component 162 receives and manages feedb~~ck me~sc~ages from end users . The feedback messages can :pertain to the system for providing audio content, the :broadc~a:~ters (e.g. radio stations), the content (e.g. events), or advertising. Preferably, the feedback messages are entered using the player 142. The listener feedback component 162 identifies the content and/or the broadcaster presented to the end user at the time his/her feedback message was generated. Using this information, a suitable destination for routing the feedback message is determined. The listener feedback component 162 can include an electronic mail server to route the feedback mE~ssages. The listener feedback component 162 can further generate reports based upon the feedback.
The tran.sactio~n,s component 164 is used to process transactions performcad by end users and clients.
Examples of transactions include end users purchasing content, and clients purchasing on-line reports. The transactions compor..ent 164 includes a database to record the transactions, a.nd to process credit card information.
FIG. 2 is a first display window in an embodiment of the graphical user interface. As with the other herein-described di.s:play screens, display windows, and display regions, the first display window is displayed by the display device 134. The first display window provides a primary browsing window to offer basic features including basic content selection control and playback control to the end user .
The first display window includes categorical selection controls 200, preset selection indicators 202, preset selection controls 204, advance/review controls 206, playbacl~: controls 210, volume controls 212, selection attribute indicators 214, a streaming indicator 21E>, a first display region 218, an information c:ontro7_ 220, a second display region 222, a search control 224, a user feedback control 22&, a smart card control 230, a help mode control 232, a first logo 234, a second logo 236, an advertising window 240, and an attractions window 242.
Preferably, each of the aforementioned controls includes a hot spots region or a graphical button designated for receiving user-initiated selections and actions from the at. least one input device 124.
Examples of user-initiated actions include, but are not limited to, point-and-click operations with a pointing device such as a mouse, a trackball, or a touchpad, and touch action: using a touchscreen or a keyboard.
The categorical. selection controls 200 are designated to rece:ive user-initiated actions to choose a content category w:it:hin which audio content can be WO 99/27b81 PCT/US98/25092 selected. The categorical selection controls 200 include a radio category control 244, an events category control 245, a library category control 246, and a music category control 247. Each of the categorical selection 5 controls 200 is disp:Layed as a graphical tab.
The radio cate~g~ory includes content available from over-the-air broadcasts (including but not limited to AM
and FM broadcasts) and Internet broadcast material encoded and distributed through the electronic network 10 100. The events category includes content from special occurrences, conven.t:ions, announcements, news, and sports events, for example, distributed by a scheduler or an event manager. The events category includes scheduled broadcasts of either live or archived material 15 that is made availa.b:le over the electronic network 100 at a scheduled time. The library category includes content from stored. audio of books, archived speeches, spoken audio, and other content that appears without reference to a part.i~~ular broadcast. The music category includes coll.ection.s of music such as albums and other audio releases.
The radio category and the events category include content associated with a particular time, such as a live broadca~;t. The library category and the music category include content generally unreferenced to a particular time.
If, whi7_e material is active in a first content category, thE~ end user proceeds to a second content category, the' tab associated with the first content category is displayed with blinking text. In this case, the end user can proceed to the second content category using a point:-and-click operation with the tab associated with the' second content category or by use of the smart card. For example, if the radio category is active when t:he end user selects the music category tab, the radio category tab blinks until the end user returns to the radio category or until new material is streamed.
When new material :i~; chosen, the tab returns to its idle state.
To easily ide:nt:ify the active function, each of the four content categories are color coded. Preferably, the CMYK valves of each content category is as follows:
radio 0-49-96-0, events 23-96-100-9, library 79-7-100-0, and music 88-80-0-0.
If there is no selection of a content category, the text "INFO" is dis~g7.ayed in the information control 220.
In this case, the text "INFO" is displayed in a color such as grey rather than a second color such as black when a content cat~eclory is selected. Alternatively, the information control 220 can be selected to display a guide on how to make a selection in the current mode.
The playback controls 210 includes a play button 250 and a cancel butaon 252. The play button 250 is designated to receive a user-initiated action to initiate a playback of an audio selection. Text within the play button 250 is redisplayed in a reverse color upon receiving the user-initiated action. The reverse color indicates to t;he end user that the action has been received.
The default fox the play button 250 is to automatically play titles and stations whenever available. If a title or a station cannot be played with chosen attributes, at least a portion of the play button 250 including the text "PLAY" is displayed in a first color such as grey. If a title or a station can be played with chosen attributes, the portion of the play button 250 including the text "PLAY" is redisplayed in a second color such as black. If an event has not yet occurred., the p:Lay button 250 displays the word "SCHEDULE".
FIG. 2 is a first display window in an embodiment of the graphical user interface. As with the other herein-described di.s:play screens, display windows, and display regions, the first display window is displayed by the display device 134. The first display window provides a primary browsing window to offer basic features including basic content selection control and playback control to the end user .
The first display window includes categorical selection controls 200, preset selection indicators 202, preset selection controls 204, advance/review controls 206, playbacl~: controls 210, volume controls 212, selection attribute indicators 214, a streaming indicator 21E>, a first display region 218, an information c:ontro7_ 220, a second display region 222, a search control 224, a user feedback control 22&, a smart card control 230, a help mode control 232, a first logo 234, a second logo 236, an advertising window 240, and an attractions window 242.
Preferably, each of the aforementioned controls includes a hot spots region or a graphical button designated for receiving user-initiated selections and actions from the at. least one input device 124.
Examples of user-initiated actions include, but are not limited to, point-and-click operations with a pointing device such as a mouse, a trackball, or a touchpad, and touch action: using a touchscreen or a keyboard.
The categorical. selection controls 200 are designated to rece:ive user-initiated actions to choose a content category w:it:hin which audio content can be WO 99/27b81 PCT/US98/25092 selected. The categorical selection controls 200 include a radio category control 244, an events category control 245, a library category control 246, and a music category control 247. Each of the categorical selection 5 controls 200 is disp:Layed as a graphical tab.
The radio cate~g~ory includes content available from over-the-air broadcasts (including but not limited to AM
and FM broadcasts) and Internet broadcast material encoded and distributed through the electronic network 10 100. The events category includes content from special occurrences, conven.t:ions, announcements, news, and sports events, for example, distributed by a scheduler or an event manager. The events category includes scheduled broadcasts of either live or archived material 15 that is made availa.b:le over the electronic network 100 at a scheduled time. The library category includes content from stored. audio of books, archived speeches, spoken audio, and other content that appears without reference to a part.i~~ular broadcast. The music category includes coll.ection.s of music such as albums and other audio releases.
The radio category and the events category include content associated with a particular time, such as a live broadca~;t. The library category and the music category include content generally unreferenced to a particular time.
If, whi7_e material is active in a first content category, thE~ end user proceeds to a second content category, the' tab associated with the first content category is displayed with blinking text. In this case, the end user can proceed to the second content category using a point:-and-click operation with the tab associated with the' second content category or by use of the smart card. For example, if the radio category is active when t:he end user selects the music category tab, the radio category tab blinks until the end user returns to the radio category or until new material is streamed.
When new material :i~; chosen, the tab returns to its idle state.
To easily ide:nt:ify the active function, each of the four content categories are color coded. Preferably, the CMYK valves of each content category is as follows:
radio 0-49-96-0, events 23-96-100-9, library 79-7-100-0, and music 88-80-0-0.
If there is no selection of a content category, the text "INFO" is dis~g7.ayed in the information control 220.
In this case, the text "INFO" is displayed in a color such as grey rather than a second color such as black when a content cat~eclory is selected. Alternatively, the information control 220 can be selected to display a guide on how to make a selection in the current mode.
The playback controls 210 includes a play button 250 and a cancel butaon 252. The play button 250 is designated to receive a user-initiated action to initiate a playback of an audio selection. Text within the play button 250 is redisplayed in a reverse color upon receiving the user-initiated action. The reverse color indicates to t;he end user that the action has been received.
The default fox the play button 250 is to automatically play titles and stations whenever available. If a title or a station cannot be played with chosen attributes, at least a portion of the play button 250 including the text "PLAY" is displayed in a first color such as grey. If a title or a station can be played with chosen attributes, the portion of the play button 250 including the text "PLAY" is redisplayed in a second color such as black. If an event has not yet occurred., the p:Lay button 250 displays the word "SCHEDULE".
During playback, the play button 250 is designated to receive a user-initiated action to pause the playback of the audio selection. Once paused, the play button 250 can receive a subsequent user-initiated action to continue the playba.c:k.
The cancel but:ton 252 is designated to receive a user-initiated action to cancel an activity of the player. For example, when selecting items using a selection table (which is subsequently described in detail), the cancel. button 252 can be selected to exit from the selection table. As another example, when playing an audio sE_lection, the cancel button 252 can be selected to stop the playback of the audio selection and to reset the player to keep the audio selection chosen.
The advertising window 240 provides advertising images. The advertising window 240 can further provide backward and forward navigation of advertisements.
FIG. 3 is a du splay of a portion of the graphical user interface inc7_uding the selection attribute indicators 2~_4. The selection attribute indicators 214 include a se7_ect button 260 and three attribute fields 262, 264, an~~ 266. The select button 260 is designated to receive u:~er-in~_tiated actions to alternate between the three attribute fields 262, 264, and 266.
For radio coni~ent, the three attribute fields 262, 264, and 266 include a category attribute field, a band attribute fiesld, and a location attribute field. For events, the three attribute fields 262, 264, and 266 include a category attribute field, a time attribute field, and am event. attribute field. For library content, the three attribute fields 262, 264, and 266 include a cai~egory attribute field, an author attribute field, a tit:Le attribute field. For music content, the three attribute fie~l~ds 262, 264, and 266 include a category attribute field, an artist attribute field, and a title attribute field.
A selection of. the select button 260 directs the next attribute field to be displayed along with its associated ox>tions. For example, clicking the select button 260 while the band attribute field 264 is active causes the location attribute field 266 to become active, as i7_lustrated.
A list of options 270 associated with an active attribute is displayed next to the three attribute fields 262, a?64, and 266. The end user can scroll through the :ist u:>ing a scroll bar 272, an up scroll control 274, and/or.- a down scroll control 276. The end user can also navigate to an option by entering either a letter or a number of an item in the list of options 270.
fn~hen an intendE~d option is highlighted (such as "Chicago" as illust:rated), the end user can select the option by eii~her: (i) double clicking on the option;
(ii) clickin<~ on thE~ select button 260; (iii) selecting another attribute too choose; or (iv) clicking on the play button 250 if all the attributes are chosen. Once chosen, the :intended option is displayed in its respective one of the three attribute fields 262, 264, and 266. If the cancel button 252 is selected at any time in this operation, no attribute is chosen and the player is reset to Either a previous state or to an idle state.
Optionally, att=ributes can be selected from a personalized set of options so that a list of likely choices is smaller than a full set of options, and is filled with items more likely of interest.
The cancel but:ton 252 is designated to receive a user-initiated action to cancel an activity of the player. For example, when selecting items using a selection table (which is subsequently described in detail), the cancel. button 252 can be selected to exit from the selection table. As another example, when playing an audio sE_lection, the cancel button 252 can be selected to stop the playback of the audio selection and to reset the player to keep the audio selection chosen.
The advertising window 240 provides advertising images. The advertising window 240 can further provide backward and forward navigation of advertisements.
FIG. 3 is a du splay of a portion of the graphical user interface inc7_uding the selection attribute indicators 2~_4. The selection attribute indicators 214 include a se7_ect button 260 and three attribute fields 262, 264, an~~ 266. The select button 260 is designated to receive u:~er-in~_tiated actions to alternate between the three attribute fields 262, 264, and 266.
For radio coni~ent, the three attribute fields 262, 264, and 266 include a category attribute field, a band attribute fiesld, and a location attribute field. For events, the three attribute fields 262, 264, and 266 include a category attribute field, a time attribute field, and am event. attribute field. For library content, the three attribute fields 262, 264, and 266 include a cai~egory attribute field, an author attribute field, a tit:Le attribute field. For music content, the three attribute fie~l~ds 262, 264, and 266 include a category attribute field, an artist attribute field, and a title attribute field.
A selection of. the select button 260 directs the next attribute field to be displayed along with its associated ox>tions. For example, clicking the select button 260 while the band attribute field 264 is active causes the location attribute field 266 to become active, as i7_lustrated.
A list of options 270 associated with an active attribute is displayed next to the three attribute fields 262, a?64, and 266. The end user can scroll through the :ist u:>ing a scroll bar 272, an up scroll control 274, and/or.- a down scroll control 276. The end user can also navigate to an option by entering either a letter or a number of an item in the list of options 270.
fn~hen an intendE~d option is highlighted (such as "Chicago" as illust:rated), the end user can select the option by eii~her: (i) double clicking on the option;
(ii) clickin<~ on thE~ select button 260; (iii) selecting another attribute too choose; or (iv) clicking on the play button 250 if all the attributes are chosen. Once chosen, the :intended option is displayed in its respective one of the three attribute fields 262, 264, and 266. If the cancel button 252 is selected at any time in this operation, no attribute is chosen and the player is reset to Either a previous state or to an idle state.
Optionally, att=ributes can be selected from a personalized set of options so that a list of likely choices is smaller than a full set of options, and is filled with items more likely of interest.
It is noted that, except where noted, the list of options for each attribute includes an "ALL" option.
Content is unfiltered with respect to an attribute having the "FALL" option. If a user-initiated selection of the select: butte>n 260 is received without receiving a user-initiated selection of an option from the list of options 270, the attribute is automatically set to .' ~L ~. .
Referring bacl~c to FIG. 2, the preset selection indicators 202 and the preset selection controls 204 provide a gr~~phica7_ user interface for operating presets. ThE~ preset selection indicators 202 display a subset of the avai7_able presets. The preset selection controls 204 control which subset of the available presets is displayed. The preset selection controls 204 include an up arrow control and a down arrow control to scroll up and down, respectively, in the available presets. As an arr.-ow control is clicked, the available presets scro_~1 such that preset buttons 290, rather than the text therein, visually appear to move.
Presets acts as'. filters to easily comb through available content for specific, frequently-used material. Presets may be used to store access to specific cons=ent or titles, or may be used to specify sets of titlESS. For example, a first preset can specify a set of all stations that broadcast jazz, and a second preset can specify a.ll recordings of a particular artist. Pre:~ets are available as preferences to users of the same <~lient apparatus, and are available across different client apparatus with the use of a smart card (either physical or virtual).
A different s~~t: of presets exists for each content category (radio, events, library, and music). If desired, each content category can have a predetermined number of presets (~;uch as twenty, for example) associated tlzerewii~h. In general, a preset made for a particular content category may not appear as a preset for another content category.
Alternatively, presets can be used across more than 5 one content ~~ategoary, such as for all content categories. In th:i~; case, each preset can be assigned a priority wit:zin a content category. A border color for a preset selection s.ndicates the content category to which it refers.
10 A preset can :be stored by dragging the cursor from the selection attribute indicators 214 to a preset title bar 292 when a title is active. In this case, the set of attributes is stored in a next available preset. If no presets are avai7.able, the end user is prompted to 15 overwrite a preset or to abandon the request to store the preset.
Another way to store a preset is to click and hold one of the preset selection indicators 202 for a duration that exceeds a predetermined threshold. In a 20 preferred embodiment., the predetermined threshold is about one second. ~f'lhereafter, a window is displayed to query if the end user wants to store attributes to the selected one of the preset selection indicators 202, or to delete a preset associated with the selected one of the preset selection indicators 202. The attributes are stored in response i:o a first user-initiated action using the window. 'F'he preset is deleted in response to a second user-initiated action using the window.
A further way to add a preset is by a user-selection of an attraction from the attractions window 240. The attractions window 240 provides rotating attractions in the :dorm of presets. The attractions can include adve~rtisem,ents for content. The end user can click on an attraction to add its associated preset to the presets.
Content is unfiltered with respect to an attribute having the "FALL" option. If a user-initiated selection of the select: butte>n 260 is received without receiving a user-initiated selection of an option from the list of options 270, the attribute is automatically set to .' ~L ~. .
Referring bacl~c to FIG. 2, the preset selection indicators 202 and the preset selection controls 204 provide a gr~~phica7_ user interface for operating presets. ThE~ preset selection indicators 202 display a subset of the avai7_able presets. The preset selection controls 204 control which subset of the available presets is displayed. The preset selection controls 204 include an up arrow control and a down arrow control to scroll up and down, respectively, in the available presets. As an arr.-ow control is clicked, the available presets scro_~1 such that preset buttons 290, rather than the text therein, visually appear to move.
Presets acts as'. filters to easily comb through available content for specific, frequently-used material. Presets may be used to store access to specific cons=ent or titles, or may be used to specify sets of titlESS. For example, a first preset can specify a set of all stations that broadcast jazz, and a second preset can specify a.ll recordings of a particular artist. Pre:~ets are available as preferences to users of the same <~lient apparatus, and are available across different client apparatus with the use of a smart card (either physical or virtual).
A different s~~t: of presets exists for each content category (radio, events, library, and music). If desired, each content category can have a predetermined number of presets (~;uch as twenty, for example) associated tlzerewii~h. In general, a preset made for a particular content category may not appear as a preset for another content category.
Alternatively, presets can be used across more than 5 one content ~~ategoary, such as for all content categories. In th:i~; case, each preset can be assigned a priority wit:zin a content category. A border color for a preset selection s.ndicates the content category to which it refers.
10 A preset can :be stored by dragging the cursor from the selection attribute indicators 214 to a preset title bar 292 when a title is active. In this case, the set of attributes is stored in a next available preset. If no presets are avai7.able, the end user is prompted to 15 overwrite a preset or to abandon the request to store the preset.
Another way to store a preset is to click and hold one of the preset selection indicators 202 for a duration that exceeds a predetermined threshold. In a 20 preferred embodiment., the predetermined threshold is about one second. ~f'lhereafter, a window is displayed to query if the end user wants to store attributes to the selected one of the preset selection indicators 202, or to delete a preset associated with the selected one of the preset selection indicators 202. The attributes are stored in response i:o a first user-initiated action using the window. 'F'he preset is deleted in response to a second user-initiated action using the window.
A further way to add a preset is by a user-selection of an attraction from the attractions window 240. The attractions window 240 provides rotating attractions in the :dorm of presets. The attractions can include adve~rtisem,ents for content. The end user can click on an attraction to add its associated preset to the presets.
Optionally, controls can be provided to rearrange stored prese~~s, and to select either a set of attributes or a specifics stat:ion or title to store as a preset. As another option, they presets can have functionality that supercedes any function change so that a specific preset is active throughout. the entire system. These presets also can be :rearranged by the end user.
Displayed witlzi.n each of the preset selection indicators 202 are t.wo lines of text with twelve characters pear line. For a radio station preset, the text includes call letters and a frequency of the radio station. Fo:r an event preset, the text includes as much of an event 'title 1=hat can fit within its preset selection inc~icato:_. For a library preset and a music preset, the 'text includes the first twenty-four letters of the title. Witlz use of the smart card (either physical or virtua:L), a user is provided an option to edit the titles.
2o FIG. 4 is an i7_lustration of an embodiment of the streaming indicator 216. The streaming indicator 216 is displayed whenever an encoded stream is being decoded in accordance with a streaming technique. The streaming indicator 216 provides a bar graph display representing a percentage of the=_ encoded stream being decoded. In essence, the streaming indicator 216 provides a streaming strength meter showing how close decoded audio is to original audio encoded in the stream.
Also, the stre~~ning indicator 216 provides an indicator of player activity through a resulting flickering thereof. When transmission of data via the electronic network 100 is stalled, one segment 300 of a plurality of segme:nta 302 is displayed in a first color, such as red. When 'the electronic network is not congested, tw~~ or more of the segments 302 are displayed in a second c~elor, ouch as green.
The streaming indicator 216 also includes two textual indicators :304 and 306 to the right of the segments 302. The textual indicator 304 indicates whether the audio signal is separated into stereo channels. The textual indicator 306 indicates a transportation mode f_or receiving the encoded stream.
With an activated help mode (as subsequently described in detail), the streaming indicator 216 provides a control to receive a user-initiated action to display trans:missio:n statistics. For example, upon clicking the 'bar graph, the percentage of the encoded stream used to generate the bar graph is displayed in a numerical form. The numerical form of the percentage is repeatedly updated for a duration of about three seconds. Thereafter,. the numerical form is replaced with the bar graph.
To provide an indication that a stream is beginning and that a buffer is being filled, each function includes a dial or scale. The dial or scale fills from opaque to solid from left to right to indicate how much of the buffer is filled. In this way, the left side of the dial begins filling when buffering begins, and reaches the right side of the dial when buffering has completed. A.t this time, play of the audio is commenced .
Also, while loading, a textual indication of system action can be displayed. Examples of system actions which can be displayed include, but are not limited to, a "calling server" action and a "loading file" action.
Displayed witlzi.n each of the preset selection indicators 202 are t.wo lines of text with twelve characters pear line. For a radio station preset, the text includes call letters and a frequency of the radio station. Fo:r an event preset, the text includes as much of an event 'title 1=hat can fit within its preset selection inc~icato:_. For a library preset and a music preset, the 'text includes the first twenty-four letters of the title. Witlz use of the smart card (either physical or virtua:L), a user is provided an option to edit the titles.
2o FIG. 4 is an i7_lustration of an embodiment of the streaming indicator 216. The streaming indicator 216 is displayed whenever an encoded stream is being decoded in accordance with a streaming technique. The streaming indicator 216 provides a bar graph display representing a percentage of the=_ encoded stream being decoded. In essence, the streaming indicator 216 provides a streaming strength meter showing how close decoded audio is to original audio encoded in the stream.
Also, the stre~~ning indicator 216 provides an indicator of player activity through a resulting flickering thereof. When transmission of data via the electronic network 100 is stalled, one segment 300 of a plurality of segme:nta 302 is displayed in a first color, such as red. When 'the electronic network is not congested, tw~~ or more of the segments 302 are displayed in a second c~elor, ouch as green.
The streaming indicator 216 also includes two textual indicators :304 and 306 to the right of the segments 302. The textual indicator 304 indicates whether the audio signal is separated into stereo channels. The textual indicator 306 indicates a transportation mode f_or receiving the encoded stream.
With an activated help mode (as subsequently described in detail), the streaming indicator 216 provides a control to receive a user-initiated action to display trans:missio:n statistics. For example, upon clicking the 'bar graph, the percentage of the encoded stream used to generate the bar graph is displayed in a numerical form. The numerical form of the percentage is repeatedly updated for a duration of about three seconds. Thereafter,. the numerical form is replaced with the bar graph.
To provide an indication that a stream is beginning and that a buffer is being filled, each function includes a dial or scale. The dial or scale fills from opaque to solid from left to right to indicate how much of the buffer is filled. In this way, the left side of the dial begins filling when buffering begins, and reaches the right side of the dial when buffering has completed. A.t this time, play of the audio is commenced .
Also, while loading, a textual indication of system action can be displayed. Examples of system actions which can be displayed include, but are not limited to, a "calling server" action and a "loading file" action.
If an error occurs when attempting to locate a streaming file, an error message is displayed at the location of the bar graph..
FIG. 5 i.s an illustration of an embodiment of the volume controls 212. The volume controls 212 include a plurality of like shapes having different sizes. Each of the shape~~ is dedicated to receive a user-initiated selection to playba.c:k the audio with a volume monotonicall~~ related to its size. As illustrated, the l0 shapes can ir~clude circles having five different radii.
In this case, each larger circle commands a louder volume. Muting the volume is commanded by clicking on the smallest circle. Advantageously, the end user can rapidly adju~;t the volume from soft to loud with having to go to progressively larger circles.
Referring bacl~: to FIG. 2, it is noted that the size of the first display window can be adjusted by the end user, if desired. Preferably, the first display window can be fully displayed within a browser window without requiring scrolling. It is also preferred that the player be capable of providing a collapsed mode view of the first di:~play window. The collapsed mode view may expose only t:he presets, for example. The collapsed mode view is amenable for use as a desktop player.
Preferably, a:Ll of the aforementioned controls have a phrase or description associated therewith to provide assistance to the end user. A default in the player is to provide an activated help mode, wherein a phrase or description associated with a control is automatically displayed whE~n a cursor is maintained at the control for a predetermined duration such as a second.
The held? mode control 232 is designated to receive user-initiated actions to activate and deactivate the help mode. ~C'o deactivate the help mode, the end user selects the help mode control 232. When deactivated, the help mode control 232 is displayed without the question mark:. To reactivate the help mode, the end user selects the help mode control 232 again. Tnlhen activated, the help mode control 232 is displayed with the question mark.
FIG. 6 is an illustration of an example of a portion of the display window upon receiving a user-initiated sel.ectiormof the radio category control 244.
In the radio category, a graphical radio dial 330 is displayed. The graphical radio dial 330 resembles an analog dial f:or AM and FM broadcasts. A graphical pointer 332 i.ndicat:es a current position on the graphical radio dial 330. Preferably, the graphical pointer 332 i.s shaped as a graphical needle.
Above and below the graphical pointer 332 are text boxes 334 and 336 containing information about a radio station at the current position. The information can include call letters 340, a frequency 342, a format 344, and a city of: origin 346 associated with the radio station. As the graphical pointer 332 is moved from station to station, the information in the text boxes 334 and 336 is updated accordingly.
If a plurality of radio stations exist close to one another, a niunber of dashes 350 indicative of how many radio stations exi:~t are displayed. A plurality of marks 352 (each having the form of a half-circle) are used to separate available radio stations. The number of the marks 352 can be limited to a limit such as fifteen, if ciesireci.
If a plurality of radio stations exist at the same frequency, a number of the marks 352 indicative of how many radio stations exist at the frequency is displayed to extend down from the frequency location. For example, if t:wo radio stations exist at a frequency, two half circles are d:Lsplayed at that frequency. Scanning through these stations present each station sequentially in call-letter alphabetical order.
A radio station. which does not transmit over the electronic network 100 may appear in a slot on the 5 graphical radio dial 330 to indicate its existence. To indicate that: the radio station does not currently broadcast ovE~r the electronic network 100, a message or other indicator is displayed.
Optiona:Lly, a city guide corresponding to a city 10 for the radio station can be displayed. For example, if the graphica:_ radio dial 330 provides a radio dial for San Francisco radio stations, an option (not illustrated) can be user-selected to initiate a display of the city guide f_or San Francisco.
15 ~ FIG. 7 :LS an :il.lustration of an example of the graphical radio dial 330 for selecting Internet or other electronic network broadcasts. In this case, the graphical radio dial 330 has indicia to alphabetically sort the Internet broadcasts by an identification text.
20 For example, ESPNet~ SportsZone content is located when the graphica:L point=er 332 is at "E", and C~NET content is located when the graphical pointer 332 is at "C". A
text box 360 above the graphical pointer 332 displays the text identifying the audio content (such as "ESPN", 25 for example). A te=xt box 362 below the graphical pointer 332 displays the format and the country of origin of the' audio content.
With re:Eerence to both FIG. 6 and FIG. 7, the graphical usE~r inte~r~face provides multiple ways to navigate to a radio station or an Internet broadcast.
One way includes u;~ing the selection attribute indicators 2:L4 to select a plurality of stations having chosen attributes, followed by tuning the dial to one of the stations. Attribute selection is performed in a manner described w:Lt.h reference to FIG. 3. In the radio category, selection of an "ALL" option produces all categories of stations that broadcast on FM from anywhere in the world.
The band attribute field 264 allows the end user to specify which band is to be displayed by the graphical radio dial 332. Thi;~ is a required attribute to be performed in the fir:~t step. The bands include AM, FM, (representing stations that primarily broadcast by AM
and FM, respectively;) and Internet (representing broadcasts only avai:Lable from the Internet). The default option is FM.
The category attribute field 262 allows the end user to limit the dial to at least one particular category or format. A plurality of categories or formats can h~e selected by holding down the shift key while selecting the options. In this way, the end user can repeatedly select options from the list without forcing the attribute selection to move to the next field. Text display.=_d within the category attribute field 262 includes the first chosen category followed by dots to indicate more than one category.
FIG. 8 i.s an example illustration of using the location attribute field 266. The location attribute field 266 allows th.e end user to limit the dial to stations having a specified location. Stations that broadcast on the Internet are dependent upon country only. A list: of options 370 for the location attribute is segmented into three fields: city 372, state 374, and country 376. Displ.a:yed at the top of the list are headings 382, 384, a:nd 386 which can be selected to initiate an alphabetical sort of the options 370 by city, state, and cc>u:ntry, respectively. The current field by which the options 370 are sorted is indicated by underlining its associated heading (e. g. the heading 382 is illust:rated as underlined to indicate that the options 370 are alb>habetically sorted by city ). If, for example, the end user wished to have the options 370 sorted by state, he/she could click on the heading 384.
For options not having an associated state, which can occur for some countries in the world, the field for the state 37~E is left blank. These options are displayed at the tc>p of the list of options 370.
A plura:Lity of. locations can be selected by holding down the shift key while selecting locations. In this way, the end user c:an repeatedly select locations from the list without forcing the attribute selection to move to the next field. Text displayed within the location attribute field 25E~ includes the first chosen location followed by cots to indicate more than one location.
A radio station. is automatically played once a station or a set of. stations are selected and displayed.
A first station, which preferably is the left-most station on the graphical radio dial 330, or a commercial business can determine which station is to be played first if a set of :>tations is selected.
It is noted that any of the aforementioned attributes can be modified while a station is being played. Where the modified attributes do not include the current station, the graphical radio dial 330 is redisplayed uuithout: the current station, and playback of the first station on the graphical radio dial 330 is initiated.
A second way i.o navigate to a radio station or an Internet bro~~dcast using the graphical user interface includes the advanc:e/review controls 206. A user-initiated se:Lection of an advance control 390 advances from a currently active station to a station disposed rightward the~refrorn on the graphical radio dial 330. A
FIG. 5 i.s an illustration of an embodiment of the volume controls 212. The volume controls 212 include a plurality of like shapes having different sizes. Each of the shape~~ is dedicated to receive a user-initiated selection to playba.c:k the audio with a volume monotonicall~~ related to its size. As illustrated, the l0 shapes can ir~clude circles having five different radii.
In this case, each larger circle commands a louder volume. Muting the volume is commanded by clicking on the smallest circle. Advantageously, the end user can rapidly adju~;t the volume from soft to loud with having to go to progressively larger circles.
Referring bacl~: to FIG. 2, it is noted that the size of the first display window can be adjusted by the end user, if desired. Preferably, the first display window can be fully displayed within a browser window without requiring scrolling. It is also preferred that the player be capable of providing a collapsed mode view of the first di:~play window. The collapsed mode view may expose only t:he presets, for example. The collapsed mode view is amenable for use as a desktop player.
Preferably, a:Ll of the aforementioned controls have a phrase or description associated therewith to provide assistance to the end user. A default in the player is to provide an activated help mode, wherein a phrase or description associated with a control is automatically displayed whE~n a cursor is maintained at the control for a predetermined duration such as a second.
The held? mode control 232 is designated to receive user-initiated actions to activate and deactivate the help mode. ~C'o deactivate the help mode, the end user selects the help mode control 232. When deactivated, the help mode control 232 is displayed without the question mark:. To reactivate the help mode, the end user selects the help mode control 232 again. Tnlhen activated, the help mode control 232 is displayed with the question mark.
FIG. 6 is an illustration of an example of a portion of the display window upon receiving a user-initiated sel.ectiormof the radio category control 244.
In the radio category, a graphical radio dial 330 is displayed. The graphical radio dial 330 resembles an analog dial f:or AM and FM broadcasts. A graphical pointer 332 i.ndicat:es a current position on the graphical radio dial 330. Preferably, the graphical pointer 332 i.s shaped as a graphical needle.
Above and below the graphical pointer 332 are text boxes 334 and 336 containing information about a radio station at the current position. The information can include call letters 340, a frequency 342, a format 344, and a city of: origin 346 associated with the radio station. As the graphical pointer 332 is moved from station to station, the information in the text boxes 334 and 336 is updated accordingly.
If a plurality of radio stations exist close to one another, a niunber of dashes 350 indicative of how many radio stations exi:~t are displayed. A plurality of marks 352 (each having the form of a half-circle) are used to separate available radio stations. The number of the marks 352 can be limited to a limit such as fifteen, if ciesireci.
If a plurality of radio stations exist at the same frequency, a number of the marks 352 indicative of how many radio stations exist at the frequency is displayed to extend down from the frequency location. For example, if t:wo radio stations exist at a frequency, two half circles are d:Lsplayed at that frequency. Scanning through these stations present each station sequentially in call-letter alphabetical order.
A radio station. which does not transmit over the electronic network 100 may appear in a slot on the 5 graphical radio dial 330 to indicate its existence. To indicate that: the radio station does not currently broadcast ovE~r the electronic network 100, a message or other indicator is displayed.
Optiona:Lly, a city guide corresponding to a city 10 for the radio station can be displayed. For example, if the graphica:_ radio dial 330 provides a radio dial for San Francisco radio stations, an option (not illustrated) can be user-selected to initiate a display of the city guide f_or San Francisco.
15 ~ FIG. 7 :LS an :il.lustration of an example of the graphical radio dial 330 for selecting Internet or other electronic network broadcasts. In this case, the graphical radio dial 330 has indicia to alphabetically sort the Internet broadcasts by an identification text.
20 For example, ESPNet~ SportsZone content is located when the graphica:L point=er 332 is at "E", and C~NET content is located when the graphical pointer 332 is at "C". A
text box 360 above the graphical pointer 332 displays the text identifying the audio content (such as "ESPN", 25 for example). A te=xt box 362 below the graphical pointer 332 displays the format and the country of origin of the' audio content.
With re:Eerence to both FIG. 6 and FIG. 7, the graphical usE~r inte~r~face provides multiple ways to navigate to a radio station or an Internet broadcast.
One way includes u;~ing the selection attribute indicators 2:L4 to select a plurality of stations having chosen attributes, followed by tuning the dial to one of the stations. Attribute selection is performed in a manner described w:Lt.h reference to FIG. 3. In the radio category, selection of an "ALL" option produces all categories of stations that broadcast on FM from anywhere in the world.
The band attribute field 264 allows the end user to specify which band is to be displayed by the graphical radio dial 332. Thi;~ is a required attribute to be performed in the fir:~t step. The bands include AM, FM, (representing stations that primarily broadcast by AM
and FM, respectively;) and Internet (representing broadcasts only avai:Lable from the Internet). The default option is FM.
The category attribute field 262 allows the end user to limit the dial to at least one particular category or format. A plurality of categories or formats can h~e selected by holding down the shift key while selecting the options. In this way, the end user can repeatedly select options from the list without forcing the attribute selection to move to the next field. Text display.=_d within the category attribute field 262 includes the first chosen category followed by dots to indicate more than one category.
FIG. 8 i.s an example illustration of using the location attribute field 266. The location attribute field 266 allows th.e end user to limit the dial to stations having a specified location. Stations that broadcast on the Internet are dependent upon country only. A list: of options 370 for the location attribute is segmented into three fields: city 372, state 374, and country 376. Displ.a:yed at the top of the list are headings 382, 384, a:nd 386 which can be selected to initiate an alphabetical sort of the options 370 by city, state, and cc>u:ntry, respectively. The current field by which the options 370 are sorted is indicated by underlining its associated heading (e. g. the heading 382 is illust:rated as underlined to indicate that the options 370 are alb>habetically sorted by city ). If, for example, the end user wished to have the options 370 sorted by state, he/she could click on the heading 384.
For options not having an associated state, which can occur for some countries in the world, the field for the state 37~E is left blank. These options are displayed at the tc>p of the list of options 370.
A plura:Lity of. locations can be selected by holding down the shift key while selecting locations. In this way, the end user c:an repeatedly select locations from the list without forcing the attribute selection to move to the next field. Text displayed within the location attribute field 25E~ includes the first chosen location followed by cots to indicate more than one location.
A radio station. is automatically played once a station or a set of. stations are selected and displayed.
A first station, which preferably is the left-most station on the graphical radio dial 330, or a commercial business can determine which station is to be played first if a set of :>tations is selected.
It is noted that any of the aforementioned attributes can be modified while a station is being played. Where the modified attributes do not include the current station, the graphical radio dial 330 is redisplayed uuithout: the current station, and playback of the first station on the graphical radio dial 330 is initiated.
A second way i.o navigate to a radio station or an Internet bro~~dcast using the graphical user interface includes the advanc:e/review controls 206. A user-initiated se:Lection of an advance control 390 advances from a currently active station to a station disposed rightward the~refrorn on the graphical radio dial 330. A
user-initiat<~d selection of a review control 392 changes from a currently active station to a station disposed leftward therefrom o~n the graphical radio dial 330. A
user-initiatcsd selection of one of the marks 352 navigates to a stai:ion associated therewith. Regardless of the manner to which the radio station is navigated, streaming of the radio station is initiated upon its selection.
A third way to navigate to a radio station or an Internet bro~~dcast i.s to use presets. As described with reference to FIG. 2, the presets are available to access frequently-used radio stations. If the preset attributes i,zclude more than one option per attribute, that attribute is ,s.>ed to populate the text of those sets. Each preset button may display up to two items of characteristics wh.ic:h define its associated radio station or group of radio stations.
A fourth way to navigate to a radio station or an Internet broadcast is to use a smart card (either physical or virtual). In addition to or as an alternative to storing preferences, a smart card can be used by a promoter t;o allow the end user easy or unrestricted access to particular content. When a smart card for a particular station is made active, the station or group of stations is presented within the graphical radio dial 330. If the attribute options include more than one item, that attribute reads the associated text. Any activity controlled by a smart card is represented by an oblique version of the font for displaying a function text label (i.e. the "radio"
label in the radio content control 244, the "events"
label in the events category control 245, the "library"
label in the library category control 246, and the "music" label in thE~ music category control 247). The smart card control. 230 displays the title of the smart card.
FIG. 9 is an example of the second display region 222 providing auxiliary information about a particular station. The auxiliary information is displayed in response to r~=_ceivinc~ a user-initiated selection of the information c~~ntrol 220. The auxiliary information can include a title of a current song being played by the station, an artist a~>sociated with the song, an album containing the song, a label for the song, and an image of the album cover ant. An option 402 is designated to receive a user-initiated event to display more auxiliary information about t:he song. An option 404 is designated to receive a 'user-initiated event to purchase the song or an album containing the song. An option 406 is designated to receive a user-initiated event to display a programming guide.
The auxiliary information can also include promotional advertising provided by the station, such as a logo 410 or another image, and one or more links to related sites on the electronic network. The logo 410 acts as a control to initiate a hyperlink to a destination in the electronic network 100, such as to a home page of the radio station. Another window is opened to present information from the destination.
FIG. 10 is an example of a programming guide in the second display region 222. The programming guide includes a planned schedule of the radio station in a list format. The liat includes days of the week and times for the programming. Active content 420 is emphasized with bold typeface. Specific events listed in the programming guide can provide links to archived material. Clicking on or otherwise selecting a link brings the en.d user to the events category with the attributes populated for an event corresponding to the link. Optior.;ally, t:he programming guide can accept inputs to di~:play the schedule for other times throughout a day orwweek. Future events can be 5 scheduled in this way.
V~hen no station is active, the second display region 222 may be used to display an advertisement. The advertisement: can be provided as a viewing object while streaming buf:ferinc~ occurs. When there is a period of 10 inactivity far the player, the second display region 222 can resume displaying advertising for a station or another business entity.
It is noted that the radio category can optionally provide additional functionality not specifically 15 illustrated :.n the drawings. Examples of additional functionality include: (i) a call button in the main area of the :Lnterface to initiate an Internet telephone call between the c~~Lient apparatus 106 and the radio station; (ii;~ option.s to support a chat room among 20 listeners of a radio station; (iii) a presentation of player information in languages other than English; (iv) a "show map" option for choosing a location using a graphic reprc~sentai:i.on having mapped zones to represent cities or regions of: the country and world; (v) a 25 feedback mechanism t.o rate the station as a whole, a playlist, a disk jockey, or a current song with a 1 to 10 pick list on a :~t:ation information screen; and (vi) a comment line that <~l.lows the end user to submit text to the station with o:r without the aforementioned rating.
user-initiatcsd selection of one of the marks 352 navigates to a stai:ion associated therewith. Regardless of the manner to which the radio station is navigated, streaming of the radio station is initiated upon its selection.
A third way to navigate to a radio station or an Internet bro~~dcast i.s to use presets. As described with reference to FIG. 2, the presets are available to access frequently-used radio stations. If the preset attributes i,zclude more than one option per attribute, that attribute is ,s.>ed to populate the text of those sets. Each preset button may display up to two items of characteristics wh.ic:h define its associated radio station or group of radio stations.
A fourth way to navigate to a radio station or an Internet broadcast is to use a smart card (either physical or virtual). In addition to or as an alternative to storing preferences, a smart card can be used by a promoter t;o allow the end user easy or unrestricted access to particular content. When a smart card for a particular station is made active, the station or group of stations is presented within the graphical radio dial 330. If the attribute options include more than one item, that attribute reads the associated text. Any activity controlled by a smart card is represented by an oblique version of the font for displaying a function text label (i.e. the "radio"
label in the radio content control 244, the "events"
label in the events category control 245, the "library"
label in the library category control 246, and the "music" label in thE~ music category control 247). The smart card control. 230 displays the title of the smart card.
FIG. 9 is an example of the second display region 222 providing auxiliary information about a particular station. The auxiliary information is displayed in response to r~=_ceivinc~ a user-initiated selection of the information c~~ntrol 220. The auxiliary information can include a title of a current song being played by the station, an artist a~>sociated with the song, an album containing the song, a label for the song, and an image of the album cover ant. An option 402 is designated to receive a user-initiated event to display more auxiliary information about t:he song. An option 404 is designated to receive a 'user-initiated event to purchase the song or an album containing the song. An option 406 is designated to receive a user-initiated event to display a programming guide.
The auxiliary information can also include promotional advertising provided by the station, such as a logo 410 or another image, and one or more links to related sites on the electronic network. The logo 410 acts as a control to initiate a hyperlink to a destination in the electronic network 100, such as to a home page of the radio station. Another window is opened to present information from the destination.
FIG. 10 is an example of a programming guide in the second display region 222. The programming guide includes a planned schedule of the radio station in a list format. The liat includes days of the week and times for the programming. Active content 420 is emphasized with bold typeface. Specific events listed in the programming guide can provide links to archived material. Clicking on or otherwise selecting a link brings the en.d user to the events category with the attributes populated for an event corresponding to the link. Optior.;ally, t:he programming guide can accept inputs to di~:play the schedule for other times throughout a day orwweek. Future events can be 5 scheduled in this way.
V~hen no station is active, the second display region 222 may be used to display an advertisement. The advertisement: can be provided as a viewing object while streaming buf:ferinc~ occurs. When there is a period of 10 inactivity far the player, the second display region 222 can resume displaying advertising for a station or another business entity.
It is noted that the radio category can optionally provide additional functionality not specifically 15 illustrated :.n the drawings. Examples of additional functionality include: (i) a call button in the main area of the :Lnterface to initiate an Internet telephone call between the c~~Lient apparatus 106 and the radio station; (ii;~ option.s to support a chat room among 20 listeners of a radio station; (iii) a presentation of player information in languages other than English; (iv) a "show map" option for choosing a location using a graphic reprc~sentai:i.on having mapped zones to represent cities or regions of: the country and world; (v) a 25 feedback mechanism t.o rate the station as a whole, a playlist, a disk jockey, or a current song with a 1 to 10 pick list on a :~t:ation information screen; and (vi) a comment line that <~l.lows the end user to submit text to the station with o:r without the aforementioned rating.
30 FIG. 11 is an illustration of an example of a portion of tl:~e interface displayed upon receiving a user-initiated sel~aca ion of the events category control 245. In the events category, a graphical time scale 450 is displayed. A time marker 452 indicates, for an event, a current time position on the graphical time scale 450. The current time position is gauged relative to a time the event occurred. An indication 454 of a time standard. or a tame zone is displayed to the right of the graphical timE=_ scale 450.
An indication 456 is displayed if the event is live. If the: event :is archived, the indication 456 is replaced by the date that the event occurred.
A start time 9:60 and an end time 462 on the graphical time scale 450 may be specified in a preference. However, the default is to present the start time 4E;0 and t;~he end time 462 based on the actual occurrence of: the event. Alternatively, a timeline indicating an amount of time that the end user has been listening to the event can be displayed. This timeline is preferred in cases where there is an inaccurate record of the original recording.
For live events having an uncertain length (e.g. a sporting event), an estimated timeline is initially displayed. E>hould the duration of the event go beyond the estimated timeline, an updated timeline is displayed with a start time ~~et to the end time of the estimated timeline.
For an archived. event, the time marker 452 can be advanced and revers>ed using the advance/review controls 206. For a 7_ive event, the advance/review controls 206 are not active. To indicate this to the end user, the advance/review controls 206 are displayed in a first color, such as grey, rather than a second color, such as black, for a live event.
The graphical user interface provides multiple ways to navigate t:o an event. One way includes using the selection att=ribute indicators 214 to select an event having chosen attributes. Attribute selection is performed in a manner described with reference to FIG.
3. In the e~rents category, selection of an "ALL" option produces a 1:_st of all events.
The category attribute field 262 allows the end user to limit; the events to at least one particular category or f=ormat" A plurality of categories or formats can be selE~cted by holding down the shift key while selecting the options. In this way, the end user can repeated:Ly select options from the list without forcing the attribute selection to move to the next field. Text displayed within the category attribute field 262 includes the first chosen category followed by dots to indicate more than one category.
FIG. 12 is an Example illustration of using the time attribute fie:Ld 264. The time attribute field 264 allows the end user to specify a date and a time period at which the event i.s either scheduled to occur or has occurred. S.=veral options can be made available to specify spec=ific dat=es. One option is to display a calendar 470 in the=_ first display region 218 for selecting a day or a block of days. A day is selected by navigatin~~ the calendar 470 to the day, and clicking on the day. A blocl~: of days is selected by clicking on a first date while holding the shift key, and then clicking on the ending date.
FIG. 13 is an Example illustration of using the event attribute fi~e7_d 266. Upon selecting the event attribute field 266, a list of events 480 defined by the category attribute f:field 262 and the time attribute field 264 is displayed. The list of events 480 has a first column to display the name of the event, and a second column to display the date and start time of the event. Displayed at. the top of the list are headings 482 and 484 which can be selected to initiate an sort of the events 450 by event name (alphabetically) or by start time (numeric;ally), respectively. The current field by which the events 480 are sorted is indicated by underlining its as:~ociated heading (e.g. the heading 482 is illustrated as underlined to indicate that the events 480 are alphabetically sorted by event name). By default, the events 480 are sorted by event name.
A second way i~o navigate to an event is to use a preset. As described with reference to FIG. 2, some presets are <iedicat;ed to access events. If a preset specifies a <~ategory attribute and a time attribute rather than an event, the event attribute list is made active upon selecting its preset button. Thereafter, the end user can select an event from the list. If a preset speci:Eies an event, the event will begin to play upon selecting its preset button as soon as the file is available.
A third way to navigate to an event is to select an archived or a scheduled event from a radio station programming guide. In response to receiving a user-initiated s election of an event from the programming guide, the graphical. user interface provides the events category. Tlae event: attribute field 266 is populated with the selected ~=vent. Playback of archived events is automatically initiated. For scheduled events, a prompt to receive a user-:initiated selection of a notification method is pr~wided.
FIG. 14 is an ~_llustration of an example of a notification prompt. If an event has not occurred at the time of selection, but is scheduled to occur subsequent to the time of selection, a notification options window 490 is displayed rather than the graphical time line. Although not illustrated, the streaming indicator 216 indicates the status of the event (such as not yet occurred) in this case. Further, the play button 250 is modified to display the word "SCHEDULE" as a confirmation that the event is scheduled. If the end user has not provided scheduling preferences, a prompt: to enter the preferences is displayed. The schedule and the preferences are stored to a preferences sm~ar-t card (either physical or virtual).
The notification options window 490 provides three options. A first o:pt:ion is to send a message to the end user before the event: occurs. For example, the message can be sent a predetermined number of minutes before the event. The message can include an electronic mail message sent to the client apparatus 106 or a paging message sent to a pacer associated with the end user. A
second option is to automatically activate the player, if the client apparatus 106 is activated, at the time of the event. A third option is to record the event for subsequent playback. In this case, the recorded event becomes a preset for later access. Text associated with the preset button is displayed in a bold typeface. If an event is not yet available, an indication thereof can be provided. If an archive of the event is no longer available, th.e preset is automatically removed.
It is noted that a personal notification message can be sent to an end user without use of the aforementioned notification prompt. In this case, a notification message is sent to the end user for an event or a program which may be of interest based upon listening behavior o:r other activity of the end user.
Hence, in general, tlhe server 102 can provide personal notification for content that is broadcast at a scheduled time based upon either an expressed interest of the end user (e. g. through the aforementioned active marking for content.using the notification prompt) or a passive interest of the end user (e. g. through monitoring of: user activity} .
A fourth way t.o navigate to an event is to use a smart card (either physical or virtual). The smart card can allow access to specific events as promotions, for example. When a promotional smart card is made active, 5 the content specified in the card is used to populate attributes in. the player. Any text populated by a smart card is represented. by an oblique version of the font for displaying a function text label.
Smarts cards (either physical or virtual) also 10 facilitate access t.o specific events as part of a playlist. In this case, the end user can specify and save a playli.st of events to the smart card. The playlist is used to control the player. The playlist may jump to different selections, in which case the text 15 of the selection ie;;presented in an oblique font. It is noted that the playlist information stored can be separate from a physical or a virtual smart card. For example, the playli.st information can be stored by the storage device 116 of the server 102 or by the storage 20 device 132 of: the client apparatus 106.
FIG. 15 illustrates an example of the second display region 222 displaying auxiliary information about an event. The auxiliary information is displayed in response t:o rece:iving a user-initiated selection of 25 the information control 220, which includes the text "EVENT INFO" for events.
The auxiliary information is dependent upon the type of the event. Examples of default information include an original time of the event, a location, 30 guests, and t:opics.. For example, with a sporting event, the auxiliary infoomation can include team logos 500 and 502, a current score: for the sporting event, players, hosts, guest:, and links to sites related to the event.
Linking to one of i~r~e sites causes another window to be 35 opened .
An indication 456 is displayed if the event is live. If the: event :is archived, the indication 456 is replaced by the date that the event occurred.
A start time 9:60 and an end time 462 on the graphical time scale 450 may be specified in a preference. However, the default is to present the start time 4E;0 and t;~he end time 462 based on the actual occurrence of: the event. Alternatively, a timeline indicating an amount of time that the end user has been listening to the event can be displayed. This timeline is preferred in cases where there is an inaccurate record of the original recording.
For live events having an uncertain length (e.g. a sporting event), an estimated timeline is initially displayed. E>hould the duration of the event go beyond the estimated timeline, an updated timeline is displayed with a start time ~~et to the end time of the estimated timeline.
For an archived. event, the time marker 452 can be advanced and revers>ed using the advance/review controls 206. For a 7_ive event, the advance/review controls 206 are not active. To indicate this to the end user, the advance/review controls 206 are displayed in a first color, such as grey, rather than a second color, such as black, for a live event.
The graphical user interface provides multiple ways to navigate t:o an event. One way includes using the selection att=ribute indicators 214 to select an event having chosen attributes. Attribute selection is performed in a manner described with reference to FIG.
3. In the e~rents category, selection of an "ALL" option produces a 1:_st of all events.
The category attribute field 262 allows the end user to limit; the events to at least one particular category or f=ormat" A plurality of categories or formats can be selE~cted by holding down the shift key while selecting the options. In this way, the end user can repeated:Ly select options from the list without forcing the attribute selection to move to the next field. Text displayed within the category attribute field 262 includes the first chosen category followed by dots to indicate more than one category.
FIG. 12 is an Example illustration of using the time attribute fie:Ld 264. The time attribute field 264 allows the end user to specify a date and a time period at which the event i.s either scheduled to occur or has occurred. S.=veral options can be made available to specify spec=ific dat=es. One option is to display a calendar 470 in the=_ first display region 218 for selecting a day or a block of days. A day is selected by navigatin~~ the calendar 470 to the day, and clicking on the day. A blocl~: of days is selected by clicking on a first date while holding the shift key, and then clicking on the ending date.
FIG. 13 is an Example illustration of using the event attribute fi~e7_d 266. Upon selecting the event attribute field 266, a list of events 480 defined by the category attribute f:field 262 and the time attribute field 264 is displayed. The list of events 480 has a first column to display the name of the event, and a second column to display the date and start time of the event. Displayed at. the top of the list are headings 482 and 484 which can be selected to initiate an sort of the events 450 by event name (alphabetically) or by start time (numeric;ally), respectively. The current field by which the events 480 are sorted is indicated by underlining its as:~ociated heading (e.g. the heading 482 is illustrated as underlined to indicate that the events 480 are alphabetically sorted by event name). By default, the events 480 are sorted by event name.
A second way i~o navigate to an event is to use a preset. As described with reference to FIG. 2, some presets are <iedicat;ed to access events. If a preset specifies a <~ategory attribute and a time attribute rather than an event, the event attribute list is made active upon selecting its preset button. Thereafter, the end user can select an event from the list. If a preset speci:Eies an event, the event will begin to play upon selecting its preset button as soon as the file is available.
A third way to navigate to an event is to select an archived or a scheduled event from a radio station programming guide. In response to receiving a user-initiated s election of an event from the programming guide, the graphical. user interface provides the events category. Tlae event: attribute field 266 is populated with the selected ~=vent. Playback of archived events is automatically initiated. For scheduled events, a prompt to receive a user-:initiated selection of a notification method is pr~wided.
FIG. 14 is an ~_llustration of an example of a notification prompt. If an event has not occurred at the time of selection, but is scheduled to occur subsequent to the time of selection, a notification options window 490 is displayed rather than the graphical time line. Although not illustrated, the streaming indicator 216 indicates the status of the event (such as not yet occurred) in this case. Further, the play button 250 is modified to display the word "SCHEDULE" as a confirmation that the event is scheduled. If the end user has not provided scheduling preferences, a prompt: to enter the preferences is displayed. The schedule and the preferences are stored to a preferences sm~ar-t card (either physical or virtual).
The notification options window 490 provides three options. A first o:pt:ion is to send a message to the end user before the event: occurs. For example, the message can be sent a predetermined number of minutes before the event. The message can include an electronic mail message sent to the client apparatus 106 or a paging message sent to a pacer associated with the end user. A
second option is to automatically activate the player, if the client apparatus 106 is activated, at the time of the event. A third option is to record the event for subsequent playback. In this case, the recorded event becomes a preset for later access. Text associated with the preset button is displayed in a bold typeface. If an event is not yet available, an indication thereof can be provided. If an archive of the event is no longer available, th.e preset is automatically removed.
It is noted that a personal notification message can be sent to an end user without use of the aforementioned notification prompt. In this case, a notification message is sent to the end user for an event or a program which may be of interest based upon listening behavior o:r other activity of the end user.
Hence, in general, tlhe server 102 can provide personal notification for content that is broadcast at a scheduled time based upon either an expressed interest of the end user (e. g. through the aforementioned active marking for content.using the notification prompt) or a passive interest of the end user (e. g. through monitoring of: user activity} .
A fourth way t.o navigate to an event is to use a smart card (either physical or virtual). The smart card can allow access to specific events as promotions, for example. When a promotional smart card is made active, 5 the content specified in the card is used to populate attributes in. the player. Any text populated by a smart card is represented. by an oblique version of the font for displaying a function text label.
Smarts cards (either physical or virtual) also 10 facilitate access t.o specific events as part of a playlist. In this case, the end user can specify and save a playli.st of events to the smart card. The playlist is used to control the player. The playlist may jump to different selections, in which case the text 15 of the selection ie;;presented in an oblique font. It is noted that the playlist information stored can be separate from a physical or a virtual smart card. For example, the playli.st information can be stored by the storage device 116 of the server 102 or by the storage 20 device 132 of: the client apparatus 106.
FIG. 15 illustrates an example of the second display region 222 displaying auxiliary information about an event. The auxiliary information is displayed in response t:o rece:iving a user-initiated selection of 25 the information control 220, which includes the text "EVENT INFO" for events.
The auxiliary information is dependent upon the type of the event. Examples of default information include an original time of the event, a location, 30 guests, and t:opics.. For example, with a sporting event, the auxiliary infoomation can include team logos 500 and 502, a current score: for the sporting event, players, hosts, guest:, and links to sites related to the event.
Linking to one of i~r~e sites causes another window to be 35 opened .
It is nc>ted that the events category can optionally provide additional functionality not specifically illustrated i.n the drawings. Examples of additional functionality include: (i) substituting the event attribute field 266 with a different attribute field, such as a location attribute field, and providing a time line with marks representing the union of events; (ii) temporally arranging events on the timeline so that an event can selected i:n a manner similar to the graphical radio dial (allowing the end user to rapidly alternate between two :>electi.o:ns); (iii) inserting advertising in the form of marker; at predetermined locations along the time scale (allowing the end user to go to another site when there i:~ a pause in the event without losing track of where the~~ are i.n the event ) ; ( iv) a feedback mechanism to rate t:he event as a whole, the subject of the event, a particular participant in the event, or the broadcast of the event with a 1 to 10 pick list on an event information :screen; and (v) a comment line that allows the end user. to submit textual feedback with or without the aforementioned rating.
FIG. 16 is an illustration of an example of a portion of the interface displayed upon receiving a user-initiatESd selection of the library category control 246. In the library category, a graphical time scale 520 is displayed. A. time marker 522 indicates a current time position, for a. library content selection, on the graphical time sca=Le 520. The graphical time scale 520 represents a total time 524 for the selection. The time marker 522 can be rnoved manually using the pointing device or can be moved using the advance/review controls 206.
The graphical riser interface provides multiple ways to navigate 'to content in the library category. A first way includes using t:he selection attribute indicators 214 to select content having chosen attributes.
Attribute selection.:is performed in a manner described with reference to F'IG. 3. In the library category, selection of an "ALL" option produces a list of all library content.
The category attribute field 262 allows the end user to limit. the library content to at least one particular category or format of spoken audio. A custom attribute allows a plurality of categories or formats l0 can be selected by holding down the shift key while selecting the' options. In this way, the end user can repeatedly select options from the list without forcing the attribute: selection to move to the next field. It is noted that: categories can be specialized with options such best sellers and reviews.
The author att:ribute field 264 allows the end user to specify an author of the content. Work that is absent of an author (such as non-book material) can have a lead person in the work listed as an author. Upon selecting the author attribute field 264, a list of authors having content limited to the category specified in the category attribute field 262 is displayed. The end user can select: an author from the list.
Upon se:Lecting the title attribute field 266, a list of titlEa that: satisfy the parameters specified in the category attribute field 262 and the author attribute field 261 is displayed. The end user can select a tit:Le from the list.
FIG. 17 shows an example of text in the fields 262, 264, and 266 associated with the aforementioned approach to navigating to library material. inThen information in a field is longer t~h.at the width of the field, the full text of the _i.nformation is available by maintaining a cursor on the field. In response to this user-initiated event, the width of the field is expanded to accommodate the full text.
A second way to navigate to library content is to use a preset. As described with reference to FIG. 2, some presets are dedicated to the library section. Upon selecting a preset button, attributes specified by its corresponding preset:, are used to populate the attribute fields 262, 264, and 266. If the preset defines a set of titles, the=_ user can select one of the titles using the title attribute field 266.
A third way to navigate to library content is to use a smart card (either physical or virtual). The smart card is used to populate attributes in the player.
Thereafter, the user is presented with the content cued and ready to play, or is presented with a list of titles to select from. The smart card can allow access to otherwise una~;railab:Le~ content that is made available through privi:Leges atored in the smart card. During smart card operation, the Library function label is displayed using an oblique font.
Smarts cards also facilitate access to specific titles as part of a playlist. In this case, the end user can specify and save a playlist of titles to the smart card. 'rhe playlist is used to control the player.
The playlist is amenable for transfer between the end user and another end user, and between a plurality of access points for t:he end user. When an item from a playlist is selected, its attributes populate the attribute fields 26:2, 264, and 266, and the item is cued for play.
Regardless of the method of navigating to a title, the graphical user interface can provide indicators and controls to provide access to specific chapters or sections of the material in a manner similar to tracks of a compact disk. A time indicator can be displayed at the top of th.e time ;scale relative to each particular segment or relative to the time from the beginning of the material. As il:Lustrated in FIG. 18, an indicator 540 of which chapter is current and the number of chapters that. exist is displayed at an end of the time line. Clicking on the indicator 540 presents a pick list of chapters.
Cueing t:o anot:her part of the content can be performed using the advance/review controls 206 to advance through the: time bar. When advanced beyond the length of a chapter, a subsequent chapter is provided.
Holding down the actvance/review controls 206 advances or returns to other chapters.
Alternatively, tags marking specific content on the time bar can be user-selected to advance to specific content. Further, a user-initiated selection of a point on the time 7_ine moves the time marker to the point.
Optiona:Lly, the time marker can have specially-encoded matex-ial a~~sociated therewith to allow for users to find specific segments. This is beneficial in educational applications. Another option is to provide titles of ch~~pters rather than chapter numbers in the indicator 540. Links to reviewers or other comments can be embedded in the time scale to allow the end user to pause and ref-_lect on the current material.
FIG. 19 illusi~rates an example of the second display region 222 being used to provide auxiliary information about a title. The auxiliary information is displayed in response to receiving a user-initiated selection of the information control 220, which includes the text "TI~f'ILE INFO" for library content . The auxiliary ink=ormation can include specific information for the titlf~, a siurimary of the title, a table of contents, credits, comments on the title, accompanying text, links to reviews of the title, links to related areas, an image 550 of the author(s), and an image 552 of the cover of a book, for example.
5 It is noted that the library category can optionally provide additional functionality not specifically illustrated in the drawings. Examples of additional fu.nction.a:lity include: (i) a feedback mechanism to rate th~~ title as a whole, the author, 10 reading or translation of the title with a 1 to 10 pick list on a lix~rary information screen; and (ii) a comment line that allows th:e end user to submit textual feedback with or without the:,aforementioned rating.
FIG. 20 is an illustration of an example of a 15 portion of the interface displayed upon receiving a user-initiated selection of the music category control 247. In the music category, a graphical time scale 600 is displayed much like the graphical time scale 520 for the library category. A time marker 602 indicates a 20 current time position for a music selection, such as an album or a song, on the graphical time scale 600. The graphical time scale 600 represents a total time 604 for the music se7_ection. The time marker 602 can be moved manually using a c7_ick-and-drag operation with a 25 pointing device or can be moved using the advance/review controls 206.
The graphical user interface provides multiple ways to navigate t:o cont:ent in the music category. A first way includes using the selection attribute indicators 30 214 to select. content having chosen attributes .
Attribute se_Lection is performed in a manner described with reference to I?IG. 3. In the music category, selection of an "AI~L~" option produces a list of all music content, .
WO 99/Z7681 PC1'/US98/25092 The category attribute field 262 allows the end user to limit'the library content to at least one particular category or format. Traditional categories and formats of music (e.g. rock, jazz, pop, etc.) can be provided. A plurality of categories or formats can be selected by holding down the shift key while selecting the options. In this way, the end user can repeatedly select options from.l~he list without forcing the attribute selection 1~o move to the next field.
The artist attribute field 264 allows the end user to specify an. artist of the content. Upon selecting the artist attrix~ute fie:Ld 264, a list of artists having content limited to the category specified in the category attribute field 262 is displayed. The end user can select ar,. artist from the list.
Upon se7_ectinc~ the title attribute field 266, a list of titlea that.;satisfy the parameters specified in the category attribute field 262 and the artist attribute field 264 is displayed. The end user can select a title from the list. The list of titles can include album titlea and song titles.
When inf=ormation in one of the fields 262, 264, and 266 is longer that the display width of the field, the full text of the information is available by maintaining a cursor on t:he field. In response to this user-initiated event, the width of the field is expanded to accommodate t:he full text .
A second way t=o navigate to music content is to use a preset. As described with reference to FIG. 2, some presets are dedicated to the music section. Upon selecting a preset button, attributes specified by its corresponding presets are used to populate the attribute fields 262, a?64, and 266. If the preset defines a set of titles, the user. can select one of the titles using the title attribute: field 266.
*rB
A third way to navigate to music content is to use a smart card (either physical or virtual). The smart card is used to populate attributes in the player.
Thereafter, t:he user is presented with the content cued and ready to play, or is presented with a list of titles to select from.
Smarts cards also facilitate access to specific titles as pant of a playlist. In this case, the end user can specify and save a playlist of titles to the l0 smart card. The p7_aylist is used to control the player.
The playlist is amenable for transfer between the end user and another end user, and between a plurality of access points for t:h.e end user. When an item from a playlist is :~electe~d., its attributes populate the attribute fiE=lds 262, 264, and 266, and the item is cued for play.
Regardless of t:he method of navigating to a title, the graphical user interface can provide indicators and controls to ~~rovide access to specific tracks, sections, or parts of ~~he musi.c. As illustrated in FIG. 21, an indicator 620 of which track is current and the number of tracks th~~t exi:~t. is displayed at an end of the time line. Clicking on the indicator 620 presents a pick list of tracl~cs.
Cueing to another part of the music content can be performed using the advance/review controls 206 to advance through the time bar. Holding down the advance/review controls 206 for more than a predetermine~~ time duration (such as one second, for example) advances or returns to other tracks immediately. A user-initiated selection of a point on the time line moves the time marker to the point.
Optionally, then time marker 602 can have specially encoded material associated therewith to allow for users to find specific'songs or other segments. Another option is to provide titles of songs and/or credits rather than track numbers in the indicator 620.
Controls can be provided to allow titles in an album to be rearranged for p=La.yback.
Referrin~~ back t:o FIG. 2, the second display region 222 can be usE:d to provide auxiliary information about music content. The auxiliary information is displayed in response to rece_Lving a user-initiated selection of the information coni~rol 220, which includes the text "ALBUM INFO" :Eor mu:~i.c content. The auxiliary information c<~n inc:Lude specific information for the current title such <~s; album cover graphics, liner notes, tray back images, images of the artist(s), producer and writer credits, and distribution label information, for example.
It is noted that: the music category can optionally provide additional functionality not specifically illustrated i:n the drawings. Examples of additional functionality include: (i) a feedback mechanism to rate aspects of the musi~~ such as the artist, the album, a song, and a producer, using a 1 to 10 pick list on a music information screen; (ii) a comment line that allows the end user t:o submit textual feedback with or without the aforeme:nt:ioned rating; and (iii) an ability to receive, decode, and display streamed music video in the second display region 222.
FIG. 22 illustrates an example of a search feature provided in the second display region 222. The search feature is activated in response to receiving a user-initiated selection of the search control 224. If the user-initiated selec lion is received while the search feature is active, h<srein-described search fields are reset.
The search feature receives a user-entered search string. The search.;string is displayed at a location 630. The search string includes one or more keywords which can have the form of a Boolean expression. A list of keywords can be combined using a "+" character. To limit the selection. to one of the keywords, a "-"
character precedes t:he keyword. Generally, the keywords are case insensitive.
Using tree search string, a search of a database is performed in dependence upon user-selectable search criteria. The database can be provided by the server 102 and/or the server 144. The search criteria limits where to search in the database for the search string.
The search criteria includes fields for the radio IS category, the eventa category, the library category, and the music category. Each search criterion can be activated anc~ deactivated using a graphical check box associated therewith. An "x" character is displayed at the graphica7_ check box to indicate that its associated search criterion i:~ activated. As a default, all search criteria are activated.
A first button 632 is responsive to a user-initiated se:Lection to provide further fields to be searched. The first button 632 can be subsequently selected to provide. still further fields to be searched.
Each additional fiE:ld provided in response to the first button 632 i:~ activa.ted by default. The end user can deselect the activated fields if desired. A second button 634 i:~ respon.sive to a user-initiated selection to provide fESwer fields to be searched.
The search is ~>erformed in response to a user-initiated se:Lection of a button 636. Results of the search are d:isplayE~d in the second display region 222.
FIG. 23 illustrates an example of search results displayed in the second display region 222. The search results are sorted b_y category (in the order of radio, events, library, anal music). Preferably, items are 5 color-coded i.n dependence upon its category. Within each categor~~ are three attribute headings. Search results within each category can be sorted by an attribute by select.i:ng its associated one of the attribute headings.
10 A first button 640 is responsive to a user-initiated selection to return to the previously set search field~> (incl.uding the search string and the search criteria). The end user can modify the search fields to modify the search. A second button 642 is 15 responsive to a user-initiated selection to reset the search field: to perform a new search.
FIG. 24 illust=rates an example of a listening booth feature provided in the second display region 222. The listening booth feature is activated in response to 20 receiving a user-initiated selection of the user feedback control 226. The listening booth feature can provide a venue for new music by relatively unknown talent. End users listen to the music, and provide user feedback to <z serv~.ce via the electronic network 100.
25 In return, the service provides the end user with an incentive, such as a complimentary copy of the music, a coupon, T-sh_Lrt, or other promotional item. Each end user rates music based upon a user preference parameter, such as a mo:~t-lisi~ened category for the end user. In 30 general, any audible: material can be rated, including but not limit=ed to albums, playlists from radio stations and experimental audible material.
The listening booth feature provides an option 650 to view directions therefor. In response to a user-35 initiated se:Lection of the option 650, the directions are displayed in the second display region 222. The directions can include example screens to explain use of the listening booth feature.
Upon each return to the listening booth feature, a status of the end u;sE:r is displayed. The end user is registered at the s~exver 102 through an active preferences smart card. The status can include a number of albums rated by the end user, and/or a remaining number of albums to x°eceive a complimentary album.
The status information includes information about the end user, which may be stored via the preferences smart card. If this information is not present, the user is prompted to make a preferences smart card active or to create a preferences smart card. The preferences smart card provides a method of tracking listening preferences of the end user in order to determine which albums to present in the listening booth feature.
FIG. 25 is an e:Kample of a second display for the listening booth feature. The second display is presented upon confirming the identity of the end user, such as by receiving a password in the first display.
The second di~~play provides several categories of music content from which to select. These categories are determined through past listening behavior of the end user. An. option 660 can be selected to provide additional, c~iffere~mt categories. The option 660 can be repeatedly selected, to repeatedly provide more categories.
A user-initiated selection of text or graphics associated with one of the categories is received to select a category. 'The text can include a radio station associated with they category the end user has a radio preset for the category. The graphics can include an album cover of a typical album in the category.
FIG. 26 is an example of a third display for the listening booth feo~trre. The third display is presented upon a user-initiated selection of one of the categories in the second display.
The third display includes at least one image 670 associated with a music selection from the category.
The at least one image 670 can include a slide show based on liner notea, a CD tray back image, or a random image, for a};ample. The third display also includes l0 textual information including an artist, an album, a producer, a 7_abel, and a copyright associated with the music selection.
The music sels:ction is loaded into the attributes.
Based on user. preferences, the tracks can automatically begin playincl when queued. The music selection can include samp_Les of a few seconds from each track on an album, for e~cample. During playback, the end user enters a rating using a control 674. The control includes 674 a marl~:er 676 that is manipulated with respect to a numer~_cal scale 680. The numerical scale 680 can run between two numerical limits, such as from 0 to 100.
Upon completion of playing the samples, the user-entered rating is recorded and the music selection is counted as being rated by the end user. If no rating has been entered, no rating is recorded. If the end user exits the lisl:ening booth feature during playback, the rating i;~ not recorded. A rating can be canceled by a user-initiated sE~lection of the cancel button 252.
As an alternative to a numerical rating, a graphical rehreseni=a.tion of rating can be employed. The graphical re~~resenl~aaion can be repeatedly gauged throughout tine music selection. In this way, specific aspects and ~specif:ic tracks of the music selection can be rated.
Referring back too FIG. 24, a control 690 can be selected by the end user to view previously reviewed albums. FIG. 27 is an example display provided upon selecting the contro:L 690. The display includes a list 692 of each album reviewed by the end user. An album title 694, an artist 696, a copyright 700, a date 702, and an icon 704 are displayed for each album. The icon 704 can be selected too view images and credits, and to hear an audio clip o:E the samples for its associated a lbum .
An exam~~le of a portion of the interface displayed upon selecting the icon is depicted in FIG. 28. As illustrated, the at :Least one image 670, the textual information 672, th.e marker 676, and the numerical scale 680 showing the rating are displayed as in FIG. 26.
Additionally, a date 720 on which the album was rated is displayed. Pn option 722 is dedicated to receive a user-initiated event to initiate playback of the samples. An option.'724 is dedicated to receive a user-initiated event to r~aturn to the previous screen.
Once the number of albums rated by the end user has attained a predetermined number, the end user can request a complimer.~tary copy by selecting any one of the albums in the list. A dedicated button (not illustrated) can be selected to request that the complimentar~~ copy be shipped to an address of the end user.
FIG. 29 illustrates an example of a card organizer display for << smart: card feature. The smart card feature is ac;tivate:d in response to receiving a user-initiated se7.ection of the smart card control 230. The card organizer display is displayed within the second display region 222.
There are four types of smart cards (either physical or virtual) that can be used in the system.
The four types of smart cards include a preferences smart card, a promo~ti_ons smart card, a playlist smart card, and a p;~yment smart card.
A preferences smart card or a personality smart card stores identity, demographics, presets, defaults, payment options and preferences, and event schedules for an end user. The preferences smart card is read/write and password protected. Each preferences smart card can be unique for an associated end user of the client apparatus 106. Using a plurality of preferences smart cards, a plurality of: individual preferences can be provided for a plurality of end users of the client apparatus 106.
A playlist smart:. card is a custom card for an individual. The playlist smart card is a collection and organization device for content available via the electronic network 100. The playlist smart card can be used to collect music:, library content, events, or radio programming using personalized icons, event schedules, and playlists. Access to some content may be secured using the playlist smart card via a purchase. The playlist smart card c:an be traded, downloaded, sold, and/or bartered between two individuals. Typically, the playlist smart card is dedicated to a single function.
A promotions smart card provides privileged access to predetermined events, such as special events. For example, the promotions smart card can bring the end user to a specified .Location via the electronic network 100 to listen to programmed content. The promotions smart card can be purchased or received free of charge.
Typically, the prom.ot:ions smart card is dedicated for accessing a single :Function. It is preferred that the promotions sm~~rt card be the equivalent of a read-only playlist smart card.
A payment smart card provides a means for paying 5 for content. The payment smart card can store billing information f~~r content purchases absent of credit card information. The aloi.lity to purchase or rent content may allow the end user to gain access to new releases or obscure content.
10 The card organizer display includes a first portion 730 dedicated for preferences smart cards, a second portion 732 dedicated for playlist smart cards, and a third portion 734 dedicated for promotions smart cards.
Only three portions are displayed because the payment 15 smart card provides part of the preferences for the end user.
Each of the first portion 730, the second portion 732, and the third portion 734 includes one or more card icons (a respective one being indicated by reference 20 numeral 736). Each of the card icons is user-selectable to select an associated smart card for further action.
Each card icon can b<s selected using a point-and-click operation, or by using one of up scroll controls 740 and one of down scroll controls 742.
25 Upon clicking o:n or otherwise selecting a card icon such as the card icon 736, a step of displaying a cover and/or a description of the associated smart card is performed. 'fo view the contents of the smart card, the associated card icon 736 is dragged and dropped to a 30 fourth portion 750 of the display. The fourth portion 750 includes a graphical representation of a card slot 752.
FIG. 30 is ar.~ example portion of the interface displayed in response to the aforementioned drag-and-drop 35 operation. F'or purposes of illustration and example, a preferences :mart card associated with the card icon 736 was dragged and dropped to the fourth portion 750. In response to t:his operation, a graphical card 760 is displayed within the card slot, a textual name 762 of the smart card is displayed in an oblique font within a graphical tab 764, and the contents of the smart card are displayed over the first portion 730, the second portion 732, and the third portion 734 in FIG. 29.
l0 The texi_ual name 762 in the graphical tab 764 indicates wh_Lch smart card is active. A function of the player being controlled by the smart card is also displayed in an ob7_ique font. The textual name 762 includes up i:o fift:een characters of the smart card name. The smart card name can include up to two lines of text to dE~scribe the smart card. If the smart card name has morE~ than fifteen characters, the first fifteen characters are displayed, followed by a series of dots.
The preferencf=_~; smart card has three areas that can be viewed and/or edited. The three areas include an identity are<~, a defaults area, and a payment options area. A fir:~t graphical button 770 is dedicated to receive a usE~r-inii:fated action to access the identity area. A second graphical button 772 is dedicated to receive a user-inii:fated action to access the defaults area. A third grapraical button 774 is dedicated to receive a use=_r-inii~i.ated action to access the payment options area.
As illustrated, FIG. 30 shows a display of the identity are~~. The=_ identity area includes a plurality of fields to store identity information. The fields can include fields for l.ogin information, password information, name :information, address information, city information, and an electronic mail address.
*rB
FIG. 31 shows a display of the defaults area initiated upon selecting the second graphical button 772. The defaults area includes information on how to handle specific actions, such as whether to automaticall~r play a.selected title from the radio content category, t:he events content category, the library content category, and the music content category.
FIG. 32 shows a. display of the payment options area initiated upon selE:cting the third graphical button 774.
The payment option:> area includes a shipping address and a billing address. The payment options area also provides an option 780 for the end user to type a credit card number :_n order to make a purchase. It is noted that the credit card number is not stored to the player.
With re:EerencE~ to each of FIGS. 29 to 32, an edit button 790 can be :elected to edit any of the information associated with the smart card. A cancel button 792 can be selected to cancel the edit. A save button 794 can be :elected to save the edited fields. A
warning message can be provided to prompt the end user to save edited fie:Ld.s upon an attempt to exit . The end user can rejE?Ct thE' warning to cancel all editing activity with the :mart card.
FIG. 33 is an Example portion of the interface displayed in response to a drag-and-drop operation of a playlist smaot card to the fourth portion 750. A
playlist 800 of a plurality of items is displayed in response to l~he drag-and-drop operation. The playlist 800 is speci:Eic to a. predetermined content area. Items can be selected from the playlist 800 for automatic playback, or can be selected using the selector.
Items can be added and deleted from the playlist 800. To add an item, the material is selected using the browser, followed by a selection of the save button 794.
Clicking on or otherwise selecting the save button 794 saves all qu~ilifying radio stations, events, or titles to the playlist smart card. Although items can be added and deleted, contents of items within the playlist smart card are not user-editable.
FIG. 34 is an example portion of the interface displayed in response to a drag-and-drop operation of a promotions smart card to the fourth portion 750. The promotions smart card is similar to a playlist smart card. However, itEams within the promotions smart card cannot be added, deleted, or edited. Items can be selected from the promotions smart card for automatic playback, or can be selected using the selector.
With re:Eerence to FIGS. 30 to 34, a graphical button 810 can be :elected to send smart card information _~n an Electronic mail message. Virtual smart card information, stored as a file in the client apparatus 10E>, is transmitted as a file in the electronic mail me:~sage. The electronic mail message can be communicated to another of the plurality of client apparatus 104 via the electronic network 100. If there are unique privileges for the smart card, the smart card imformat~ion can be deleted at the sending apparatus. ~~lternatively, communication of the smart card informal=ion can. be inhibited if there are unique privileges.
A new smart card is created by selecting a graphical bul~ton 8:?0 when no smart card is active. In response to :receiving a selection of the graphical button 820, ~~ list of options is displayed. The options include an option 1~o create a preferences smart card, an option to create a playlist smart card, and an option to obtain a smart card from an incoming electronic mail message. Fo:r a smart card created from an incoming electronic m~~il message, the type of smart card is dependent upon the 'type of smart card used to generate the electronic mail message.
By selecting the option to obtain the smart card from an electronic mail message, a directory of possible virtual cards is displayed. The end user can browse the directory to find a:nc~ select a virtual smart card of interest.
Each of the smart card categories can have a limited number of smart cards. For example, each of the playlist category a:nc~ the promotions category can be limited to ten smart cards, and the preferences category can be limited to five smart cards. If the limit has been attained, the graphical button 820 is displayed in a second color such as grey rather than black.
The contents of the active smart card can be deleted by selecting a graphical button 822. A message confirming that the contents are to be deleted (such as "are you sure") is displayed prior to deleting the contents.
A graphical button such as an icon 824 can be user-selected to de-select. the active smart card in the card slot. The icon 824 :i.ncludes a graphical eject button.
In response to a user-selection of the icon 824, the graphical card 824 i:~ removed from the fourth portion 824, and the formerly active smart card is returned to its position.
A graphical button such as an icon 826 can be user-selected to return to the display of the card organizer.
The icon 826 graphically resembles a file folder. It is noted that th.e active smart card remains active in response to selecting the icon 826.
As described with reference to FIG. 1, the player 142 can provide a second visual interface having a collapsed view. Preferably, in the collapsed view, the tabs for the lower portion of the window including the *rB
information control 220, the search control 224, the user feedbaclc control 226, and the smart card control 230 remain visible. A user-initiated selection of any of the controls 220, 224, 226, and 230 directs the 5 player to opE~n the second display region 222, and to initiate a fE~ature associated therewith.
FIG. 35 is a screen shot of a first embodiment of the graphica_L user interface in the radio content mode.
The default radio station indicated by the graphical 10 marker 332 on the graphical radio dial 330 begins playing upon its se=lection.
As with the p:reviously-described embodiments, the interface includes the categorical selection controls 244, 245, 246, and 247, the preset selection indicators 15 202, the pre:yet se:Lection controls 204, the advance/revicsw coni~rols 206, the playback controls 210, the volume controls 212, the selection attribute indicators 2:L4, the streaming indicator 216, the first display region 218, the information control 220, the 20 second display reg=ion 222, the search control 224, the user feedback control 226, the smart card control 230, the help mode=_ control 232, the first logo 234, the second logo 236, thE! advertising window 240, and the attractions window 242. The user feedback control 226 25 provides acccsss to c:hat features in this embodiment.
FIG. 36 is a screen shot showing a content selection ini~.erface in the first preferred embodiment.
A window 850 opens upon clicking the select button 260 or any of the attr=ibutes that def ine the dial at the 30 t ime .
FIG. 37 is a sc:reen shot of a second preferred embodiment o:f the graphical user interface. The second preferred embodiment: may be programmed in a markup language suc:z as H'>?MML, in comparison to the first *rB
WO 99/27681 PCT/US98l25092 preferred emx>odiment which may include plug-in-specific code to prov_~de animation (such as Shockwave code).
A radio dial 870 spatially displays the band and location of all available stations that match selected criteria. A station pick list 872 allows for a user selection of all stations from the radio dial 870. A
banner 874 du splay~~ banner advertisements that rotate in accordance with a predetermined schedule. A region 876 displays logos and attractions that rotate in accordance with a predetermined. schedule. A selection area 880 provides categorical selection controls and player function controls. A region 882 displays streamed and clickable te:ct than can include attractions and advertisments. An information space 884 displays supplementar~r information about the current content, including sc~ledule:~, links to other destinations and feedback. A control panel 886 indicates and controls play, pause, volume, and streaming status. A region 890 is dedicated for entering a keyword to perform a search for content using a single click. A region 892 is dedicated for display and management of presets with one set of preseia per end user.
FIG. 38 is a screen shot of the second embodiment in a radio p:Layer rnode. Upon receiving a user-initiated selection of a selE~ction attribute (band, category, or location) in the sE:l.ection area 880, a pick list 894 of available opi~.ions :is populated from a database. To speed in the process, of selecting material, the interface is absenl~ of a submit button. Therefore, as soon as the end usf=_r releases a mouse button over an item in the ~~ick l:i~;t 894, the item is selected.
FIG. 39 is a screen shot of the second embodiment in an events player mode. Radio buttons 896 indicate a current position w:it:hin an event or another time-based selection re:Lative t.o an entire length of time.
Selecting events, :spoken audio, and music is facilitated in the selecvion area 880. Upon selecting a content category (eivher hive events, spoken audio, or music collection), the end user is prompted to select two attributes to narrow or filter the content to list of manageable l~:ngth.
It is noted that embodiments of the graphical user interface can change in a region-dependent manner (e. g.
dependent upon the location of the client apparatus 106). For e:~cample, the FM broadcast spectrum (which differs for c3iffererat regions in the world) can depend upon the loc~~tion of the client apparatus 106. Further, textual information can be displayed in one of a plurality of languages in dependence upon the location of the client apparatus 106.
It is also noted that alternative controls can be provided to ~~ontro:L settings and parameters of the herein-described embodiments of graphical user interfaces. These graphical controls include, but are not limited to, graphical buttons, checkboxes, radio buttons, scr~~ll ba:r~>, slider bars, pop-up menus, and dialog boxes. Further, alternative indicators can be provided to display information in embodiments of the graphical user interfaces.
Other options t=hat can be included in embodiments of the present invention are as follows.
A physical login card can be sent to a new end user after each login creation. The physical login card can allow for advertisements that transcend the content ( a , g . regularly sc:hE:duled programming or collections ) .
Prior to initiating playback or providing a login screen, a tip-of-t:hE:-day can be provided to promote features of the graphical user interface.
An event-of-tlze-day or a feature-of-the-day can be broadcast for display at the second display region 222.
In response i=o a c:Lick operation or another user-initiated aci~ion, other information can be displayed in the second d:LSplay region 222.
A stati~~n-of-ithe-day can be broadcast for display in a manner :similar to the aforementioned feature-of-the-day. A :List of featured stations based on sets rather than :individual stations can be provided (e.g. a famous individual' ;~ favorite stations ) .
A music critics feature allows end users to comment on music and other content to create a collaborative filtering product.
A speci~~l preset such as a mystery preset of the day can be provided in the set of presets. This preset can be the first preset in the set, for example.
Presets can have expiration dates. For example, an events presevt may c=xpire of ter a predetermined expiration date .
An advertising slot machine can be provided. The advertising Mot m<~c:hine can be provided by a JAVA
applet that :rotates attractions as a slot machine in the advertising window 240. The attractions can be rotated randomly. If three like advertisements align, the end user can win a pri:ae .
A separate attractions window can be provided. In this case, t:he end user can click on an image associated with content to retrieve information for the content.
An option to play or not to play the content is provided to the end user. 'The end user can make his/her decision to play or not to ~p7.ay based upon the information.
Alternative content can be transmitted in cases such as a blackout period or when there is a technical difficulty.
FIG. 40 is a flow chart of an embodiment of a method of providing t=he graphical user interface. As indicated by block 9t)0, steps of verifying that necessary components are installed at the client apparatus 106 and offering system choices to an end user are performed. As indicated by block 902, a step of determining if a smart card (physical or virtual) identifying the end user is present at the client apparatus 106.
If the End user is a recognized user (block 904), then a step of entering a password (block 906) or a step of entering a login and a password (block 910) is performed. ThereaftE=_r, a main page of the graphical user interface is provided (block 912). Upon completion of the player, an exit message is communicated (block 914) to the client apparatus.
If the E:nd user is an unrecognized user (block 916), then a step of entering a login and a password (block 920) is performed. Thereafter, a main page of the graphical user interface is provided (block 922).
Upon completion of the player, an exit message is communicated (block.~924) to the client apparatus.
If the end user has previously visited without logging in (block 926), then either a step of creating a login and a ~~assword (block 930) or a step of selecting a visiting mode (blo~~k 932) is performed. If a login and a password are created (block 930), a main page of the graphical. user interface is provided (block 934).
Upon completion of t:he player, an exit message is communicated (block. 936) to the client apparatus.
If the visiting mode was selected (block 932), a main page of the graphical user interface is provided (block 940). Upon completion of the player, a first exit message is conununicated (block 942) to the client apparatus. The first exit message provides options to save or not to save preferences generated during a session of the player. If an option to save the preferences is selected (block 944), steps of creating a login/password profile (block 946) and returning to the 5 main page (block 950) are performed. Thereafter, upon completion of the ;player, a second exit message is communicated to the client apparatus (block 952). If an option to not save the preferences is selected (block 954), a second exit message is communicated to the 10 client apparatus (block 956).
If the end user is a first time user (block 960), then a step of creating a login and a password (block 962) and a step of providing a main page of the graphical user interface (block 964) are performed.
15 Upon completion of the player, an exit message is communicated (block 966) to the client apparatus 106.
If the end user is a first time user who selects a visiting mode (block 970), a main page of the graphical user interface is provided (block 972). Upon completion 20 of the player, a first exit message is communicated (block 974) to the client apparatus. The first exit message provides options to save or not to save preferences generated during a session of the player.
If an option to save the preferences is selected (block 25 976), steps of creating a login/password profile (block 980) and returning to the main page (block 982) are performed. Thereafter, upon completion of the player, a second exit message is communicated to the client apparatus (x~lock 984). If an option to not save the 30 preferences is selected (block 986), a second exit message is communicated to the client apparatus (block 990) .
If an invalid login and/or password is received in any of the above-aiescribed steps of receiving a login 35 and a password, a message is communicated to the client apparatus 10E~. The message can include a message such as "Invalid L~ogin/F~assword" and/or "Please Try Again".
Thereafter, a~. step of receiving another login and password can be performed.
If a blink tea entry field is received, a message is communicated to t:he client apparatus 106. The message can i.nclude~ a message such as "Please fill in all text fields". T:hereafter, a step of receiving subsequent textual data can be performed.
The step of creating a login provides a dialog to query for dez~iograpr~ic and listening preference information from the end user. The end user enters information i.n respo:nse to the queries. Typically, the information i.s entered during an initial use of the player, such as upon an initial arrival at a Web site associated with they player. The initial arrival at the Web site can be initiated by the end user clicking on a banner advertisement or another hyperlink from another Web site.
The information is retrieved for each subsequent visit or use to uniquely identify the end user, and to tailor the graphical- user interface and/or the playback performed thereby t:o the end user. Further, the information ~~llows listening habits, such as radio stations and music tastes, to be tracked.
FIGS. 4:L to 4.3 are block diagrams summarizing a site map for an embodiment of the graphical user interface. ~'he sit:e map illustrates potential user-selectable f7_ow paths between different features of the graphical user interface .
The end user ca.n select between a high bandwidth interface (b:Lock 1010) and a low bandwidth interface (block 1012) for the audio player. For example, the high bandwidi~h interface may include code specific for an animation plug-in., such as Shockwave, whereas the low bandwidth intf~rface may include only HTML code.
Thereafter, a main page of the interface is provided in accordance with the user-selected bandwidth.
From the main page, the end user can navigate to a radio content feature (block 1014), an events content feature (bloclt 1016), a library content feature (block 1020), a music content feature (block 1022), a rating room (or listening booth) feature (block 1024), a preferences feature (block 1026), a features feature l0 (block 1030), a sea:rc:h feature (block 1032), and a contact feature (block 1034).
Using the radio content feature (block 1014), a radio station can be selected (block 1040), station information can be obtained (block 1042), and a radio preset can be selecltE~d (block 1044). Thereafter, a link to related Wele site c:an be provided (block 1050), a list of station programs c:an be provided (block 1052), and station feedb~~ck can be received (block 1054).
Using the event content feature (block 1016), an event can be aelect.ed (block 1060), event information can be obtained (bloc:k 1062), and an event preset can be selected (blo~~k 1064). Thereafter, a link to related Web site can :oe provi.ded (block 1070), an event schedule can be provided (bl~x:k 1072), and event feedback can be received (blo~~k 1074 ) .
Using the library content feature (block 1020), library content can be selected (block 1080), library content infor,:nation c:an be obtained (block 1082 ) , and a library content preset can be selected (block 1084).
Thereafter, a link to related Web site can be provided (block 1090) and co:nt:ent feedback can be received (block 1094).
Using the music content feature (block 1022), music content can be selected (block 1100), music content information can be obtained (block 1102), and a music content present can be selected (block 1104).
Thereafter, ~~ link to related Web site can be provided (block 1110) and content feedback can be received (block 1114).
Using the rat:~ng room feature (block 1024), a welcome mess~~ge and a registration process is provided (block 1120). Once' the end user is registered, an overview of t:he raging room feature can be displayed (block 1130), an album can be selected in dependence upon a user-:>elected genre (block 1132), the album can be rated by t:he end user (block 1134), the information associated with the' album can be displayed (block 1136), and an exit message can be displayed (block 1140) upon exiting the rating room feature. Further, a status of the end user's cumulative rating points can be displayed (block 1142), pointy can be redeemed (block 1144), a list of albums to receive in return for the points can be displayed (bloc)'; 1146), an album from the list can be selected (block 11~i0), and an exit message can be displayed (b?~ock 17_52 ) .
Using the prejEe~rences feature (block 1026), presets can be managesd (block 1160), and a profile can be displayed and edited. (block 1162).
FIG. 44 is a :El.ow chart summarizing steps performed in an embodiment of a method of playing first audio content using a cornputer. As indicated by block 1200, a step of disp:Laying a. graphical radio dial indicating the first audio content= is performed. As described earlier, the graphica:L radio dial can include an alphabetical scale and a c~raphica.l pointer. In this case, the graphical pointer can be positioned with respect to the alphabetic scale based upon text identifying the first audio content. Alternatively, the graphical radio dial can indicate an over-the-air frequency associated with the first audio content. In this case, the graphical radio dial ca.n include a numerical scale and a graphical pointer, wherein th.e graphical pointer is positioned with respect to the numerical scale based upon the over-the-air frequency.
Optionally, the method includes a step of receiving a user-initiated selection of the first audio content from a plurality of ;audio content using the graphical radio dial (a.s indicated by block 1202). The step of receiving the user-initiated selection can include receiving a user-in.it fated action to navigate to the first audio content :from second audio content adjacently indicated by the graphical radio dial.
As described surlier, the graphical radio dial can include a plurality of marks associated with a plurality of audio content having at least one attribute. For broadcasts, the at least one attribute includes at least two of a category attribute, a band attribute, and a location attribute. The band attribute can indicate one of an AM band, an F'M band, and an Internet band for broadcasts. Optionally, a step (block 1204) of receiving a User-initiated selection of a preset associated with the:~at least one attribute is performed.
The plui:ality of marks includes a first mark associated with the first audio content. In this case, the step of receiving the user-initiated selection of the first audio content can comprise steps of receiving the at least one ataribute, determining the plurality of audio content: based upon the at least one attribute, and receiving a user-ir~itiated selection of the first mark.
As indicated by block 1206, a step of receiving data via an Electronic network is performed. The data encodes the first audio content. If the data includes streamed data received via the Internet, the method further comprises t:he step of decoding the streamed data, as indicated by block 1210. As indicated by block 1212, a step of playing the first audio content is performed.
FIG. 45 is a f:Low chart summarizing steps in an 5 embodiment of a method of obtaining user feedback to music content. As indicated by block 1240, a step of receiving a category of music content selected by an end user is performed. Optionally, a step of displaying a plurality of categories of music content is performed 10 (block 1242) prior i~o the step indicated by block 1240.
In this case, the category of music content is selected by the end user from the plurality of categories. As another option, a st:.ep of determining the plurality of categories based upon a listening behavior of the end 15 user is performed. A further option is to have the plurality of categories be dependent upon at least one preference of the end user.
As indicated b:y block 1244, a step of communicating at least a portion of a music item within the category 20 to the end user is performed. The music item is selected within th.e category independent of the end user. If th.e music item includes an album including a plurality of songs, the step of communicating at least a portion of the music item can include communicating 25 limited duration samples of the plurality of songs.
As indicated by block 1246, a step of receiving a rating of th.e music item by the end user is performed.
As indicatecL by block 1250, a step of accounting for the rating of the music item by the end user is performed.
30 The step of accounting for the rating of the music item can include maintaining a count of music items rated by the end user. In this case, the method can further comprise the step of determining if the count attains a threshold. This step is performed to determine if the end user has qualified for a complimentary copy of music.
Optionally, a stap of displaying a list of a plurality of music itesms previously rated by the end user is performed (block 1254). The list can include the music item whose rating was received in block 1246.
Steps of receiving a user-initiated selection of the music item from the list (block 1256), displaying the rating for the music _Ltem (block 1260), and replaying at least a portion of the music item (block 1262) may be performed also.
FIG. 46 is a flow chart summarizing steps in an embodiment of a method of assisting operation of an IS audio content player. As indicated by block 1270, the method includes a step of displaying a plurality of icons including at least one icon associated with user information and at least one icon associated with playlist information. Optionally, the plurality of icons includes at lea:~t one icon associated with privileged access to <~udio content.
As indicated by :block 1272, a step of receiving a user-initiated. selection of a first icon from the plurality of icons is performed. The first icon can be associated with at least one of an actual smart card and a virtual smart card.. The step of receiving the user-initiated selection can include receiving a user-initiated drag' action of the first icon to a portion of a display. Ir., this case, steps of displaying a graphical card slot at the portion of the display (block 1274) and dis~~layingwa graphical card within the graphical card slot i:n response to the user-initiated drag action (x>lock 1.276) can be performed.
As indi~~ated by block 1280, the method includes a step of operating i~h~e audio content player in dependence upon first iizformai~i.on associated with the first icon.
If the first icon .is'. associated with privileged access to audio content, i~r~e step of operating the audio content player can include providing privileged access to audio convent. I:f the first icon is associated with playlist information, the step of operating the audio content play.=_r can include playing at least a portion of a playlist.
Optionally, t:he method further comprises the step of modifying the first information associated with the first icon (atep 1282). In this case, the audio content player is operated in dependence upon modified first information in block: 1280. If the first icon is associated with us~ez- information, the step of modifying the first information can include modifying user identity information, modifying a default for automatic playback, or modifying a payment option. If the first icon is associated vuith playlist information, the step of modifying the first information can include adding an item to a playlist or deleting an item from a playlist.
It is noted that the herein-described methods can performed by a computer (which may be included with the client apparatus 10E~ and/or the server 102). Further, the computer can be directed to perform the herein-described methods by computer-readable data stored by a computer-readable storage medium.
FIG. 47 is a screen shot of a third embodiment of the graphical user :interface. A radio dial 1300 spatially displays the band and location of all available stations that match selected criteria. A
station pick: list 1:302 allows for a user selection of any of the stations from the radio dial 1300. A banner advertising region. 1304 displays banner advertisements that rotate :in accordance with a predetermined schedule.
An attractions reg:ic>n 1306 displays logos and attractions that rotate in accordance with a predetermined schedule. A selection area 1310 provides categorical ;select:ic>n controls and player function controls. A region 1312 displays streamed and clickable text that can inc h.zde attractions and advertisements.
An information space 1314 displays supplementary information ,bout 'the current content, including l0 schedules, links to other destinations and feedback. In general, any visual content can be combined with the audio content for display in the information space 1314.
Preferably, the information space 1314 provides a title of the audio content: being played (e. g. the title "Shepherd of the Nidht Flock" of a song being played by the radio station ~~nIBEZ), a title and an image of an album containing t:he audio content (e. g. the album title "Blue Nance"), a name of an artist associated with the audio content (e.g. the name of the performer of the song: "The Junior :Mince Trio"), and a name and a logo of an entity associated with the audio content (e.g. a copyright notice for Chiaroscuro Records which is the label for the song, and its logo).
A user-initiated selection of the title of either the album or the image of the album can initiate a display of information associated with the album (e. g.
liner notes, performance credits, and other information) and/or a playback o:E audio samples from the album. A
user-initiated selection of the name of the artist can initiate a display of information associated with the artist. A user-initiated selection of either the name of the entity or the entity logo can initiate a display of information associated with the entity (e. g.
information of oth,e:r albums and audio content provided by the entity). Each of the aforementioned information WO 99/27b81 PCT/US98/25092 can be provided either by the server 102 or by hyperlinking to other destinations of the electronic network 100 (e.g. INeb pages for the album, artist, and entity).
It is also preferred that the information space 1314 includes an olot:ion to buy the audio content being played (e.g. the oht:ion "buy now"), an option to display a program guide fo:r the radio station playing the audio content (e. g. the option "program guide" to display information for WB:EI), and an option to provide user feedback (e.g. the option "user feedback").
A control pane:L 1316 indicates and controls play, pause, volume, and streaming status. A region 1320 is dedicated for entering a keyword to perform a search for content using a single click.
A region 1322 :is dedicated for display and management of presets with one set of presets per end user. The region 1:322 provides an option to create a new login, i.e. to create a new end user preferences and profile. Th.e region 1322 further provides an option to load preferences associated with an end user.
FIG. 4~~ is an example of a first display in an embodiment of a listening booth or rating room feature.
The rating zoom feature can be activated in response to receiving a user-initiated selection of the user feedback control 226 or another link thereto. The link can include infornnation indicating an amount of audio items (e. g. music items) to rate and an amount of rating time which are to be satisfied to receive complimentary music. For example, textual information such as "you have 15 days left to rate 6 more CD's in order to choose one free" c~~n be associated with the link.
Preferably, t=h.e link is provided in a main graphical page provided by the player. In this case, if the end user sets his/her browser program to an WO 99!27681 PCT/US98/25092 electronic address associated with the player (e. g.
www.audiosense.corn), the main page is displayed upon initiation of the b=rawser program. Additionally, as the main page do'nnzloads to the end user, the personal 5 profile of the end user created at an initial login is retrieved. The personal profile uniquely identifies the end user as he/she navigates through the player.
The display includes an option 1330 to display rules and regulations for receiving a complimentary 10 item, such as a complimentary music item. The option 1330 can include, for example, textual information indicating a portion of the rules and regulations such as "Rate 10 Cl~s and Choose 1 Free".
The display includes an option 1332 to review which 15 audio items have beE~n previously rated by the end user.
The option 13:32 can include textual information indicating a number of music items previously rated by the end user. For Example, the textual information can include "4 albums rated towards free CD".
20 Alternatively, the option 1332 can include textual information indicating a remaining number of items to rate before rE~ceiving a complimentary item such as a complimentary music item.
The display includes a plurality of options 1334 25 for categorie:~ or gE~nres of music content. For example, the categorie:~ can _i.nclude jazz, classical, alternative rock, country and lat.in. It is noted that other categories of music content may be displayed in addition to or as alte~_nativE~s to the aforementioned categories.
30 The categorie:~ can be dependent upon the personal profile or preferences of the end user collected when the user profile is created. Alternatively, the categories can be dESpendent upon the end user's listening behavior using the player. In this case, the categories are selected to best represent the current listening habits of the end user.
An arti:>t name:, a title, and a cover art image of an item, such as an album, are displayed for each category. Preferax>ly, the end user does not influence which item is. displ.a:yed for the category.
FIG. 49 is an example of a second display for reviewing rat:ed items in a preferred embodiment of a listening boc>th or rating room feature. The second display is provided in response to receiving a user-initiated sel.ectiormof the option 1332 to review which items have been previously rated by the end user. The second display incl.u~des a plurality of item regions.
The number of: item regions corresponds to a total number of items which must: be rated in order to receive a complimentar~~ item. For example, ten item regions corresponding to ten total audio items to rate to receive a complimentary item are illustrated in FIG. 49.
Information a:~sociated with each previously-rated item is displayed i_n a corresponding item region (a representative one indicated by reference numeral 1340).
The information can include an artist, a title, an image such as an a7_bum cover, and a category for the item.
For example, four of the ten item regions have information ~~isplayed to identify four previously-rated items for the end user. Each item region corresponding to a previous ly-raged item includes a user-selectable portion. In response to receiving a user-initiated selection of the portion (such as the album cover), additional informat=ion associated with the item is displayed. ~fhe additional information can include a complete med_La filE: including a complete track list with rating scorer for t:h.e songs rated, promotional information, liner notes, lyrics, and credits.
Remaining one: of the item regions (a representatiz~e one indicated by reference numeral 1342) can be user ~celecte:d to return to the main selection page ( such a~~ in FI:G . 48 ) . Rather than i tem information, the remaining ones of the item regions can have textual information indicating a portion of the rules and rec~ulatic>ns such as "rate 10 CDs choose 1 free". For example, six item regions corresponding to six more music items to be rated before receiving the complimentar~~ item are absent of item information in FIG. 49.
FIG. 50 is an example of a third display for rating an item in an embodiment of a listening booth or rating room feature. The third display is provided in response to receiving a user-initiated selection of one of the options associated with categories of music content.
For purposes of illustration and example, a user-initiated se7_ection of the option associated with the jazz categor~r in FIG. 48 is considered.
The third display includes information associated with the item to be: rated. The information includes the artist (e.g. Earl Fiines), the title (e.g. In New Orleans), the covet- art image, and a label (a. g.
Chiaroscuro) for the item. The cover art image is displayed ovE:r a larger display region than the cover art image in FIG. ~E8.
The third display includes a list of a plurality of tracks from t:he item to be rated. For example, the list can include j=our t~-acks (i.e. songs) from the In New Orleans album. The end user is required to rate each of the tracks in order to obtain credit for rating the album. It is noted that the album may include additional tracks which need not be rated by the end user.
Each track is identified by textual information such as a title 1350 in the list. Also associated with each track is an icon 1352 indicating whether the track has been previously hated by the end user. The icon 1352 includes a que~st:ion mark to indicate that the track is unrated by the e:n~i user. If the track has been previously rated, a:n indication of the rating is displayed in the icon 1352.
The end user se:Lects either a title from the list l0 or its associated icon to commence a rating process for an associated track. In response to receiving a user-initiated selection of a title or an icon, at least a portion of the assoc~_ated track is communicated to the client apparatus 106.. Although an entire portion of the associated track ca:n be communicated, it is preferred that a limited-duration sample of the associated track be communicated. For example, the limited-duration sample can be compri:~ed of a 30-second clip of the associated track.
Preferah~ly, th.e portion of the associated track is communicated to the client apparatus 106 using streaming technology. The cliE~nt apparatus 106, in turn, plays back the portion of i~he associated track for the end user.
A graphical rating tool is displayed either during playback or upon completing playback of the portion of the associated track. The graphical rating tool is used to receive at least one rating for the track. The graphical rating tool can be displayed either in place of the icon 1352 or proximate to the icon 1352.
The third dish>lay includes an option 1354 to buy the item. In. response to receiving a user-initiated selection of the option 1354, the item is tagged for purchase. Further, the item can be placed in a virtual shopping cart. that stores all items tagged for purchase.
Thereafter, a check-out option is provided to finalize the purchase of tagged items. A check-out reminder can be automatically inii~iated if the end user exits from the player while items are tagged for purchase. The check-out reminder can include a visual message or an audible message disp:Layed by the client apparatus 106.
The third display includes an option 1356 to cancel a rating of the current item. In response to receiving a user-initiated selfsction of the option 1356, the user interface returns to the main selection page (such as in FIG. 48) where the end user can select another item to rate.
FIG. 51 is a view of an embodiment of the graphical rating tool. The g~r,~.phical rating tool includes a plurality of rating options 1360. Preferably, each of the rating o~>tions 1:360 has the form of a hot region associated with a rating. For example, the rating options can include: five hot regions for receiving ratings from one to five.
During playback of the track, the end user varies a position of ~i cursor 1362 over the rating options to indicate hisiher dislike or like of the track. For example, the end u:>er may position the cursor 1362 over the hot region for a one-rating during portions of the track he/she dislikes, and may position the cursor 1362 over the hot region for a five-rating during portions of the track he; she likes. Preferably, a display graphic within the hot reg~_on is modified in response to the cursor 1362 being positioned thereon. For example, the display graphic can appear to illuminate (e. g. to light up) in response to the cursor 1362 being position on the hot region.
A plurality of ratings generated over time are recorded by the cl:Lent apparatus 104 and/or the server 102. The time sequence of the plurality of ratings can be formed by repeatE:dly sampling the rating for either equal or unequal time intervals.
When the end user has formulated an overall rating or a score for the item as a whole, he/she points to and 5 clicks on a :particular rating option. An indication of the overall rating is recorded and displayed.
Preferably, the ovei:all rating is displayed within the icon 1352 associated with the track. The title 1350 and the icon 1352 for rated tracks are displayed in a second 10 color which differs from a first color used to display titles and icons for unrated tracks.
FIG. 52 is an example of a modified third display, in an embodiment of a listening booth or rating room feature, once all of the tracks for an item have been 15 rated. The :modified third display includes indications of the overall ratings for the tracks. The third display is modified to include an option 1370 to submit the ratings. Before submitting the rating scores, the end user is provided an opportunity to re-rate any of 20 the tracks by select=ing (e. g. pointing to and clicking on) either its associated title or its rating score icon.
FIG. 53 is an. a_xample of the second display, in an embodiment of a listening booth or rating room feature, 25 updated based upon a submission of ratings for the item.
Information associai~ed with the item is displayed in a corresponding item region 1380. The information can include an artist, a title, an image such as an album cover, and a category for the item. Hence, five of the 30 ten item regions have information displayed to identify five previously-rated items. As described with reference to FIG. 4~, remaining ones of the item regions can be user selected to return to the main selection page. However, th.e category or genre of music 35 associated with th.e item is removed from the main selection pa~~e. ThE' category or genre can be removed until a pred~=termined number of users have provided ratings therefor. For example, the category or genre can be remov~=d until. ratings have been received from at least hundred other end users or more.
Also as described with reference to FIG. 49, a user-initiat~=d selection of the image, such as the album cover, initi~~tes a display of additional information associated with th~~ item. An example of the display of additional informa~ti.on is depicted in FIG. 54.
FIG. 54 is an Example of a fourth display in an embodiment of a li;st:ening booth or rating room feature.
The fourth display is displayed in response to receiving a user-initi~~ted input such as a selection of an album cover image.
The fourth display includes a banner region 1390, a cover art re~~ion 1392, a controls region 1394, and an information region 1396. The banner region 1390 includes a service icon, textual information indicating the category or genre of the item (e.g. "Jazz"), and an option 1400 to return back to the category selection page. The option 1400 can include textual information indicating a number of music items previously rated by the end user. For example, the textual information can include "5 albums rated towards free CD".
Alternatively, the option 1400 can include textual information indicating a remaining number of items to rate before receiving a complimentary item such as a complimentary music item.
The cover art .region 1392 includes information identifying the item. The information includes the artist (e.g. Earl Hines), the title (e.g. In New Orleans), th.e cover art image, and the label (e. g.
Chiaroscuro) for the item. In response to a user-initiated selection of a portion of the cover art region WO 99/27681 PC1'/US98/25092 13 92 ( such a:~ the album cover ) , a larger , higher-resolution image oi_ the cover art is displayed. This allows the end user to print a hard copy of the cover art for the .item.
The inf~~rmation region 1396 is used to display information associated with the item. The information can include <~ track list with rating scores for rated songs, promot=ional information, liner notes, lyrics and credits. Preferably, all of the aforementioned information :is included in a single media file for the item. This allows the end user to print all of the information at oncE~.
The portion of the information displayed in the information :regian 1.396 is controlled by either a scroll bar 1402 or by conl~rols in the control region 1394. The control region 1394 includes a first control 1404 to initiate a display of the track list, a second control 1406 to initiate a display of promotional information, a third control 1410 t:o initiate a display of the liner notes, a fourth control 1412 to initiate a display of the lyrics, ~~nd a :fifth control 1414 to initiate a display of t:he credits. Each of the aforementioned controls in the control region 1394 is used to jump to a targeted portion o:f the single media file. The control region 1394 further includes a sixth control 1410 to initiate a purchase of the item (e. g. the option "Buy CD").
Optionally, the album rating page described with reference to FIG. 50 can include an option to provide additional feedback for the item. The option can have the form of a button or control including text such as "tell us more". In response to a user-initiated selection of the option, a detailed rating criteria interface is provided. An example of this interface is depicted in FIG. 55.
Further,. the category or genre selection interface described with reference to FIG. 48 can include an option to provide a comparative rating for a plurality of items. Tree option can have the form of a button or a control. In response to a user-initiated selection of the option, a comparative ranking interface is provided.
An example oi= this interface is depicted in FIG. 56.
The comparative ranking interface is advantageous in providing record labels additional feedback for albums l0 such as albums than were successful during their initial rating and a=Lbums which receive a marketing push.
FIG. 55 is an example of a fifth display in an embodiment of-_ a li:~tening booth or rating room feature.
The fifth di:~play _Lncludes a plurality of rating criteria. The rating criteria can be encoded by information associated with the track or song. In this way, each track or song can have its own set of rating criteria. Preferably, an entity such as a record label indicates which rai=i.ng criteria are to be provided for one of its songs. The entity can select the rating criteria from a checklist of all potential rating criteria.
For pur~aoses of illustration and example, the fifth display provides a graphical interface 1420 to receive and display ~~ voca:l~; rating, a rhythm rating, a brass rating, and ~~ danc~sability rating from the end user.
Each rating :is entered using an associated up control and/or an as~sociatec~ down control. Each rating can be numerical, such as integers from one to ten. Each rating is displayed both textually and by a graphical bar chart display.
The fifth display further provides an option 1422 to include additional criteria. In response to a user-initiated selection of the option 1422, a list of all potential rating criteria can be displayed. The end user can select a :rating criterion from the list and can enter a rating the:refor .
The fifth display further provides an interface 1424 for ent~=ring user comments. The interface 1424 can include a teact box to allow the end user to enter comments in the foam of a textual message.
To submit the additional feedback, the end user selects an option :L426 provided by the fifth display.
The option 1.426 can include a graphical button having text such as "subm:it: ratings". In response to receiving the user-initiated selection of the option 1426, the additional feedbaclk is recorded by the server 102.
FIG. 56 is an example of a sixth display in an embodiment of a 7.i;st:ening booth or rating room feature.
The sixth display provides a graphical interface to receive a comparative ranking of a plurality of items.
The plurality of items are typically selected by an entity such ~ss a record label, and not by the end user.
The plurality of items may or may not be within a genre or a category of music .
The sixth display includes a plurality of images, such as a plurality of album cover images, associated with the plurality of items. Each image is user-selectable, such as by a point-and-click operation, to initiate playback of: audio samples for its associated item. If available, ratings and comments previously submitted by the e:nd user are also displayed in response to the afore:mentio:ned user selection.
The sixth display further includes a plurality of display locations for comparatively ranking the plurality of items. Each of the plurality of display locations is responsive to a drag-and-drop operation of one of the pluralit~r of images. For example, an end user can click on a first image 1440, drag the first image 1440 to a first display location 1442, and drop the first image 14~4C> at the first display location 1442 to indicate that t:ne item associated with the first image 1440 is his/her favorite from the plurality of items. Similarly, t:he end user can click on a second 5 image 1444, drag tine second image 1444 to a second display location 1446, and drop the second image 1444 at the second display location 1446 to indicate that the item associated with the second image 1444 is his/her next favorit~= from t:he plurality of items. Once the end 10 user has ent~=_red a comparative ranking of the items, the comparative :ranking is submitted to the server 102.
Based upon an_y of the user-generated rating information .and comrrients described herein, the music testing component :L52 in FIG. 1 generates and provides 15 reports including the actual data and/or summaries thereof. Each report can be specific to one or more songs associated w:it:h an entity such as a record company. Th~~ repo:rt: is communicated to the entity to provide rating information and comments for its music 20 items. The :report c:an be stratified by demographics such as gend~=_r, age, occupation, and geographical region of the end u;~ers. Each report can be automatically generated either at periodic or predetermined times, or after a predf=_termined number of end users have rated an 25 item, or upon receiving a request. For example, a report for an item can be automatically generated and communicated to the entity via the electronic network 100 after one hund:red end users have rated the item. As another example, a report for an item can be 30 communicated to an entity in response to a request received from the car~tity via the electronic network 100.
In a particular embodiment, the music testing component 15.2 and the promotions component 156 function as follows. To initiate music testing, a client 35 supplies an ;album tc> be tested (either on CD or another medium), indicates which four tracks are to be tested, identifies a 30-second clip from each track, and provides additional testing information. If desired, this initiation process can be performed on-line via the electronic network 100.
Typically, the client is associated with a promoter of the album such as a record label for the album.
Preferably, the client also supplies additional copies of the album for e:nd users who redeem their credits to obtain the album. The additional copies of the album can be supplied by a fulfillment house indicated by the client. The number of additional copies is based upon a required batch size.
The 30-second clips are digitally encoded for streaming, a:nd made available to the server 102. An entry for the music test is made in a database (herein referred to as MusicTestingBatch). The entry (herein referred to as Batch) includes a Universal Product Code (UPC) for the album, a scheduled start date for testing, either a scheduled end date for testing or a scheduled number of testing days, a required number of responses (batch size), a genre of the album, and descriptive information such as liner notes, credits, and lyrics.
The entry is assigned a unique identification code (herein referred t~o as BatchID). The database includes a client ide:ntific,ation code (herein referred to as ClientID) used for billing and report generation purposes. Optionally, data indicating a total number of songs submitted by the client is updated based upon the entry.
Each entry in MusicTestingBatch is assigned a queue position for its genre. To readily identify which album an end user will rage, a batch queue cache stores an active queue position identifier and an associated BatchID for each genre.
The database includes data (herein referred to as BatchResponse~) that .identifies all of the end users (by their CustomerIDs) that have rated a particular album (using its Ba.tchID). Using this data, a check is performed to ensure that the end user has not previously completed rating of the album identified by the batch queue cache. Alternatively, the check can be performed using data stored in the user profile. In this case, the user profile includes an AlbumID for each album rated by the end user.
If the end user has previously completed rating the album, the queue position is incremented to a subsequent position. The queue position is repeatedly incremented until a previously-unrated album is identified. If all albums in the genre were rated by the end user, a message suggesting that the end user choose another genre is communicated to and displayed by the client apparatus 106.
Once the end user has listened to and scored all of the song samples within the batch, the music testing component 152 registers the response and increments the queue position. To register the response, the music testing component 152 stores the scores in a MusicTestingResponse table and a MusicTestingScore table by CustomerID and BatchID. The Musi.cTestingScore table tracks user ratings by correlating BatchID, SongID, and CustomerID. Optionally, the AlbumID is stored in the user profile to prevent the album from being rated more than once by the end user. If the end user has not scored all of the samples, no information is stored for the end user.
It is noted that separate MusicTestingResponse and MusicTestingScore tables may not be necessary since the difference between these two tables is that MusicTestingScore has an additional entry per song.
In addii:ion to an entry being made in the MusicTestingResponse table, the customer profile of the end user can be modified based upon the test. If the end user is enabled to receive promotions (e.g. by having a preferred customer profile), the music testing component 152 credits his/her account upon completing the rating. If the end user is unable to receive promotions (e. g. b~~ having a lesser status such as basic customer or guest), no credit is provided to the end l0 user's account. 0~>tionally, each credit has an expiration d~~te after which the credit is purged.
Preferably, a promotions-enabled customer profile maintains a number of testing credits (herein referred to as NumMusi.cTesti.ngCredits) and a promotion enable date (herein referred to as PromotionEnableDate). The presence of a. PromotionEnableDate greater than the current date indicates that the end user has already received a promotional item, and will not receive credit for the test. If the PromotionEnableDate is not present (e. g. if the end us~e:r has not received a promotional item) or if the PromotionEnableDate is less than the current date, then the end user is eligible to receive credit for th.e test.. In this case, the number of testing credits is incremented upon performing the test.
Additionally in this case, an entry is made in a promotions da.tabase~ (herein referred to as PromotionRes~~onseAlbumsPresented). The entry includes the BatchID, the Cu.stomerID, and a false value is assigned to a. flag (herein referred to as PromoUsedFlag). Th.e entry indicates that the end user has tested th.e item and that the item can be used for a promotion.
If the a~ccumul.ated number of testing credits for the end user atta.in.s a threshold, a promotional item such as a CD is offered to the end user. The end user is allowed to select the promotional item from a plurality of promotional items having a false PromoUsedFlac~ in the promotions database. It is noted that each promotional item can have a limited duration of availability bared upon its scheduled end date.
The promotion: component 156 receives a response (accept or reject) from the end user. If the end user accepts an it:em, the following steps are perfoxzned. A
flag (herein referx:ed to as SelectedFlag) associated to with the itern is sE~t to true in the promotions database .
Information un the customer profile needed to distribute the item to t:he end user (e. g. a name and a shipping address or an electironic mail address) is forwarded to the fulfillmE~nt house. Using the information, the fulfillment house c:an deliver a physical copy of the item or can delivex- an electronic copy of the item via the electron~.c network 100. The number of testing credits is rE~set to zero. The PromotionEnableDate is set to a date equa7_ to a predetermined time duration beyond the current date. As a result, the end user can continue rating items after the accumulated number of credits has attained the threshold, however, credit accumulation for the end user is inhibited for the predetermined time duration. The PromoUsedFlag is set to true for all entries associated with the CustomerlD
of the end u:~er in PromotionResponseAlbumsPresented.
This step as;~ures that the same albums are not presented to the end u:~er in a subsequent promotion.
If the End user rejects receiving an item (e.g. by not selecting an it:em from a list of available items), the following step: are performed. The number of testing credits is :reset to zero. The PromoUsedFlag is set to true for all entries associated with the CustomerID of the end user in PromotionResponseA.lbumsPresented. As a result, the end 5 user has forfeited. his/her credits, and may not select from these items in a subsequent promotion. However, the PromotionEnableDate is maintained so that the end user's ability to acquire credits is not affected.
After ~~ promotion transaction is completed (either 10 by accepting or rejecting the item), records associated therewith are migrated from the promotions database into an archive database.
Optionally, a. notification message can be occasionally sent to the end user via the electronic 15 network 100 to the end user of his/her credit status.
Once a batch has attained the required number of responses, the end. date for testing is set to the current date, and a batch complete flag is set to a logical true. It is noted that the number of responses 20 can be allowed to s:Lightly exceed the required number of responses in. this case. During nightly processing, the batch response data is summarized and packaged into a report. The report provides demographic data on the respondents and pro~;rides a measure to compare results 25 across albums within a genre for a specific client. The client can ~~e a record label that submitted the test request or a. radio station seeking well-rated music.
The report can include: the BatchID; a report date and time; th.e scheduled start and end times; the actual 30 start and en.d times; the MusicID for the album, the title of the. album.; the first and last name of the primary artist for the album; the SongID, title, artist, and publisher of each tested song from the album; a count of the number of testing responses for the album;
35 a hit index providing a count of responses which rate each song as least!highest; an average music testing score for each song and for the batch; a bar graph showing a percentage of responses at each score; and listener demographics. The report can also indicate a number of promotions that were accepted and a number that were declined,, a promotion completion time, and a comparison o~° respondent ratings of redeemed albums versus non-rE~deemed albums.
Either the report or a notification thereof can be delivered to the c:Lient via the electronic network 100.
For example, the music testing component 152 can initiate than an a:Lectronic mail message be sent to the client after one hundred persons have rated songs from an album. The client, in turn, navigates to a Web site having the report ~~~n a marking language format such as HTML. The c:Lient c:an review the report using a browser program. The' music: testing component 152 generates a bill for pro~riding the testing service for the client.
As an a:Lternal~i.ve to generating a report after receiving a predetermined number of ratings, the report can be generated ai=ter a predetermined time duration.
Once the predetermined time duration has elapsed, the music testing component 143 generates a report summarizing as much information that was gathered. If a client wants to receive ratings within a shortened time period, the cxueue c:an be adjusted to make the album more likely to be presented to an end user than other albums in its genre or category. If desired, the queue can be adjusted to present: the album to all end users which select its gE:nre o~- category.
It is noted that as an alternative to testing a batch of songs from a single album, a batch can comprise songs from a plura:_ity of albums. In this case, it is preferred that the songs in a batch have some relationship with One another. It is also preferred that each song being tested be included in only one batch.
Preferably, tine music genre or category is associated with an entire album. For compilations and other multip:Le-format albums, a multi-genre category can be provided.
The music testing component 152 frequently checks tables in thcs database to ensure that null pointers do not exist. J~or example, a tested album may still reside l0 in the database afi~er its associated audio files have been removed and/or archived.
FIG. 57 is a block diagram summarizing a site map for an embodiment of the listening booth or rating room feature. Thc~ site map identifies functions available to the end user at specific points throughout the graphical interface. Upon entering the rating room feature, a main interface pages is provided (block 1500) wherein a step of checking for installed components is performed.
The main intcsrface page provides a feature to check the status of thES end user (block 1502), a feature to choose an album to rate b~l genre (block 1504}, an optional feature to rc=_shuff:Le: album choices (block 1506 ) , and a feature to display an overview and help information (block 1510).
From the feature to check the status of the end user (block :L502), the end user can choose to fulfill an option to receive a complimentary music item in return for rating a number of items in a time duration (block 1512 ) . A co~zfirmal~i.on message for this option is provided in J~lock :1514.
Further from the feature to check the status of the end user (bl~~ck 151)2), the end user can review previously-r~~ted a:Lbums (block 1516). In this path, a feature to view album information is provided (block 1520). From this :Feature, features to view song titles (block 1522), to view liner notes (block 1524), to review rated songs (block 1526), and to buy a CD (block 1530) are provided.
The feature to choose an album to rate by genre (block 1504) providESS a feature to view album information (block :L532), a feature to choose a song title to rate (block 1534), and a feature to buy a CD
(block 1536). The feature to choose the song title to rate (block 1534) provides a feature to rate a song (block 1540), a feature to view liner notes (block 1542), and a featur<~ to buy a CD (block 1544). The feature to rate the song (block 1540) provides a feature to submit a ratings for the album (block 1546).
FhG. 58 is a block diagram of an embodiment of a content entry subsystem 1600. The content entry subsystem 1600 is described with reference to elements of FIG. 1.
The content entry subsystem 1600 is used to acquire, convert, and/or update content stored by the storage device 116. In general, content is acquired, converted, or updated by either: (i) importing the content from an exaernal source such as the server 144;
or (ii) entering the content using an administrative interface 1602. 'fhe content entry subsystem 1600 addresses these two approaches of maintaining and populating the storage device 116 with content.
The content entry subsystem 1600 includes a content converter 1E~04 to convert the content from a first format associated with the server 144 to a second format associated with the server 102. The content converter 1604 can include c>ne or more rules, and/or one or more filters to convert: data from the server 144 to data which conforms to system requirements for the server 102. Similarly, the administrative interface 1602 performs a si~ep of verifying that manually-entered data conforms to i~he system requirements .
Preferably, the content entry subsystem 1600 periodically importer content data from the server 144.
For example, the content entry subsystem 1600 can be programmed to import content data from the server 144 on a nightly basis. The content data can have the form of l0 a table retrieved j=rom a Web page provided by the server 144. The Web page is updated periodically (e. g.
nightly) for this purpose. The content entry subsystem 1600 retrieves a content data file through HTTP, and stores a cope of the file with delimited field separators. If thES Web page is password protected, the content entr~~r subsystem can automatically provide a password to gain access thereto.
Once retrieved, the content data is converted or otherwise scrubbed to the second format. The content data in the ;second format is stored by a staging database 1605. Preferably, the staging database 1606 substantiall:~r repl:icates the information stored in the server 144.
The content e:nt:ry subsystem 1600 assists in updating the database 148 using the converted data in the staging databa;sE: 1606. In general, the content entry subsystem 1600 updates the database 148 based upon the most recent changes in the staging database 1606.
The content entry subsystem 1600 compares the converted data to existing, acs ive data in the database 148.
Rules are generated to convert the newest data to the active data. Caution is exercised to prevent changes that involve row deletes and key updates. The rules and exceptions can be dynamically generated to interpret changes in the server 144.
*rB
The dif:Eerence between the converted data and the active data is fornnatted to become an entry (update/add/delete) for the staging database 1606. The data is made active upon satisfying an integrity check.
5 Daily changes to the database 1606 are logged. The changes can be summarized in a nightly administrative report gener~ited by the content entry subsystem 1600. A
daily report of the data import process can be communicated by electronic mail or other means to system 10 administratox-s. The logs of updates can be formed using transaction 7_ogs from a database software package such as SQL.
After one or more databases, including the database 148, are updated by the staging database 1606, the data 15 in the staging database 1606 is backed-up by a data backup and recovery system 1610, and purged. The data backup and recovery process 1610 makes available the most recent copy of the staging database 1606.
Manuall~~-entered data received by the 20 administrative interface 1602 can include media location and other information used throughout the system. The media location can be in the form of an electronic address, such as a URL or a Uniform Resource Name (URN), for accessing' the content via the electronic network 25 100. Some ir..formation attributes may be considered optional. Th:e content entry subsystem 1600 accepts a new entry without requiring the optional information attributes. The content entry subsystem 1600 verifies the information attributes. An encoded music file 30 associated with the media location is made available upon verification.
Twa examples of data formats from the server 144 include a broadcast :Format and a content format.
TABLE I shows radio station data extracted from the 35 broadcast format'to generate data in the second format.
TABLE II shows music data extracted from the broadcast format to generate data in the second format. TABLES
III to VII show song data extracted from the Liquid Audio format to generate data in the second format.
The station II) parameter is a code to uniquely identify each radio station. Preferably, the station ID
is not relied upon for identifying the station. The Call Letters parameter provides the call letters identifying the radio station. The Frequency parameter l0 provides the over-t.he-air broadcast frequency of the radio station.. The. Format parameter identifies the format or category o:E content broadcast by the radio station. The City, State, and Country parameters identify the city, state, and country of origin, respectively, of the radio station. The Description parameter provides a description, a monicker, or another identifier of the radio station.
The Station Logo Address parameter includes an electronic address o:E a logo or another image associated with the radio station. Preferably, the logo is stored locally at the server 102 to improve player performance.
The Station WWW Address parameter provides an electronic address such as a URL identifying a Web site for the radio station. The Schedule Address parameter provides an electronic address for a site having a programming schedule for the radio station.
The Audio Stream Pointer Address (LQ) provides an electronic address of a lower-quality audio stream of content broadcast by the radio station. The Audio Stream Address (LQ) provides a file name and electronic address to verify the correct lower-quality audio stream for the station. The Audio Stream Bit Rate (LQ) parameter indicates the bit rate of the lower-quality audio stream.
The Audio Stream Pointer Address {HQ) provides an electronic address of a higher-quality audio stream of content broadcast by the radio station. The Audio Stream Address (HQ) provides a file name and electronic address to verify the correct higher-quality audio stream for the station. The Audio Stream Bit Rate (HQ) parameter indicates the bit rate of the higher-quality audio stream.
The Blackout Period parameter indicates times and/or dates for which content from the radio station is blacked-out ~~r oth~m-wise inhibited from being received via the electronic network 100.
The Album ID ;parameter includes a code to uniquely identify a mvusic item such as an album. Preferably, the AudioNet Album ID :i~c not relied upon to identify the album. The ;album 'ri.tle parameter includes a title of an album or another music item. The Format parameter identifies tlae format of the music item. The Artist Sort Name pa:ramete:r provides a name, used for sorting purposes, of an ari;.i.st associated with the music item.
The Artist N~~me pa:rameter provides a name of the artist to be used for descriptive purposes.
The Album Art Address parameter provides an electronic address of a cover art image associated with the music its=m. Preferably, the cover art image is stored local:Ly by the server 102 to improve player performance. The iWtist WWfnT Address parameter provides an electronic address, such as a UR.L, of a Web site for the artist. The A:Lbum Description parameter provides descriptive :informat.ion for the music item. The Audio Stream Meta l.~'ile Address parameter provides an electronic address,, such as a MetaURL, for providing an audio stream of the music item. The Audio Stream Address parameter provides a file name (such as a .ra or .asf file name) and an electronic address identifying WO 99/276$1 PCT/US98/25092 the audio stream o:f the music item. The Audio Bit Rate parameter in~~.icates the bit rate or encoding bandwidth of the audio stream.
The Label Name parameter identifies a publishing entity for the music item, such as a record company or label. The label Address parameter includes an electronic a<3dress,, such as a URL, for a Web site of the record company or label.
TABLES :III to VII show song data extracted from the content format to generate data in the second format.
The data inc:Ludes sang information, artist information, recording inj~ormation, rights information, watermark information, and miscellaneous information.
TABLE III
Parameter Artists) Son Title Album Title Com oser(Music) Com oser(L rics) Arran er Publisher Genre Language TABLE I:CI illustrates song information parameters extracted from data having the content format. An Artist parameter ide:ntifiea the artist or artists who performed the song. Se~paratE~ parameters may be defined for the "headline" artist, as well as session artists, orchestras, c:onduct:ors, choruses, etc. A Song Title parameter provides a title of a song or like music item.
An Album Title parameter provides a title of an album containing the song. A Composer parameter identifies at least one composer of the song. An additional parameter may identify the writer of the songs lyrics. An Arranger parameter identifies at least one arranger of the song.
The Publisher parameter identifies the publisher of the song. A Genre parameter indicates the genre or category of the song. The Language parameter indicates a language of the lyrics of the song. An ISRC TD parameter includes a 12-digit alphanumeric serial code comprised of a two-letter country code, a three-character author code, a two-digit year code, and a five-digit song identifier.
TABLE V' illustrates recording information parameters extracted from data having the content format. A Format ;parameter indicates an audio or a video format of the song. A Recording Type parameter indicates a recording type of the song. A Publication Date parameter indicates a publication date for the song. A Country of Origin parameter identifies a country of origin for the song. A Playing Time parameter indicates a playing time of the song.
A Recording Studio parameter identifies one or more recording studios 'used to record the song. A Mix Down Studio parameter identifies one or more studios used to mix down the song. A Mastering Studio parameter identifies o:ne or more studios used to master the song.
A Producer parameter identifies one or more producers of the song. An Engineer parameter identifies one or more recording engineers for the song. A
Mastering Engineer parameter identifies one or more 5 mastering engineers for the song. A Remixer parameter identifies any remixers of the song. An ISRC ID
parameter includes a 12-digit alphanumeric serial code comprised of a two-.Letter country code, a three-character author code, a two-digit year code, and a l0 five-digit song identifier.
TABLE v PARAMETER
F~ox:~mat R~ecordin a Publication Date Country of Ori in Pla in Time R~ecordin Studios) M.ix. Down Studios) Ma:>terin Studio ( s ) Producer ( s ) En ineer(s) M<~sterin En ineer(s) Rmixer ( s ) ISRC Code 15 TABLE VI illustrates rights information parameters extracted from dat<~ having the content format. A UPC
Code paramet~=_r inc:Ludes a 20-digit UPC code identifying the album. :Preferably, the UPC is the convention to identify all music titles in a music library from radio WO 99l1768I PCT/US98/25092 station bro~~dcast :>ynchronization signals. A cross-referencing databa~;e can be used to translate between a cart code from a :radio station to a UPC.
TABLE VI
PARAMETER
UPC Code Co ~ ri ht Sound Recordin Co ri ht Performance Ri hts A enc Mechanical Ri hts A enc Record Label Di:>tributors Date Encoded Encoded B
A Copyright parameter provides copyright information for the song. A Sound Recording Copyright parameter provider sound recording copyright information for the song. A 1?erformance Rights Agency identifies a performance rights agency for the song. A Mechanical Rights Agency identifies a mechanical rights agency for the song. ~~ Reco~:d. Label parameter identifies the record labe=L for t:he song. A Distributors parameter identifies one or more distributors of the song.
A Date EncadE~d parameter indicates a date at which the song wa:~ encoded. An Encoded By parameter identifies a party that encoded the song.
TABLE ~JII il:Lustrates watermark information parameters Bind miscellaneous parameters extracted from data having the content format. A Standard Watermark parameter provides a standard digital watermark for identifying a souz-ce of the song. A User-Defined Watermark parameter provides a user-defined digital watermark for the song. A Notes parameter includes notes associated wir_h the song.
TABLE VII
PARAMETER
Standard Watermark U;~er-defined Watermark Notes Referring back to FIG. 1, the audience measuring component 154 monitors and reports listenership l0 information for items played using the player 142.
Preferably, listening activity data is recorded for each instance of an end user playing an audio content item for a duration that attains or exceeds a predetermined listening time threshold. If the duration is less than the predetermined listening time threshold, the listening behavior is not considered significant, and the listening activity data is not recorded.
Preferably, the predetermined listening time threshold is a global system parameter used for all audio content items .
Any of the herein-described audio content items, including but not limited to radio category items, events category items, library category items, and music category items, ca:n be monitored in this way. The data can include an indication of the audio content item, an indication of which end user is playing back the item, a demographic of the end user, a time at which the audio content item is played, and a location of the end user.
Based upon any of the listenership information, the audience measurement component generates and provides reports including actual data and/or summaries thereof.
These reporter can include measurements that are familiar to advertisers, such as Average Quarter Hour, Ctzme, and time spent l.isteni.ng, which are familiar to radio advertisers. Each of these measurements can be derived from data tracked b:y the system. Each report can be specific to one or more radio stations associated with an entity such as a broadcasting company, or to one or more songs a.ssocia.ted with an entity such as a record company, for example. The report is communicated to the entity to provide audience listenership information.
The report can be communicated via the electronic network 100. The report can be stratified by demographics such as gender, age, occupation, and geographical region of the end users. Each report can be automatically generated either at periodic or predetermined times or upon receiving a request therefor.
A particular embodiment of the audience measuring component 154 is as follows. When an end user initially enters the site providing the player 142, an entry is made to a listener :Log database. The listener log database to which the entry is made depends upon which type of audio content item the end user is receiving.
Preferably, the listener log database is selected from a radio log database, a music log database, an events log database, and a library log database. The entry includes an identif:Ler of the end user (e.g. the CustomerID of the end user) and an identifier of the content (e. g. a radio station identifier, an event identifier, an album identifier, and/or a song identifier).
As the end user continues to listen to the content item for a ~~redeterznined time threshold, a subsequent entry is made into the appropriate listener log database. 'this process is repeated so that a new entry is made aftc=r every period having the predetermined time threshold. If the content item has changed, the end time is recorded, a.nd the new entry identifies the new content item. They new content is monitored in the same way as the previous content item. In this way, when the end user leaves the site, only the final seconds of listening (up to a maximum of the predetermined time threshold) are not. tracked. Preferably, a clock (not illustrated; associated with the server 102 is used to reference a:Ll time'-based data for the audience measuring component 154.
The audience measuring component 154 periodically generates reports based upon the listener log databases.
Each report can be' generated daily, weekly, monthly, quarterly, or annually and communicated to a client (e.g. a radio station) via either paper or the electronic networl~; 100 using electronic mail, the World Wide Web, oz- HTML. Each report can be dynamically created rather than stored. Preferably, the report indicates time of day listening habits and numbers of listeners. Demographic data of listeners can also be provided.
The report can include any combination of: (i) a measurement inter~ral or period (e. g. daily, monthly, quarterly, or yearly); (ii) a measurement interval date range; (iii) call letters and band of the radio station;
(iv) a count: of unique listeners; (v) a count of all listeners; I:vi) an average listening time per connection; (vii) an average listening time per unique listener; (viii) a graph interval (e. g. in minutes);
(ix) an average simultaneous users; (x) an average quarterly hour li:>tener metric; and (xi) a cumulative listener metric (c:ume) .
The li:~tener log databases can be maintained by archiving the data, and purging the databases on a daily basis. Preferably, the archived data includes a record of the start: time and end time for each end user based upon a plurality c>f entries in the listener log databases.
Still with reference to FIG. 1, a detailed description of the' advertising component 160 is provided. 'The advertising component 160 maintains a database of advertising records. Each advertising record can include an advertisement type, an electronic address, such as aWURL, for an audible or visible advertisement, cli.e:nt information identifying the advertiser, and information designating a target audience (e. g. based on customer display information, music, and radio s~t~ation genre). Preferably, there are four types of advE:rtisements: a banner advertisement, an attraction advertisement, a feature advertisement, and an audio advertisement.
A plurality c>f banner advertisements from the database are: queued for display with the player 142.
The banner advertisements are successively displayed based on an automated process performed by the advertising component 160. For example, a subsequent banner advertisement in the queue can be displayed every 150 seconds in the banner advertising region 1304 described with reference to FIG. 47.
A plurality of attractions advertisements from the database are queued for display with the player 142.
The attractions advertisements are successively displayed based on. an automated process performed by the advertising component 160. For example, the attractions WO 99l27b81 PCTNS98/25092 advertisements can be displayed in the attractions region 1306 or the. region 1312 described with reference to FIG. 47. Preferably, attractions advertisements are contextuall~r associated with audio content played using the player _L42. For example, an attractions advertisement can promote an upcoming concert or an album signing related to audio content being played using the p7_ayer 7.42. In this way, the advertising component lEiO can provide content-specific advertisements.
A plurality of feature advertisements from the database are selected based upon broadcast signals. The feature advertisements can include static information such as a radio station logo presented continuously while the player 1.42 is playing content from an associated radio ~:tation. The feature advertisements can include dynamic information such as an image of each album being played. Further, the feature advertisements can include a visible advertisement tailored to appear during a broadcast. commercial. The feature advertisements can. be displayed in the information space 1314 descrix>ed wit.h reference to FIG. 47, for example.
The audio advertisements replace advertisements within the f>roadca.st prior to communication to the client apparatus 106. In this way, alternative Internet-based broadcasts and regional-based broadcasts can be generated.
The advertising component 160 can determine an associated subset o:F the advertisements targeted to each end user. Further, the advertising component 160 can determine th.e sequence in which the subset of advertisements are to be presented. Advertisements can be selected for an end user based on any of the following: online and off-line purchasing, demographics, psychographics, geographics, sonagraphics (e. g.
*rB
listening preferences), and listener behavior. In this way, the advertising component 160 can provide user-specific advertiseanents.
The advertisi:nd component 160 tracks viewership and listenership of each of the advertisements in the database. D~~ta is recorded indicative of which end users have seen or heard an advertisement in an active window for at leash a predetermined time duration, and times at whi~~h the advertisement was seen or heard. The l0 data can further track which end users click through or otherwise s elect e<~ch advertisement to get additional information, and track the contemporaneous activity of the end user: .
The advertising component 160 generates reports based upon the tracking data. The reports correlate end user demographics with metrics of the viewing and listening dal~a. Client advertising billing reports can also be generated based upon the tracking data.
It is noted that some of the advertising images and audio files can be cached to the storage device 132 of the client apparatus 106 to improve system performance.
Audio files can be pre-queued and pre-buffered for streaming at the client apparatus 106. Either in-band signaling or out-of-band signaling can be used to trigger the :images and audio files. An example of in-band signaling includes a tone encoded within an audio data stream 1.o identify and trigger content insertion.
An example oi_ out-of-band signaling includes data streamed with the audio data stream.
It is a:Lso noised that to improve system performance, the server 102 can provide the client apparatus l0fi with content, in addition to the active content, based on a nearest subset of content selections on the graph__cal radio dial, presets, or favorites based on the end user's listening behavior. The additional content can be prey-.buffered by the client apparatus 106.
The hex-ein-dEascribed components of the server 102 can interact. with the player 133 (and optionally player 142) to provide pe:r~sonalized content to each of a plurality of end users of client apparatuses 104 and 106. Personalized. content can be provided to a first user by: (i} comm.unicating from the server 144 first audio content associated with a broadcast to a first user location 106, together with control data with information relating to the content, the broadcaster, the user or other attributes such as location of the user, examples of which are set out below; (ii) selecting (at the server 102) second content based upon a first user profile (preferably located at the server 102); and (iii) communicating a first signal to the first user location.
The first signal to the first user location comes from a server such as server 102 or 144, and the player (player 142 and player 133 in combination) causes switching of content; from a first server 102 to a second server 144 or from t:he server 144 to another server (not shown), from which t:he inserted advertisement or other material is ~3erive~d..
The switching of content can take place at the player 133 or at t:he player 142. In the former case, upon detection of the relevent code, the player 133 can cause the additional content to be inserted from either a local storage device 132 or from the additional content server (not shown in FIG 1).
Upon registration of the client with the server 102 the server will pr~e7.oad a queue of advertisments or other content items into the storage device or will preload addresses or. URLs for those content items into the storage ~~evice 1.32. Thereafter, as the client 106 receives content j_rom the server 144 and as it identifies an insertion point from the associated data, instead of presenting any content that it receives from server 144 at that. insertion point, the client will present one of the: preloaded advertisements or other content iterns from its storage device 132.
These advertisements can be of appropriate length in the case of audio advertisements such that an insertion point that indicates an opportunity for (for example) a twenty or thirty second sound advertisement can cause such an advertisement to be retrieved from the storage device 132. Alternatively, these insertion points can indicate addresses or URLs which cause the client 106 t:o turn to another server (not shown) to find 15 a content item to be inserted at that point, and that other server will decide what that content should be.
Another example of an insertion item could be a complete song from a local artist, and the insertion point indicates that this should be the item inserted, whereupon the client refers to the local server and the server delivers whatever is the selected local song for the selected local artist.
Instead of using insertion points identifiable in the data stream from the primary content server 144, the server 102 can prow.ide the client 106 with a schedule of insertion times anal the client 106 can maintain a real time clock a.nd at the designated insertion times it will turn to its next insertion item for insertion into the content being received from server 144.
It is preferred, in the case of streaming audio, that data is interleaved into the audio indicating such information as to the artist or song currently being played. This inter:Leaved data can be used by the client 106 as the trigger for causing a replacement of the data being received from server 144. For example an entire song could be rep~~Laced. Alternatively, that data could have a separate logical connection rather than being interleaved into t:he audio.
Of part=icular interest are cases in which the first audio content and the first signal are communicated via an electronic network including at least one of the Internet, an intranet, and an extranet. The first signal synchronizes playback of the second content with respect to playback of the first audio content.
The second content can include a first at least one image selected in dependence upon the first user profile 150. In this case, the first signal is to synchronize display of t:he first at least one image to playback of the first audio content. The first at least one image can be selected further in dependence upon content within the first audio content. Of particular interest are cases in which. the first image is a content-specific image and/or a broadcaster-specific image.
Personalized visual content can be provided to a second user 104 by communicating the first audio content associated with th.e broadcast (from server 144) to a second user location 104, selecting a second at least one image based upon second user profile stored in customer profile 150, and communicating a second signal to the second user :Location (e.g. from server 102 or from another server not shown). The second signal synchronizes display of the second at least one image to playback of the first audio content. The second at least one image can differ from the first at least one image .
The second content can include second audio content selected in dependence upon the first user profile. In this case, the first signal is to synchronize playback of the second audio content with respect to playback of the first audio content. The second audio content can WO 99/27681 PCTlUS98/25092 be synchronized for insertion within the first audio content. Of particular interest are cases in which the second content includes at least one of advertising content and programrning content.
Personalized audible content can be provided to the second user by communicating the first audio content associated with the broadcast to the second user location, selecting third audio content based upon the second user :profile, and communicating a second signal to the second user profile, and communicating a second signal to the second user location to synchronize playback of the third audio content with respect to playback of the first audio content. To personalize the content, the third audio content can differ from the second audio content:. The third audio content can be synchronized for insertion within the first audio content.
Each user profile is updated by monitoring information ~~ssociat:ed with user-specific, apparatus independent ,ise of a plurality of audio content player apparatus vi~~ the electronic network. For example, the user profile for a user can be based upon his/her use at both the clip=_nt apparatus 106 and the client apparatus 104. Each u;~er profile can include transaction information, demographic information, psychographic information, geographic information, sonagraphic information, and listening behavior information for its associated u:~er.
Thus, there ha:, been described herein several embodiments :includ:ing preferred embodiments of audio content playcsr methods, systems, and articles of manufacture.
Embodiments o:f the present invention can provide an Internet-based dig:it.al audio service that combines an easy-to-use, customizable audio player interface with a WO 99/2'7681 PCT/US98/25092 wide variety of audio content. Users are able to access audio-on-demand through an archive of music and spoken word titles, and are able to tune to live radio broadcasts f=rom around the world. Further, content information is integrated with content distribution. In this way, an end user can obtain information about content to which he/she is listening. Additionally, the end user is provided a means for purchasing the content, such as music content, to which he/she is listening.
User preferences and behavior are tracked to generate information of interest for each user. This information can relate to his/her music taste, geographical location, and/or other personalized criteria. The information can also be used by radio stations ancL record labels to determine which music is worth playing.
Embodiments of the player advantageously support browsing of audio content on the Internet using two metaphors: (i) a radio station metaphor and (ii) a record store listening booth metaphor.
Additional features include: concurrent display of visual information based on material broadcast by a radio station; paging of the end user for scheduled events; an interactive schedule for radio programming;
listing available stations for a day; and a map to show a location of origin of a radio station.
It is noted that as an alternative or in addition to providing audio content, the herein-described methods and systems can be used to provide video content.
It will be apparent to those skilled in the art that the disclosed P~nbodiments may be modified in numerous ways and :may assume many forms other than the preferred form specifically set out and described above.
Accordingly, it is intended that the appended claims cover a1T such modifications which fall within the true spirit and scope of the invention.
GThat i~; claimed is
FIG. 16 is an illustration of an example of a portion of the interface displayed upon receiving a user-initiatESd selection of the library category control 246. In the library category, a graphical time scale 520 is displayed. A. time marker 522 indicates a current time position, for a. library content selection, on the graphical time sca=Le 520. The graphical time scale 520 represents a total time 524 for the selection. The time marker 522 can be rnoved manually using the pointing device or can be moved using the advance/review controls 206.
The graphical riser interface provides multiple ways to navigate 'to content in the library category. A first way includes using t:he selection attribute indicators 214 to select content having chosen attributes.
Attribute selection.:is performed in a manner described with reference to F'IG. 3. In the library category, selection of an "ALL" option produces a list of all library content.
The category attribute field 262 allows the end user to limit. the library content to at least one particular category or format of spoken audio. A custom attribute allows a plurality of categories or formats l0 can be selected by holding down the shift key while selecting the' options. In this way, the end user can repeatedly select options from the list without forcing the attribute: selection to move to the next field. It is noted that: categories can be specialized with options such best sellers and reviews.
The author att:ribute field 264 allows the end user to specify an author of the content. Work that is absent of an author (such as non-book material) can have a lead person in the work listed as an author. Upon selecting the author attribute field 264, a list of authors having content limited to the category specified in the category attribute field 262 is displayed. The end user can select: an author from the list.
Upon se:Lecting the title attribute field 266, a list of titlEa that: satisfy the parameters specified in the category attribute field 262 and the author attribute field 261 is displayed. The end user can select a tit:Le from the list.
FIG. 17 shows an example of text in the fields 262, 264, and 266 associated with the aforementioned approach to navigating to library material. inThen information in a field is longer t~h.at the width of the field, the full text of the _i.nformation is available by maintaining a cursor on the field. In response to this user-initiated event, the width of the field is expanded to accommodate the full text.
A second way to navigate to library content is to use a preset. As described with reference to FIG. 2, some presets are dedicated to the library section. Upon selecting a preset button, attributes specified by its corresponding preset:, are used to populate the attribute fields 262, 264, and 266. If the preset defines a set of titles, the=_ user can select one of the titles using the title attribute field 266.
A third way to navigate to library content is to use a smart card (either physical or virtual). The smart card is used to populate attributes in the player.
Thereafter, the user is presented with the content cued and ready to play, or is presented with a list of titles to select from. The smart card can allow access to otherwise una~;railab:Le~ content that is made available through privi:Leges atored in the smart card. During smart card operation, the Library function label is displayed using an oblique font.
Smarts cards also facilitate access to specific titles as part of a playlist. In this case, the end user can specify and save a playlist of titles to the smart card. 'rhe playlist is used to control the player.
The playlist is amenable for transfer between the end user and another end user, and between a plurality of access points for t:he end user. When an item from a playlist is selected, its attributes populate the attribute fields 26:2, 264, and 266, and the item is cued for play.
Regardless of the method of navigating to a title, the graphical user interface can provide indicators and controls to provide access to specific chapters or sections of the material in a manner similar to tracks of a compact disk. A time indicator can be displayed at the top of th.e time ;scale relative to each particular segment or relative to the time from the beginning of the material. As il:Lustrated in FIG. 18, an indicator 540 of which chapter is current and the number of chapters that. exist is displayed at an end of the time line. Clicking on the indicator 540 presents a pick list of chapters.
Cueing t:o anot:her part of the content can be performed using the advance/review controls 206 to advance through the: time bar. When advanced beyond the length of a chapter, a subsequent chapter is provided.
Holding down the actvance/review controls 206 advances or returns to other chapters.
Alternatively, tags marking specific content on the time bar can be user-selected to advance to specific content. Further, a user-initiated selection of a point on the time 7_ine moves the time marker to the point.
Optiona:Lly, the time marker can have specially-encoded matex-ial a~~sociated therewith to allow for users to find specific segments. This is beneficial in educational applications. Another option is to provide titles of ch~~pters rather than chapter numbers in the indicator 540. Links to reviewers or other comments can be embedded in the time scale to allow the end user to pause and ref-_lect on the current material.
FIG. 19 illusi~rates an example of the second display region 222 being used to provide auxiliary information about a title. The auxiliary information is displayed in response to receiving a user-initiated selection of the information control 220, which includes the text "TI~f'ILE INFO" for library content . The auxiliary ink=ormation can include specific information for the titlf~, a siurimary of the title, a table of contents, credits, comments on the title, accompanying text, links to reviews of the title, links to related areas, an image 550 of the author(s), and an image 552 of the cover of a book, for example.
5 It is noted that the library category can optionally provide additional functionality not specifically illustrated in the drawings. Examples of additional fu.nction.a:lity include: (i) a feedback mechanism to rate th~~ title as a whole, the author, 10 reading or translation of the title with a 1 to 10 pick list on a lix~rary information screen; and (ii) a comment line that allows th:e end user to submit textual feedback with or without the:,aforementioned rating.
FIG. 20 is an illustration of an example of a 15 portion of the interface displayed upon receiving a user-initiated selection of the music category control 247. In the music category, a graphical time scale 600 is displayed much like the graphical time scale 520 for the library category. A time marker 602 indicates a 20 current time position for a music selection, such as an album or a song, on the graphical time scale 600. The graphical time scale 600 represents a total time 604 for the music se7_ection. The time marker 602 can be moved manually using a c7_ick-and-drag operation with a 25 pointing device or can be moved using the advance/review controls 206.
The graphical user interface provides multiple ways to navigate t:o cont:ent in the music category. A first way includes using the selection attribute indicators 30 214 to select. content having chosen attributes .
Attribute se_Lection is performed in a manner described with reference to I?IG. 3. In the music category, selection of an "AI~L~" option produces a list of all music content, .
WO 99/Z7681 PC1'/US98/25092 The category attribute field 262 allows the end user to limit'the library content to at least one particular category or format. Traditional categories and formats of music (e.g. rock, jazz, pop, etc.) can be provided. A plurality of categories or formats can be selected by holding down the shift key while selecting the options. In this way, the end user can repeatedly select options from.l~he list without forcing the attribute selection 1~o move to the next field.
The artist attribute field 264 allows the end user to specify an. artist of the content. Upon selecting the artist attrix~ute fie:Ld 264, a list of artists having content limited to the category specified in the category attribute field 262 is displayed. The end user can select ar,. artist from the list.
Upon se7_ectinc~ the title attribute field 266, a list of titlea that.;satisfy the parameters specified in the category attribute field 262 and the artist attribute field 264 is displayed. The end user can select a title from the list. The list of titles can include album titlea and song titles.
When inf=ormation in one of the fields 262, 264, and 266 is longer that the display width of the field, the full text of the information is available by maintaining a cursor on t:he field. In response to this user-initiated event, the width of the field is expanded to accommodate t:he full text .
A second way t=o navigate to music content is to use a preset. As described with reference to FIG. 2, some presets are dedicated to the music section. Upon selecting a preset button, attributes specified by its corresponding presets are used to populate the attribute fields 262, a?64, and 266. If the preset defines a set of titles, the user. can select one of the titles using the title attribute: field 266.
*rB
A third way to navigate to music content is to use a smart card (either physical or virtual). The smart card is used to populate attributes in the player.
Thereafter, t:he user is presented with the content cued and ready to play, or is presented with a list of titles to select from.
Smarts cards also facilitate access to specific titles as pant of a playlist. In this case, the end user can specify and save a playlist of titles to the l0 smart card. The p7_aylist is used to control the player.
The playlist is amenable for transfer between the end user and another end user, and between a plurality of access points for t:h.e end user. When an item from a playlist is :~electe~d., its attributes populate the attribute fiE=lds 262, 264, and 266, and the item is cued for play.
Regardless of t:he method of navigating to a title, the graphical user interface can provide indicators and controls to ~~rovide access to specific tracks, sections, or parts of ~~he musi.c. As illustrated in FIG. 21, an indicator 620 of which track is current and the number of tracks th~~t exi:~t. is displayed at an end of the time line. Clicking on the indicator 620 presents a pick list of tracl~cs.
Cueing to another part of the music content can be performed using the advance/review controls 206 to advance through the time bar. Holding down the advance/review controls 206 for more than a predetermine~~ time duration (such as one second, for example) advances or returns to other tracks immediately. A user-initiated selection of a point on the time line moves the time marker to the point.
Optionally, then time marker 602 can have specially encoded material associated therewith to allow for users to find specific'songs or other segments. Another option is to provide titles of songs and/or credits rather than track numbers in the indicator 620.
Controls can be provided to allow titles in an album to be rearranged for p=La.yback.
Referrin~~ back t:o FIG. 2, the second display region 222 can be usE:d to provide auxiliary information about music content. The auxiliary information is displayed in response to rece_Lving a user-initiated selection of the information coni~rol 220, which includes the text "ALBUM INFO" :Eor mu:~i.c content. The auxiliary information c<~n inc:Lude specific information for the current title such <~s; album cover graphics, liner notes, tray back images, images of the artist(s), producer and writer credits, and distribution label information, for example.
It is noted that: the music category can optionally provide additional functionality not specifically illustrated i:n the drawings. Examples of additional functionality include: (i) a feedback mechanism to rate aspects of the musi~~ such as the artist, the album, a song, and a producer, using a 1 to 10 pick list on a music information screen; (ii) a comment line that allows the end user t:o submit textual feedback with or without the aforeme:nt:ioned rating; and (iii) an ability to receive, decode, and display streamed music video in the second display region 222.
FIG. 22 illustrates an example of a search feature provided in the second display region 222. The search feature is activated in response to receiving a user-initiated selection of the search control 224. If the user-initiated selec lion is received while the search feature is active, h<srein-described search fields are reset.
The search feature receives a user-entered search string. The search.;string is displayed at a location 630. The search string includes one or more keywords which can have the form of a Boolean expression. A list of keywords can be combined using a "+" character. To limit the selection. to one of the keywords, a "-"
character precedes t:he keyword. Generally, the keywords are case insensitive.
Using tree search string, a search of a database is performed in dependence upon user-selectable search criteria. The database can be provided by the server 102 and/or the server 144. The search criteria limits where to search in the database for the search string.
The search criteria includes fields for the radio IS category, the eventa category, the library category, and the music category. Each search criterion can be activated anc~ deactivated using a graphical check box associated therewith. An "x" character is displayed at the graphica7_ check box to indicate that its associated search criterion i:~ activated. As a default, all search criteria are activated.
A first button 632 is responsive to a user-initiated se:Lection to provide further fields to be searched. The first button 632 can be subsequently selected to provide. still further fields to be searched.
Each additional fiE:ld provided in response to the first button 632 i:~ activa.ted by default. The end user can deselect the activated fields if desired. A second button 634 i:~ respon.sive to a user-initiated selection to provide fESwer fields to be searched.
The search is ~>erformed in response to a user-initiated se:Lection of a button 636. Results of the search are d:isplayE~d in the second display region 222.
FIG. 23 illustrates an example of search results displayed in the second display region 222. The search results are sorted b_y category (in the order of radio, events, library, anal music). Preferably, items are 5 color-coded i.n dependence upon its category. Within each categor~~ are three attribute headings. Search results within each category can be sorted by an attribute by select.i:ng its associated one of the attribute headings.
10 A first button 640 is responsive to a user-initiated selection to return to the previously set search field~> (incl.uding the search string and the search criteria). The end user can modify the search fields to modify the search. A second button 642 is 15 responsive to a user-initiated selection to reset the search field: to perform a new search.
FIG. 24 illust=rates an example of a listening booth feature provided in the second display region 222. The listening booth feature is activated in response to 20 receiving a user-initiated selection of the user feedback control 226. The listening booth feature can provide a venue for new music by relatively unknown talent. End users listen to the music, and provide user feedback to <z serv~.ce via the electronic network 100.
25 In return, the service provides the end user with an incentive, such as a complimentary copy of the music, a coupon, T-sh_Lrt, or other promotional item. Each end user rates music based upon a user preference parameter, such as a mo:~t-lisi~ened category for the end user. In 30 general, any audible: material can be rated, including but not limit=ed to albums, playlists from radio stations and experimental audible material.
The listening booth feature provides an option 650 to view directions therefor. In response to a user-35 initiated se:Lection of the option 650, the directions are displayed in the second display region 222. The directions can include example screens to explain use of the listening booth feature.
Upon each return to the listening booth feature, a status of the end u;sE:r is displayed. The end user is registered at the s~exver 102 through an active preferences smart card. The status can include a number of albums rated by the end user, and/or a remaining number of albums to x°eceive a complimentary album.
The status information includes information about the end user, which may be stored via the preferences smart card. If this information is not present, the user is prompted to make a preferences smart card active or to create a preferences smart card. The preferences smart card provides a method of tracking listening preferences of the end user in order to determine which albums to present in the listening booth feature.
FIG. 25 is an e:Kample of a second display for the listening booth feature. The second display is presented upon confirming the identity of the end user, such as by receiving a password in the first display.
The second di~~play provides several categories of music content from which to select. These categories are determined through past listening behavior of the end user. An. option 660 can be selected to provide additional, c~iffere~mt categories. The option 660 can be repeatedly selected, to repeatedly provide more categories.
A user-initiated selection of text or graphics associated with one of the categories is received to select a category. 'The text can include a radio station associated with they category the end user has a radio preset for the category. The graphics can include an album cover of a typical album in the category.
FIG. 26 is an example of a third display for the listening booth feo~trre. The third display is presented upon a user-initiated selection of one of the categories in the second display.
The third display includes at least one image 670 associated with a music selection from the category.
The at least one image 670 can include a slide show based on liner notea, a CD tray back image, or a random image, for a};ample. The third display also includes l0 textual information including an artist, an album, a producer, a 7_abel, and a copyright associated with the music selection.
The music sels:ction is loaded into the attributes.
Based on user. preferences, the tracks can automatically begin playincl when queued. The music selection can include samp_Les of a few seconds from each track on an album, for e~cample. During playback, the end user enters a rating using a control 674. The control includes 674 a marl~:er 676 that is manipulated with respect to a numer~_cal scale 680. The numerical scale 680 can run between two numerical limits, such as from 0 to 100.
Upon completion of playing the samples, the user-entered rating is recorded and the music selection is counted as being rated by the end user. If no rating has been entered, no rating is recorded. If the end user exits the lisl:ening booth feature during playback, the rating i;~ not recorded. A rating can be canceled by a user-initiated sE~lection of the cancel button 252.
As an alternative to a numerical rating, a graphical rehreseni=a.tion of rating can be employed. The graphical re~~resenl~aaion can be repeatedly gauged throughout tine music selection. In this way, specific aspects and ~specif:ic tracks of the music selection can be rated.
Referring back too FIG. 24, a control 690 can be selected by the end user to view previously reviewed albums. FIG. 27 is an example display provided upon selecting the contro:L 690. The display includes a list 692 of each album reviewed by the end user. An album title 694, an artist 696, a copyright 700, a date 702, and an icon 704 are displayed for each album. The icon 704 can be selected too view images and credits, and to hear an audio clip o:E the samples for its associated a lbum .
An exam~~le of a portion of the interface displayed upon selecting the icon is depicted in FIG. 28. As illustrated, the at :Least one image 670, the textual information 672, th.e marker 676, and the numerical scale 680 showing the rating are displayed as in FIG. 26.
Additionally, a date 720 on which the album was rated is displayed. Pn option 722 is dedicated to receive a user-initiated event to initiate playback of the samples. An option.'724 is dedicated to receive a user-initiated event to r~aturn to the previous screen.
Once the number of albums rated by the end user has attained a predetermined number, the end user can request a complimer.~tary copy by selecting any one of the albums in the list. A dedicated button (not illustrated) can be selected to request that the complimentar~~ copy be shipped to an address of the end user.
FIG. 29 illustrates an example of a card organizer display for << smart: card feature. The smart card feature is ac;tivate:d in response to receiving a user-initiated se7.ection of the smart card control 230. The card organizer display is displayed within the second display region 222.
There are four types of smart cards (either physical or virtual) that can be used in the system.
The four types of smart cards include a preferences smart card, a promo~ti_ons smart card, a playlist smart card, and a p;~yment smart card.
A preferences smart card or a personality smart card stores identity, demographics, presets, defaults, payment options and preferences, and event schedules for an end user. The preferences smart card is read/write and password protected. Each preferences smart card can be unique for an associated end user of the client apparatus 106. Using a plurality of preferences smart cards, a plurality of: individual preferences can be provided for a plurality of end users of the client apparatus 106.
A playlist smart:. card is a custom card for an individual. The playlist smart card is a collection and organization device for content available via the electronic network 100. The playlist smart card can be used to collect music:, library content, events, or radio programming using personalized icons, event schedules, and playlists. Access to some content may be secured using the playlist smart card via a purchase. The playlist smart card c:an be traded, downloaded, sold, and/or bartered between two individuals. Typically, the playlist smart card is dedicated to a single function.
A promotions smart card provides privileged access to predetermined events, such as special events. For example, the promotions smart card can bring the end user to a specified .Location via the electronic network 100 to listen to programmed content. The promotions smart card can be purchased or received free of charge.
Typically, the prom.ot:ions smart card is dedicated for accessing a single :Function. It is preferred that the promotions sm~~rt card be the equivalent of a read-only playlist smart card.
A payment smart card provides a means for paying 5 for content. The payment smart card can store billing information f~~r content purchases absent of credit card information. The aloi.lity to purchase or rent content may allow the end user to gain access to new releases or obscure content.
10 The card organizer display includes a first portion 730 dedicated for preferences smart cards, a second portion 732 dedicated for playlist smart cards, and a third portion 734 dedicated for promotions smart cards.
Only three portions are displayed because the payment 15 smart card provides part of the preferences for the end user.
Each of the first portion 730, the second portion 732, and the third portion 734 includes one or more card icons (a respective one being indicated by reference 20 numeral 736). Each of the card icons is user-selectable to select an associated smart card for further action.
Each card icon can b<s selected using a point-and-click operation, or by using one of up scroll controls 740 and one of down scroll controls 742.
25 Upon clicking o:n or otherwise selecting a card icon such as the card icon 736, a step of displaying a cover and/or a description of the associated smart card is performed. 'fo view the contents of the smart card, the associated card icon 736 is dragged and dropped to a 30 fourth portion 750 of the display. The fourth portion 750 includes a graphical representation of a card slot 752.
FIG. 30 is ar.~ example portion of the interface displayed in response to the aforementioned drag-and-drop 35 operation. F'or purposes of illustration and example, a preferences :mart card associated with the card icon 736 was dragged and dropped to the fourth portion 750. In response to t:his operation, a graphical card 760 is displayed within the card slot, a textual name 762 of the smart card is displayed in an oblique font within a graphical tab 764, and the contents of the smart card are displayed over the first portion 730, the second portion 732, and the third portion 734 in FIG. 29.
l0 The texi_ual name 762 in the graphical tab 764 indicates wh_Lch smart card is active. A function of the player being controlled by the smart card is also displayed in an ob7_ique font. The textual name 762 includes up i:o fift:een characters of the smart card name. The smart card name can include up to two lines of text to dE~scribe the smart card. If the smart card name has morE~ than fifteen characters, the first fifteen characters are displayed, followed by a series of dots.
The preferencf=_~; smart card has three areas that can be viewed and/or edited. The three areas include an identity are<~, a defaults area, and a payment options area. A fir:~t graphical button 770 is dedicated to receive a usE~r-inii:fated action to access the identity area. A second graphical button 772 is dedicated to receive a user-inii:fated action to access the defaults area. A third grapraical button 774 is dedicated to receive a use=_r-inii~i.ated action to access the payment options area.
As illustrated, FIG. 30 shows a display of the identity are~~. The=_ identity area includes a plurality of fields to store identity information. The fields can include fields for l.ogin information, password information, name :information, address information, city information, and an electronic mail address.
*rB
FIG. 31 shows a display of the defaults area initiated upon selecting the second graphical button 772. The defaults area includes information on how to handle specific actions, such as whether to automaticall~r play a.selected title from the radio content category, t:he events content category, the library content category, and the music content category.
FIG. 32 shows a. display of the payment options area initiated upon selE:cting the third graphical button 774.
The payment option:> area includes a shipping address and a billing address. The payment options area also provides an option 780 for the end user to type a credit card number :_n order to make a purchase. It is noted that the credit card number is not stored to the player.
With re:EerencE~ to each of FIGS. 29 to 32, an edit button 790 can be :elected to edit any of the information associated with the smart card. A cancel button 792 can be selected to cancel the edit. A save button 794 can be :elected to save the edited fields. A
warning message can be provided to prompt the end user to save edited fie:Ld.s upon an attempt to exit . The end user can rejE?Ct thE' warning to cancel all editing activity with the :mart card.
FIG. 33 is an Example portion of the interface displayed in response to a drag-and-drop operation of a playlist smaot card to the fourth portion 750. A
playlist 800 of a plurality of items is displayed in response to l~he drag-and-drop operation. The playlist 800 is speci:Eic to a. predetermined content area. Items can be selected from the playlist 800 for automatic playback, or can be selected using the selector.
Items can be added and deleted from the playlist 800. To add an item, the material is selected using the browser, followed by a selection of the save button 794.
Clicking on or otherwise selecting the save button 794 saves all qu~ilifying radio stations, events, or titles to the playlist smart card. Although items can be added and deleted, contents of items within the playlist smart card are not user-editable.
FIG. 34 is an example portion of the interface displayed in response to a drag-and-drop operation of a promotions smart card to the fourth portion 750. The promotions smart card is similar to a playlist smart card. However, itEams within the promotions smart card cannot be added, deleted, or edited. Items can be selected from the promotions smart card for automatic playback, or can be selected using the selector.
With re:Eerence to FIGS. 30 to 34, a graphical button 810 can be :elected to send smart card information _~n an Electronic mail message. Virtual smart card information, stored as a file in the client apparatus 10E>, is transmitted as a file in the electronic mail me:~sage. The electronic mail message can be communicated to another of the plurality of client apparatus 104 via the electronic network 100. If there are unique privileges for the smart card, the smart card imformat~ion can be deleted at the sending apparatus. ~~lternatively, communication of the smart card informal=ion can. be inhibited if there are unique privileges.
A new smart card is created by selecting a graphical bul~ton 8:?0 when no smart card is active. In response to :receiving a selection of the graphical button 820, ~~ list of options is displayed. The options include an option 1~o create a preferences smart card, an option to create a playlist smart card, and an option to obtain a smart card from an incoming electronic mail message. Fo:r a smart card created from an incoming electronic m~~il message, the type of smart card is dependent upon the 'type of smart card used to generate the electronic mail message.
By selecting the option to obtain the smart card from an electronic mail message, a directory of possible virtual cards is displayed. The end user can browse the directory to find a:nc~ select a virtual smart card of interest.
Each of the smart card categories can have a limited number of smart cards. For example, each of the playlist category a:nc~ the promotions category can be limited to ten smart cards, and the preferences category can be limited to five smart cards. If the limit has been attained, the graphical button 820 is displayed in a second color such as grey rather than black.
The contents of the active smart card can be deleted by selecting a graphical button 822. A message confirming that the contents are to be deleted (such as "are you sure") is displayed prior to deleting the contents.
A graphical button such as an icon 824 can be user-selected to de-select. the active smart card in the card slot. The icon 824 :i.ncludes a graphical eject button.
In response to a user-selection of the icon 824, the graphical card 824 i:~ removed from the fourth portion 824, and the formerly active smart card is returned to its position.
A graphical button such as an icon 826 can be user-selected to return to the display of the card organizer.
The icon 826 graphically resembles a file folder. It is noted that th.e active smart card remains active in response to selecting the icon 826.
As described with reference to FIG. 1, the player 142 can provide a second visual interface having a collapsed view. Preferably, in the collapsed view, the tabs for the lower portion of the window including the *rB
information control 220, the search control 224, the user feedbaclc control 226, and the smart card control 230 remain visible. A user-initiated selection of any of the controls 220, 224, 226, and 230 directs the 5 player to opE~n the second display region 222, and to initiate a fE~ature associated therewith.
FIG. 35 is a screen shot of a first embodiment of the graphica_L user interface in the radio content mode.
The default radio station indicated by the graphical 10 marker 332 on the graphical radio dial 330 begins playing upon its se=lection.
As with the p:reviously-described embodiments, the interface includes the categorical selection controls 244, 245, 246, and 247, the preset selection indicators 15 202, the pre:yet se:Lection controls 204, the advance/revicsw coni~rols 206, the playback controls 210, the volume controls 212, the selection attribute indicators 2:L4, the streaming indicator 216, the first display region 218, the information control 220, the 20 second display reg=ion 222, the search control 224, the user feedback control 226, the smart card control 230, the help mode=_ control 232, the first logo 234, the second logo 236, thE! advertising window 240, and the attractions window 242. The user feedback control 226 25 provides acccsss to c:hat features in this embodiment.
FIG. 36 is a screen shot showing a content selection ini~.erface in the first preferred embodiment.
A window 850 opens upon clicking the select button 260 or any of the attr=ibutes that def ine the dial at the 30 t ime .
FIG. 37 is a sc:reen shot of a second preferred embodiment o:f the graphical user interface. The second preferred embodiment: may be programmed in a markup language suc:z as H'>?MML, in comparison to the first *rB
WO 99/27681 PCT/US98l25092 preferred emx>odiment which may include plug-in-specific code to prov_~de animation (such as Shockwave code).
A radio dial 870 spatially displays the band and location of all available stations that match selected criteria. A station pick list 872 allows for a user selection of all stations from the radio dial 870. A
banner 874 du splay~~ banner advertisements that rotate in accordance with a predetermined schedule. A region 876 displays logos and attractions that rotate in accordance with a predetermined. schedule. A selection area 880 provides categorical selection controls and player function controls. A region 882 displays streamed and clickable te:ct than can include attractions and advertisments. An information space 884 displays supplementar~r information about the current content, including sc~ledule:~, links to other destinations and feedback. A control panel 886 indicates and controls play, pause, volume, and streaming status. A region 890 is dedicated for entering a keyword to perform a search for content using a single click. A region 892 is dedicated for display and management of presets with one set of preseia per end user.
FIG. 38 is a screen shot of the second embodiment in a radio p:Layer rnode. Upon receiving a user-initiated selection of a selE~ction attribute (band, category, or location) in the sE:l.ection area 880, a pick list 894 of available opi~.ions :is populated from a database. To speed in the process, of selecting material, the interface is absenl~ of a submit button. Therefore, as soon as the end usf=_r releases a mouse button over an item in the ~~ick l:i~;t 894, the item is selected.
FIG. 39 is a screen shot of the second embodiment in an events player mode. Radio buttons 896 indicate a current position w:it:hin an event or another time-based selection re:Lative t.o an entire length of time.
Selecting events, :spoken audio, and music is facilitated in the selecvion area 880. Upon selecting a content category (eivher hive events, spoken audio, or music collection), the end user is prompted to select two attributes to narrow or filter the content to list of manageable l~:ngth.
It is noted that embodiments of the graphical user interface can change in a region-dependent manner (e. g.
dependent upon the location of the client apparatus 106). For e:~cample, the FM broadcast spectrum (which differs for c3iffererat regions in the world) can depend upon the loc~~tion of the client apparatus 106. Further, textual information can be displayed in one of a plurality of languages in dependence upon the location of the client apparatus 106.
It is also noted that alternative controls can be provided to ~~ontro:L settings and parameters of the herein-described embodiments of graphical user interfaces. These graphical controls include, but are not limited to, graphical buttons, checkboxes, radio buttons, scr~~ll ba:r~>, slider bars, pop-up menus, and dialog boxes. Further, alternative indicators can be provided to display information in embodiments of the graphical user interfaces.
Other options t=hat can be included in embodiments of the present invention are as follows.
A physical login card can be sent to a new end user after each login creation. The physical login card can allow for advertisements that transcend the content ( a , g . regularly sc:hE:duled programming or collections ) .
Prior to initiating playback or providing a login screen, a tip-of-t:hE:-day can be provided to promote features of the graphical user interface.
An event-of-tlze-day or a feature-of-the-day can be broadcast for display at the second display region 222.
In response i=o a c:Lick operation or another user-initiated aci~ion, other information can be displayed in the second d:LSplay region 222.
A stati~~n-of-ithe-day can be broadcast for display in a manner :similar to the aforementioned feature-of-the-day. A :List of featured stations based on sets rather than :individual stations can be provided (e.g. a famous individual' ;~ favorite stations ) .
A music critics feature allows end users to comment on music and other content to create a collaborative filtering product.
A speci~~l preset such as a mystery preset of the day can be provided in the set of presets. This preset can be the first preset in the set, for example.
Presets can have expiration dates. For example, an events presevt may c=xpire of ter a predetermined expiration date .
An advertising slot machine can be provided. The advertising Mot m<~c:hine can be provided by a JAVA
applet that :rotates attractions as a slot machine in the advertising window 240. The attractions can be rotated randomly. If three like advertisements align, the end user can win a pri:ae .
A separate attractions window can be provided. In this case, t:he end user can click on an image associated with content to retrieve information for the content.
An option to play or not to play the content is provided to the end user. 'The end user can make his/her decision to play or not to ~p7.ay based upon the information.
Alternative content can be transmitted in cases such as a blackout period or when there is a technical difficulty.
FIG. 40 is a flow chart of an embodiment of a method of providing t=he graphical user interface. As indicated by block 9t)0, steps of verifying that necessary components are installed at the client apparatus 106 and offering system choices to an end user are performed. As indicated by block 902, a step of determining if a smart card (physical or virtual) identifying the end user is present at the client apparatus 106.
If the End user is a recognized user (block 904), then a step of entering a password (block 906) or a step of entering a login and a password (block 910) is performed. ThereaftE=_r, a main page of the graphical user interface is provided (block 912). Upon completion of the player, an exit message is communicated (block 914) to the client apparatus.
If the E:nd user is an unrecognized user (block 916), then a step of entering a login and a password (block 920) is performed. Thereafter, a main page of the graphical user interface is provided (block 922).
Upon completion of the player, an exit message is communicated (block.~924) to the client apparatus.
If the end user has previously visited without logging in (block 926), then either a step of creating a login and a ~~assword (block 930) or a step of selecting a visiting mode (blo~~k 932) is performed. If a login and a password are created (block 930), a main page of the graphical. user interface is provided (block 934).
Upon completion of t:he player, an exit message is communicated (block. 936) to the client apparatus.
If the visiting mode was selected (block 932), a main page of the graphical user interface is provided (block 940). Upon completion of the player, a first exit message is conununicated (block 942) to the client apparatus. The first exit message provides options to save or not to save preferences generated during a session of the player. If an option to save the preferences is selected (block 944), steps of creating a login/password profile (block 946) and returning to the 5 main page (block 950) are performed. Thereafter, upon completion of the ;player, a second exit message is communicated to the client apparatus (block 952). If an option to not save the preferences is selected (block 954), a second exit message is communicated to the 10 client apparatus (block 956).
If the end user is a first time user (block 960), then a step of creating a login and a password (block 962) and a step of providing a main page of the graphical user interface (block 964) are performed.
15 Upon completion of the player, an exit message is communicated (block 966) to the client apparatus 106.
If the end user is a first time user who selects a visiting mode (block 970), a main page of the graphical user interface is provided (block 972). Upon completion 20 of the player, a first exit message is communicated (block 974) to the client apparatus. The first exit message provides options to save or not to save preferences generated during a session of the player.
If an option to save the preferences is selected (block 25 976), steps of creating a login/password profile (block 980) and returning to the main page (block 982) are performed. Thereafter, upon completion of the player, a second exit message is communicated to the client apparatus (x~lock 984). If an option to not save the 30 preferences is selected (block 986), a second exit message is communicated to the client apparatus (block 990) .
If an invalid login and/or password is received in any of the above-aiescribed steps of receiving a login 35 and a password, a message is communicated to the client apparatus 10E~. The message can include a message such as "Invalid L~ogin/F~assword" and/or "Please Try Again".
Thereafter, a~. step of receiving another login and password can be performed.
If a blink tea entry field is received, a message is communicated to t:he client apparatus 106. The message can i.nclude~ a message such as "Please fill in all text fields". T:hereafter, a step of receiving subsequent textual data can be performed.
The step of creating a login provides a dialog to query for dez~iograpr~ic and listening preference information from the end user. The end user enters information i.n respo:nse to the queries. Typically, the information i.s entered during an initial use of the player, such as upon an initial arrival at a Web site associated with they player. The initial arrival at the Web site can be initiated by the end user clicking on a banner advertisement or another hyperlink from another Web site.
The information is retrieved for each subsequent visit or use to uniquely identify the end user, and to tailor the graphical- user interface and/or the playback performed thereby t:o the end user. Further, the information ~~llows listening habits, such as radio stations and music tastes, to be tracked.
FIGS. 4:L to 4.3 are block diagrams summarizing a site map for an embodiment of the graphical user interface. ~'he sit:e map illustrates potential user-selectable f7_ow paths between different features of the graphical user interface .
The end user ca.n select between a high bandwidth interface (b:Lock 1010) and a low bandwidth interface (block 1012) for the audio player. For example, the high bandwidi~h interface may include code specific for an animation plug-in., such as Shockwave, whereas the low bandwidth intf~rface may include only HTML code.
Thereafter, a main page of the interface is provided in accordance with the user-selected bandwidth.
From the main page, the end user can navigate to a radio content feature (block 1014), an events content feature (bloclt 1016), a library content feature (block 1020), a music content feature (block 1022), a rating room (or listening booth) feature (block 1024), a preferences feature (block 1026), a features feature l0 (block 1030), a sea:rc:h feature (block 1032), and a contact feature (block 1034).
Using the radio content feature (block 1014), a radio station can be selected (block 1040), station information can be obtained (block 1042), and a radio preset can be selecltE~d (block 1044). Thereafter, a link to related Wele site c:an be provided (block 1050), a list of station programs c:an be provided (block 1052), and station feedb~~ck can be received (block 1054).
Using the event content feature (block 1016), an event can be aelect.ed (block 1060), event information can be obtained (bloc:k 1062), and an event preset can be selected (blo~~k 1064). Thereafter, a link to related Web site can :oe provi.ded (block 1070), an event schedule can be provided (bl~x:k 1072), and event feedback can be received (blo~~k 1074 ) .
Using the library content feature (block 1020), library content can be selected (block 1080), library content infor,:nation c:an be obtained (block 1082 ) , and a library content preset can be selected (block 1084).
Thereafter, a link to related Web site can be provided (block 1090) and co:nt:ent feedback can be received (block 1094).
Using the music content feature (block 1022), music content can be selected (block 1100), music content information can be obtained (block 1102), and a music content present can be selected (block 1104).
Thereafter, ~~ link to related Web site can be provided (block 1110) and content feedback can be received (block 1114).
Using the rat:~ng room feature (block 1024), a welcome mess~~ge and a registration process is provided (block 1120). Once' the end user is registered, an overview of t:he raging room feature can be displayed (block 1130), an album can be selected in dependence upon a user-:>elected genre (block 1132), the album can be rated by t:he end user (block 1134), the information associated with the' album can be displayed (block 1136), and an exit message can be displayed (block 1140) upon exiting the rating room feature. Further, a status of the end user's cumulative rating points can be displayed (block 1142), pointy can be redeemed (block 1144), a list of albums to receive in return for the points can be displayed (bloc)'; 1146), an album from the list can be selected (block 11~i0), and an exit message can be displayed (b?~ock 17_52 ) .
Using the prejEe~rences feature (block 1026), presets can be managesd (block 1160), and a profile can be displayed and edited. (block 1162).
FIG. 44 is a :El.ow chart summarizing steps performed in an embodiment of a method of playing first audio content using a cornputer. As indicated by block 1200, a step of disp:Laying a. graphical radio dial indicating the first audio content= is performed. As described earlier, the graphica:L radio dial can include an alphabetical scale and a c~raphica.l pointer. In this case, the graphical pointer can be positioned with respect to the alphabetic scale based upon text identifying the first audio content. Alternatively, the graphical radio dial can indicate an over-the-air frequency associated with the first audio content. In this case, the graphical radio dial ca.n include a numerical scale and a graphical pointer, wherein th.e graphical pointer is positioned with respect to the numerical scale based upon the over-the-air frequency.
Optionally, the method includes a step of receiving a user-initiated selection of the first audio content from a plurality of ;audio content using the graphical radio dial (a.s indicated by block 1202). The step of receiving the user-initiated selection can include receiving a user-in.it fated action to navigate to the first audio content :from second audio content adjacently indicated by the graphical radio dial.
As described surlier, the graphical radio dial can include a plurality of marks associated with a plurality of audio content having at least one attribute. For broadcasts, the at least one attribute includes at least two of a category attribute, a band attribute, and a location attribute. The band attribute can indicate one of an AM band, an F'M band, and an Internet band for broadcasts. Optionally, a step (block 1204) of receiving a User-initiated selection of a preset associated with the:~at least one attribute is performed.
The plui:ality of marks includes a first mark associated with the first audio content. In this case, the step of receiving the user-initiated selection of the first audio content can comprise steps of receiving the at least one ataribute, determining the plurality of audio content: based upon the at least one attribute, and receiving a user-ir~itiated selection of the first mark.
As indicated by block 1206, a step of receiving data via an Electronic network is performed. The data encodes the first audio content. If the data includes streamed data received via the Internet, the method further comprises t:he step of decoding the streamed data, as indicated by block 1210. As indicated by block 1212, a step of playing the first audio content is performed.
FIG. 45 is a f:Low chart summarizing steps in an 5 embodiment of a method of obtaining user feedback to music content. As indicated by block 1240, a step of receiving a category of music content selected by an end user is performed. Optionally, a step of displaying a plurality of categories of music content is performed 10 (block 1242) prior i~o the step indicated by block 1240.
In this case, the category of music content is selected by the end user from the plurality of categories. As another option, a st:.ep of determining the plurality of categories based upon a listening behavior of the end 15 user is performed. A further option is to have the plurality of categories be dependent upon at least one preference of the end user.
As indicated b:y block 1244, a step of communicating at least a portion of a music item within the category 20 to the end user is performed. The music item is selected within th.e category independent of the end user. If th.e music item includes an album including a plurality of songs, the step of communicating at least a portion of the music item can include communicating 25 limited duration samples of the plurality of songs.
As indicated by block 1246, a step of receiving a rating of th.e music item by the end user is performed.
As indicatecL by block 1250, a step of accounting for the rating of the music item by the end user is performed.
30 The step of accounting for the rating of the music item can include maintaining a count of music items rated by the end user. In this case, the method can further comprise the step of determining if the count attains a threshold. This step is performed to determine if the end user has qualified for a complimentary copy of music.
Optionally, a stap of displaying a list of a plurality of music itesms previously rated by the end user is performed (block 1254). The list can include the music item whose rating was received in block 1246.
Steps of receiving a user-initiated selection of the music item from the list (block 1256), displaying the rating for the music _Ltem (block 1260), and replaying at least a portion of the music item (block 1262) may be performed also.
FIG. 46 is a flow chart summarizing steps in an embodiment of a method of assisting operation of an IS audio content player. As indicated by block 1270, the method includes a step of displaying a plurality of icons including at least one icon associated with user information and at least one icon associated with playlist information. Optionally, the plurality of icons includes at lea:~t one icon associated with privileged access to <~udio content.
As indicated by :block 1272, a step of receiving a user-initiated. selection of a first icon from the plurality of icons is performed. The first icon can be associated with at least one of an actual smart card and a virtual smart card.. The step of receiving the user-initiated selection can include receiving a user-initiated drag' action of the first icon to a portion of a display. Ir., this case, steps of displaying a graphical card slot at the portion of the display (block 1274) and dis~~layingwa graphical card within the graphical card slot i:n response to the user-initiated drag action (x>lock 1.276) can be performed.
As indi~~ated by block 1280, the method includes a step of operating i~h~e audio content player in dependence upon first iizformai~i.on associated with the first icon.
If the first icon .is'. associated with privileged access to audio content, i~r~e step of operating the audio content player can include providing privileged access to audio convent. I:f the first icon is associated with playlist information, the step of operating the audio content play.=_r can include playing at least a portion of a playlist.
Optionally, t:he method further comprises the step of modifying the first information associated with the first icon (atep 1282). In this case, the audio content player is operated in dependence upon modified first information in block: 1280. If the first icon is associated with us~ez- information, the step of modifying the first information can include modifying user identity information, modifying a default for automatic playback, or modifying a payment option. If the first icon is associated vuith playlist information, the step of modifying the first information can include adding an item to a playlist or deleting an item from a playlist.
It is noted that the herein-described methods can performed by a computer (which may be included with the client apparatus 10E~ and/or the server 102). Further, the computer can be directed to perform the herein-described methods by computer-readable data stored by a computer-readable storage medium.
FIG. 47 is a screen shot of a third embodiment of the graphical user :interface. A radio dial 1300 spatially displays the band and location of all available stations that match selected criteria. A
station pick: list 1:302 allows for a user selection of any of the stations from the radio dial 1300. A banner advertising region. 1304 displays banner advertisements that rotate :in accordance with a predetermined schedule.
An attractions reg:ic>n 1306 displays logos and attractions that rotate in accordance with a predetermined schedule. A selection area 1310 provides categorical ;select:ic>n controls and player function controls. A region 1312 displays streamed and clickable text that can inc h.zde attractions and advertisements.
An information space 1314 displays supplementary information ,bout 'the current content, including l0 schedules, links to other destinations and feedback. In general, any visual content can be combined with the audio content for display in the information space 1314.
Preferably, the information space 1314 provides a title of the audio content: being played (e. g. the title "Shepherd of the Nidht Flock" of a song being played by the radio station ~~nIBEZ), a title and an image of an album containing t:he audio content (e. g. the album title "Blue Nance"), a name of an artist associated with the audio content (e.g. the name of the performer of the song: "The Junior :Mince Trio"), and a name and a logo of an entity associated with the audio content (e.g. a copyright notice for Chiaroscuro Records which is the label for the song, and its logo).
A user-initiated selection of the title of either the album or the image of the album can initiate a display of information associated with the album (e. g.
liner notes, performance credits, and other information) and/or a playback o:E audio samples from the album. A
user-initiated selection of the name of the artist can initiate a display of information associated with the artist. A user-initiated selection of either the name of the entity or the entity logo can initiate a display of information associated with the entity (e. g.
information of oth,e:r albums and audio content provided by the entity). Each of the aforementioned information WO 99/27b81 PCT/US98/25092 can be provided either by the server 102 or by hyperlinking to other destinations of the electronic network 100 (e.g. INeb pages for the album, artist, and entity).
It is also preferred that the information space 1314 includes an olot:ion to buy the audio content being played (e.g. the oht:ion "buy now"), an option to display a program guide fo:r the radio station playing the audio content (e. g. the option "program guide" to display information for WB:EI), and an option to provide user feedback (e.g. the option "user feedback").
A control pane:L 1316 indicates and controls play, pause, volume, and streaming status. A region 1320 is dedicated for entering a keyword to perform a search for content using a single click.
A region 1322 :is dedicated for display and management of presets with one set of presets per end user. The region 1:322 provides an option to create a new login, i.e. to create a new end user preferences and profile. Th.e region 1322 further provides an option to load preferences associated with an end user.
FIG. 4~~ is an example of a first display in an embodiment of a listening booth or rating room feature.
The rating zoom feature can be activated in response to receiving a user-initiated selection of the user feedback control 226 or another link thereto. The link can include infornnation indicating an amount of audio items (e. g. music items) to rate and an amount of rating time which are to be satisfied to receive complimentary music. For example, textual information such as "you have 15 days left to rate 6 more CD's in order to choose one free" c~~n be associated with the link.
Preferably, t=h.e link is provided in a main graphical page provided by the player. In this case, if the end user sets his/her browser program to an WO 99!27681 PCT/US98/25092 electronic address associated with the player (e. g.
www.audiosense.corn), the main page is displayed upon initiation of the b=rawser program. Additionally, as the main page do'nnzloads to the end user, the personal 5 profile of the end user created at an initial login is retrieved. The personal profile uniquely identifies the end user as he/she navigates through the player.
The display includes an option 1330 to display rules and regulations for receiving a complimentary 10 item, such as a complimentary music item. The option 1330 can include, for example, textual information indicating a portion of the rules and regulations such as "Rate 10 Cl~s and Choose 1 Free".
The display includes an option 1332 to review which 15 audio items have beE~n previously rated by the end user.
The option 13:32 can include textual information indicating a number of music items previously rated by the end user. For Example, the textual information can include "4 albums rated towards free CD".
20 Alternatively, the option 1332 can include textual information indicating a remaining number of items to rate before rE~ceiving a complimentary item such as a complimentary music item.
The display includes a plurality of options 1334 25 for categorie:~ or gE~nres of music content. For example, the categorie:~ can _i.nclude jazz, classical, alternative rock, country and lat.in. It is noted that other categories of music content may be displayed in addition to or as alte~_nativE~s to the aforementioned categories.
30 The categorie:~ can be dependent upon the personal profile or preferences of the end user collected when the user profile is created. Alternatively, the categories can be dESpendent upon the end user's listening behavior using the player. In this case, the categories are selected to best represent the current listening habits of the end user.
An arti:>t name:, a title, and a cover art image of an item, such as an album, are displayed for each category. Preferax>ly, the end user does not influence which item is. displ.a:yed for the category.
FIG. 49 is an example of a second display for reviewing rat:ed items in a preferred embodiment of a listening boc>th or rating room feature. The second display is provided in response to receiving a user-initiated sel.ectiormof the option 1332 to review which items have been previously rated by the end user. The second display incl.u~des a plurality of item regions.
The number of: item regions corresponds to a total number of items which must: be rated in order to receive a complimentar~~ item. For example, ten item regions corresponding to ten total audio items to rate to receive a complimentary item are illustrated in FIG. 49.
Information a:~sociated with each previously-rated item is displayed i_n a corresponding item region (a representative one indicated by reference numeral 1340).
The information can include an artist, a title, an image such as an a7_bum cover, and a category for the item.
For example, four of the ten item regions have information ~~isplayed to identify four previously-rated items for the end user. Each item region corresponding to a previous ly-raged item includes a user-selectable portion. In response to receiving a user-initiated selection of the portion (such as the album cover), additional informat=ion associated with the item is displayed. ~fhe additional information can include a complete med_La filE: including a complete track list with rating scorer for t:h.e songs rated, promotional information, liner notes, lyrics, and credits.
Remaining one: of the item regions (a representatiz~e one indicated by reference numeral 1342) can be user ~celecte:d to return to the main selection page ( such a~~ in FI:G . 48 ) . Rather than i tem information, the remaining ones of the item regions can have textual information indicating a portion of the rules and rec~ulatic>ns such as "rate 10 CDs choose 1 free". For example, six item regions corresponding to six more music items to be rated before receiving the complimentar~~ item are absent of item information in FIG. 49.
FIG. 50 is an example of a third display for rating an item in an embodiment of a listening booth or rating room feature. The third display is provided in response to receiving a user-initiated selection of one of the options associated with categories of music content.
For purposes of illustration and example, a user-initiated se7_ection of the option associated with the jazz categor~r in FIG. 48 is considered.
The third display includes information associated with the item to be: rated. The information includes the artist (e.g. Earl Fiines), the title (e.g. In New Orleans), the covet- art image, and a label (a. g.
Chiaroscuro) for the item. The cover art image is displayed ovE:r a larger display region than the cover art image in FIG. ~E8.
The third display includes a list of a plurality of tracks from t:he item to be rated. For example, the list can include j=our t~-acks (i.e. songs) from the In New Orleans album. The end user is required to rate each of the tracks in order to obtain credit for rating the album. It is noted that the album may include additional tracks which need not be rated by the end user.
Each track is identified by textual information such as a title 1350 in the list. Also associated with each track is an icon 1352 indicating whether the track has been previously hated by the end user. The icon 1352 includes a que~st:ion mark to indicate that the track is unrated by the e:n~i user. If the track has been previously rated, a:n indication of the rating is displayed in the icon 1352.
The end user se:Lects either a title from the list l0 or its associated icon to commence a rating process for an associated track. In response to receiving a user-initiated selection of a title or an icon, at least a portion of the assoc~_ated track is communicated to the client apparatus 106.. Although an entire portion of the associated track ca:n be communicated, it is preferred that a limited-duration sample of the associated track be communicated. For example, the limited-duration sample can be compri:~ed of a 30-second clip of the associated track.
Preferah~ly, th.e portion of the associated track is communicated to the client apparatus 106 using streaming technology. The cliE~nt apparatus 106, in turn, plays back the portion of i~he associated track for the end user.
A graphical rating tool is displayed either during playback or upon completing playback of the portion of the associated track. The graphical rating tool is used to receive at least one rating for the track. The graphical rating tool can be displayed either in place of the icon 1352 or proximate to the icon 1352.
The third dish>lay includes an option 1354 to buy the item. In. response to receiving a user-initiated selection of the option 1354, the item is tagged for purchase. Further, the item can be placed in a virtual shopping cart. that stores all items tagged for purchase.
Thereafter, a check-out option is provided to finalize the purchase of tagged items. A check-out reminder can be automatically inii~iated if the end user exits from the player while items are tagged for purchase. The check-out reminder can include a visual message or an audible message disp:Layed by the client apparatus 106.
The third display includes an option 1356 to cancel a rating of the current item. In response to receiving a user-initiated selfsction of the option 1356, the user interface returns to the main selection page (such as in FIG. 48) where the end user can select another item to rate.
FIG. 51 is a view of an embodiment of the graphical rating tool. The g~r,~.phical rating tool includes a plurality of rating options 1360. Preferably, each of the rating o~>tions 1:360 has the form of a hot region associated with a rating. For example, the rating options can include: five hot regions for receiving ratings from one to five.
During playback of the track, the end user varies a position of ~i cursor 1362 over the rating options to indicate hisiher dislike or like of the track. For example, the end u:>er may position the cursor 1362 over the hot region for a one-rating during portions of the track he/she dislikes, and may position the cursor 1362 over the hot region for a five-rating during portions of the track he; she likes. Preferably, a display graphic within the hot reg~_on is modified in response to the cursor 1362 being positioned thereon. For example, the display graphic can appear to illuminate (e. g. to light up) in response to the cursor 1362 being position on the hot region.
A plurality of ratings generated over time are recorded by the cl:Lent apparatus 104 and/or the server 102. The time sequence of the plurality of ratings can be formed by repeatE:dly sampling the rating for either equal or unequal time intervals.
When the end user has formulated an overall rating or a score for the item as a whole, he/she points to and 5 clicks on a :particular rating option. An indication of the overall rating is recorded and displayed.
Preferably, the ovei:all rating is displayed within the icon 1352 associated with the track. The title 1350 and the icon 1352 for rated tracks are displayed in a second 10 color which differs from a first color used to display titles and icons for unrated tracks.
FIG. 52 is an example of a modified third display, in an embodiment of a listening booth or rating room feature, once all of the tracks for an item have been 15 rated. The :modified third display includes indications of the overall ratings for the tracks. The third display is modified to include an option 1370 to submit the ratings. Before submitting the rating scores, the end user is provided an opportunity to re-rate any of 20 the tracks by select=ing (e. g. pointing to and clicking on) either its associated title or its rating score icon.
FIG. 53 is an. a_xample of the second display, in an embodiment of a listening booth or rating room feature, 25 updated based upon a submission of ratings for the item.
Information associai~ed with the item is displayed in a corresponding item region 1380. The information can include an artist, a title, an image such as an album cover, and a category for the item. Hence, five of the 30 ten item regions have information displayed to identify five previously-rated items. As described with reference to FIG. 4~, remaining ones of the item regions can be user selected to return to the main selection page. However, th.e category or genre of music 35 associated with th.e item is removed from the main selection pa~~e. ThE' category or genre can be removed until a pred~=termined number of users have provided ratings therefor. For example, the category or genre can be remov~=d until. ratings have been received from at least hundred other end users or more.
Also as described with reference to FIG. 49, a user-initiat~=d selection of the image, such as the album cover, initi~~tes a display of additional information associated with th~~ item. An example of the display of additional informa~ti.on is depicted in FIG. 54.
FIG. 54 is an Example of a fourth display in an embodiment of a li;st:ening booth or rating room feature.
The fourth display is displayed in response to receiving a user-initi~~ted input such as a selection of an album cover image.
The fourth display includes a banner region 1390, a cover art re~~ion 1392, a controls region 1394, and an information region 1396. The banner region 1390 includes a service icon, textual information indicating the category or genre of the item (e.g. "Jazz"), and an option 1400 to return back to the category selection page. The option 1400 can include textual information indicating a number of music items previously rated by the end user. For example, the textual information can include "5 albums rated towards free CD".
Alternatively, the option 1400 can include textual information indicating a remaining number of items to rate before receiving a complimentary item such as a complimentary music item.
The cover art .region 1392 includes information identifying the item. The information includes the artist (e.g. Earl Hines), the title (e.g. In New Orleans), th.e cover art image, and the label (e. g.
Chiaroscuro) for the item. In response to a user-initiated selection of a portion of the cover art region WO 99/27681 PC1'/US98/25092 13 92 ( such a:~ the album cover ) , a larger , higher-resolution image oi_ the cover art is displayed. This allows the end user to print a hard copy of the cover art for the .item.
The inf~~rmation region 1396 is used to display information associated with the item. The information can include <~ track list with rating scores for rated songs, promot=ional information, liner notes, lyrics and credits. Preferably, all of the aforementioned information :is included in a single media file for the item. This allows the end user to print all of the information at oncE~.
The portion of the information displayed in the information :regian 1.396 is controlled by either a scroll bar 1402 or by conl~rols in the control region 1394. The control region 1394 includes a first control 1404 to initiate a display of the track list, a second control 1406 to initiate a display of promotional information, a third control 1410 t:o initiate a display of the liner notes, a fourth control 1412 to initiate a display of the lyrics, ~~nd a :fifth control 1414 to initiate a display of t:he credits. Each of the aforementioned controls in the control region 1394 is used to jump to a targeted portion o:f the single media file. The control region 1394 further includes a sixth control 1410 to initiate a purchase of the item (e. g. the option "Buy CD").
Optionally, the album rating page described with reference to FIG. 50 can include an option to provide additional feedback for the item. The option can have the form of a button or control including text such as "tell us more". In response to a user-initiated selection of the option, a detailed rating criteria interface is provided. An example of this interface is depicted in FIG. 55.
Further,. the category or genre selection interface described with reference to FIG. 48 can include an option to provide a comparative rating for a plurality of items. Tree option can have the form of a button or a control. In response to a user-initiated selection of the option, a comparative ranking interface is provided.
An example oi= this interface is depicted in FIG. 56.
The comparative ranking interface is advantageous in providing record labels additional feedback for albums l0 such as albums than were successful during their initial rating and a=Lbums which receive a marketing push.
FIG. 55 is an example of a fifth display in an embodiment of-_ a li:~tening booth or rating room feature.
The fifth di:~play _Lncludes a plurality of rating criteria. The rating criteria can be encoded by information associated with the track or song. In this way, each track or song can have its own set of rating criteria. Preferably, an entity such as a record label indicates which rai=i.ng criteria are to be provided for one of its songs. The entity can select the rating criteria from a checklist of all potential rating criteria.
For pur~aoses of illustration and example, the fifth display provides a graphical interface 1420 to receive and display ~~ voca:l~; rating, a rhythm rating, a brass rating, and ~~ danc~sability rating from the end user.
Each rating :is entered using an associated up control and/or an as~sociatec~ down control. Each rating can be numerical, such as integers from one to ten. Each rating is displayed both textually and by a graphical bar chart display.
The fifth display further provides an option 1422 to include additional criteria. In response to a user-initiated selection of the option 1422, a list of all potential rating criteria can be displayed. The end user can select a :rating criterion from the list and can enter a rating the:refor .
The fifth display further provides an interface 1424 for ent~=ring user comments. The interface 1424 can include a teact box to allow the end user to enter comments in the foam of a textual message.
To submit the additional feedback, the end user selects an option :L426 provided by the fifth display.
The option 1.426 can include a graphical button having text such as "subm:it: ratings". In response to receiving the user-initiated selection of the option 1426, the additional feedbaclk is recorded by the server 102.
FIG. 56 is an example of a sixth display in an embodiment of a 7.i;st:ening booth or rating room feature.
The sixth display provides a graphical interface to receive a comparative ranking of a plurality of items.
The plurality of items are typically selected by an entity such ~ss a record label, and not by the end user.
The plurality of items may or may not be within a genre or a category of music .
The sixth display includes a plurality of images, such as a plurality of album cover images, associated with the plurality of items. Each image is user-selectable, such as by a point-and-click operation, to initiate playback of: audio samples for its associated item. If available, ratings and comments previously submitted by the e:nd user are also displayed in response to the afore:mentio:ned user selection.
The sixth display further includes a plurality of display locations for comparatively ranking the plurality of items. Each of the plurality of display locations is responsive to a drag-and-drop operation of one of the pluralit~r of images. For example, an end user can click on a first image 1440, drag the first image 1440 to a first display location 1442, and drop the first image 14~4C> at the first display location 1442 to indicate that t:ne item associated with the first image 1440 is his/her favorite from the plurality of items. Similarly, t:he end user can click on a second 5 image 1444, drag tine second image 1444 to a second display location 1446, and drop the second image 1444 at the second display location 1446 to indicate that the item associated with the second image 1444 is his/her next favorit~= from t:he plurality of items. Once the end 10 user has ent~=_red a comparative ranking of the items, the comparative :ranking is submitted to the server 102.
Based upon an_y of the user-generated rating information .and comrrients described herein, the music testing component :L52 in FIG. 1 generates and provides 15 reports including the actual data and/or summaries thereof. Each report can be specific to one or more songs associated w:it:h an entity such as a record company. Th~~ repo:rt: is communicated to the entity to provide rating information and comments for its music 20 items. The :report c:an be stratified by demographics such as gend~=_r, age, occupation, and geographical region of the end u;~ers. Each report can be automatically generated either at periodic or predetermined times, or after a predf=_termined number of end users have rated an 25 item, or upon receiving a request. For example, a report for an item can be automatically generated and communicated to the entity via the electronic network 100 after one hund:red end users have rated the item. As another example, a report for an item can be 30 communicated to an entity in response to a request received from the car~tity via the electronic network 100.
In a particular embodiment, the music testing component 15.2 and the promotions component 156 function as follows. To initiate music testing, a client 35 supplies an ;album tc> be tested (either on CD or another medium), indicates which four tracks are to be tested, identifies a 30-second clip from each track, and provides additional testing information. If desired, this initiation process can be performed on-line via the electronic network 100.
Typically, the client is associated with a promoter of the album such as a record label for the album.
Preferably, the client also supplies additional copies of the album for e:nd users who redeem their credits to obtain the album. The additional copies of the album can be supplied by a fulfillment house indicated by the client. The number of additional copies is based upon a required batch size.
The 30-second clips are digitally encoded for streaming, a:nd made available to the server 102. An entry for the music test is made in a database (herein referred to as MusicTestingBatch). The entry (herein referred to as Batch) includes a Universal Product Code (UPC) for the album, a scheduled start date for testing, either a scheduled end date for testing or a scheduled number of testing days, a required number of responses (batch size), a genre of the album, and descriptive information such as liner notes, credits, and lyrics.
The entry is assigned a unique identification code (herein referred t~o as BatchID). The database includes a client ide:ntific,ation code (herein referred to as ClientID) used for billing and report generation purposes. Optionally, data indicating a total number of songs submitted by the client is updated based upon the entry.
Each entry in MusicTestingBatch is assigned a queue position for its genre. To readily identify which album an end user will rage, a batch queue cache stores an active queue position identifier and an associated BatchID for each genre.
The database includes data (herein referred to as BatchResponse~) that .identifies all of the end users (by their CustomerIDs) that have rated a particular album (using its Ba.tchID). Using this data, a check is performed to ensure that the end user has not previously completed rating of the album identified by the batch queue cache. Alternatively, the check can be performed using data stored in the user profile. In this case, the user profile includes an AlbumID for each album rated by the end user.
If the end user has previously completed rating the album, the queue position is incremented to a subsequent position. The queue position is repeatedly incremented until a previously-unrated album is identified. If all albums in the genre were rated by the end user, a message suggesting that the end user choose another genre is communicated to and displayed by the client apparatus 106.
Once the end user has listened to and scored all of the song samples within the batch, the music testing component 152 registers the response and increments the queue position. To register the response, the music testing component 152 stores the scores in a MusicTestingResponse table and a MusicTestingScore table by CustomerID and BatchID. The Musi.cTestingScore table tracks user ratings by correlating BatchID, SongID, and CustomerID. Optionally, the AlbumID is stored in the user profile to prevent the album from being rated more than once by the end user. If the end user has not scored all of the samples, no information is stored for the end user.
It is noted that separate MusicTestingResponse and MusicTestingScore tables may not be necessary since the difference between these two tables is that MusicTestingScore has an additional entry per song.
In addii:ion to an entry being made in the MusicTestingResponse table, the customer profile of the end user can be modified based upon the test. If the end user is enabled to receive promotions (e.g. by having a preferred customer profile), the music testing component 152 credits his/her account upon completing the rating. If the end user is unable to receive promotions (e. g. b~~ having a lesser status such as basic customer or guest), no credit is provided to the end l0 user's account. 0~>tionally, each credit has an expiration d~~te after which the credit is purged.
Preferably, a promotions-enabled customer profile maintains a number of testing credits (herein referred to as NumMusi.cTesti.ngCredits) and a promotion enable date (herein referred to as PromotionEnableDate). The presence of a. PromotionEnableDate greater than the current date indicates that the end user has already received a promotional item, and will not receive credit for the test. If the PromotionEnableDate is not present (e. g. if the end us~e:r has not received a promotional item) or if the PromotionEnableDate is less than the current date, then the end user is eligible to receive credit for th.e test.. In this case, the number of testing credits is incremented upon performing the test.
Additionally in this case, an entry is made in a promotions da.tabase~ (herein referred to as PromotionRes~~onseAlbumsPresented). The entry includes the BatchID, the Cu.stomerID, and a false value is assigned to a. flag (herein referred to as PromoUsedFlag). Th.e entry indicates that the end user has tested th.e item and that the item can be used for a promotion.
If the a~ccumul.ated number of testing credits for the end user atta.in.s a threshold, a promotional item such as a CD is offered to the end user. The end user is allowed to select the promotional item from a plurality of promotional items having a false PromoUsedFlac~ in the promotions database. It is noted that each promotional item can have a limited duration of availability bared upon its scheduled end date.
The promotion: component 156 receives a response (accept or reject) from the end user. If the end user accepts an it:em, the following steps are perfoxzned. A
flag (herein referx:ed to as SelectedFlag) associated to with the itern is sE~t to true in the promotions database .
Information un the customer profile needed to distribute the item to t:he end user (e. g. a name and a shipping address or an electironic mail address) is forwarded to the fulfillmE~nt house. Using the information, the fulfillment house c:an deliver a physical copy of the item or can delivex- an electronic copy of the item via the electron~.c network 100. The number of testing credits is rE~set to zero. The PromotionEnableDate is set to a date equa7_ to a predetermined time duration beyond the current date. As a result, the end user can continue rating items after the accumulated number of credits has attained the threshold, however, credit accumulation for the end user is inhibited for the predetermined time duration. The PromoUsedFlag is set to true for all entries associated with the CustomerlD
of the end u:~er in PromotionResponseAlbumsPresented.
This step as;~ures that the same albums are not presented to the end u:~er in a subsequent promotion.
If the End user rejects receiving an item (e.g. by not selecting an it:em from a list of available items), the following step: are performed. The number of testing credits is :reset to zero. The PromoUsedFlag is set to true for all entries associated with the CustomerID of the end user in PromotionResponseA.lbumsPresented. As a result, the end 5 user has forfeited. his/her credits, and may not select from these items in a subsequent promotion. However, the PromotionEnableDate is maintained so that the end user's ability to acquire credits is not affected.
After ~~ promotion transaction is completed (either 10 by accepting or rejecting the item), records associated therewith are migrated from the promotions database into an archive database.
Optionally, a. notification message can be occasionally sent to the end user via the electronic 15 network 100 to the end user of his/her credit status.
Once a batch has attained the required number of responses, the end. date for testing is set to the current date, and a batch complete flag is set to a logical true. It is noted that the number of responses 20 can be allowed to s:Lightly exceed the required number of responses in. this case. During nightly processing, the batch response data is summarized and packaged into a report. The report provides demographic data on the respondents and pro~;rides a measure to compare results 25 across albums within a genre for a specific client. The client can ~~e a record label that submitted the test request or a. radio station seeking well-rated music.
The report can include: the BatchID; a report date and time; th.e scheduled start and end times; the actual 30 start and en.d times; the MusicID for the album, the title of the. album.; the first and last name of the primary artist for the album; the SongID, title, artist, and publisher of each tested song from the album; a count of the number of testing responses for the album;
35 a hit index providing a count of responses which rate each song as least!highest; an average music testing score for each song and for the batch; a bar graph showing a percentage of responses at each score; and listener demographics. The report can also indicate a number of promotions that were accepted and a number that were declined,, a promotion completion time, and a comparison o~° respondent ratings of redeemed albums versus non-rE~deemed albums.
Either the report or a notification thereof can be delivered to the c:Lient via the electronic network 100.
For example, the music testing component 152 can initiate than an a:Lectronic mail message be sent to the client after one hundred persons have rated songs from an album. The client, in turn, navigates to a Web site having the report ~~~n a marking language format such as HTML. The c:Lient c:an review the report using a browser program. The' music: testing component 152 generates a bill for pro~riding the testing service for the client.
As an a:Lternal~i.ve to generating a report after receiving a predetermined number of ratings, the report can be generated ai=ter a predetermined time duration.
Once the predetermined time duration has elapsed, the music testing component 143 generates a report summarizing as much information that was gathered. If a client wants to receive ratings within a shortened time period, the cxueue c:an be adjusted to make the album more likely to be presented to an end user than other albums in its genre or category. If desired, the queue can be adjusted to present: the album to all end users which select its gE:nre o~- category.
It is noted that as an alternative to testing a batch of songs from a single album, a batch can comprise songs from a plura:_ity of albums. In this case, it is preferred that the songs in a batch have some relationship with One another. It is also preferred that each song being tested be included in only one batch.
Preferably, tine music genre or category is associated with an entire album. For compilations and other multip:Le-format albums, a multi-genre category can be provided.
The music testing component 152 frequently checks tables in thcs database to ensure that null pointers do not exist. J~or example, a tested album may still reside l0 in the database afi~er its associated audio files have been removed and/or archived.
FIG. 57 is a block diagram summarizing a site map for an embodiment of the listening booth or rating room feature. Thc~ site map identifies functions available to the end user at specific points throughout the graphical interface. Upon entering the rating room feature, a main interface pages is provided (block 1500) wherein a step of checking for installed components is performed.
The main intcsrface page provides a feature to check the status of thES end user (block 1502), a feature to choose an album to rate b~l genre (block 1504}, an optional feature to rc=_shuff:Le: album choices (block 1506 ) , and a feature to display an overview and help information (block 1510).
From the feature to check the status of the end user (block :L502), the end user can choose to fulfill an option to receive a complimentary music item in return for rating a number of items in a time duration (block 1512 ) . A co~zfirmal~i.on message for this option is provided in J~lock :1514.
Further from the feature to check the status of the end user (bl~~ck 151)2), the end user can review previously-r~~ted a:Lbums (block 1516). In this path, a feature to view album information is provided (block 1520). From this :Feature, features to view song titles (block 1522), to view liner notes (block 1524), to review rated songs (block 1526), and to buy a CD (block 1530) are provided.
The feature to choose an album to rate by genre (block 1504) providESS a feature to view album information (block :L532), a feature to choose a song title to rate (block 1534), and a feature to buy a CD
(block 1536). The feature to choose the song title to rate (block 1534) provides a feature to rate a song (block 1540), a feature to view liner notes (block 1542), and a featur<~ to buy a CD (block 1544). The feature to rate the song (block 1540) provides a feature to submit a ratings for the album (block 1546).
FhG. 58 is a block diagram of an embodiment of a content entry subsystem 1600. The content entry subsystem 1600 is described with reference to elements of FIG. 1.
The content entry subsystem 1600 is used to acquire, convert, and/or update content stored by the storage device 116. In general, content is acquired, converted, or updated by either: (i) importing the content from an exaernal source such as the server 144;
or (ii) entering the content using an administrative interface 1602. 'fhe content entry subsystem 1600 addresses these two approaches of maintaining and populating the storage device 116 with content.
The content entry subsystem 1600 includes a content converter 1E~04 to convert the content from a first format associated with the server 144 to a second format associated with the server 102. The content converter 1604 can include c>ne or more rules, and/or one or more filters to convert: data from the server 144 to data which conforms to system requirements for the server 102. Similarly, the administrative interface 1602 performs a si~ep of verifying that manually-entered data conforms to i~he system requirements .
Preferably, the content entry subsystem 1600 periodically importer content data from the server 144.
For example, the content entry subsystem 1600 can be programmed to import content data from the server 144 on a nightly basis. The content data can have the form of l0 a table retrieved j=rom a Web page provided by the server 144. The Web page is updated periodically (e. g.
nightly) for this purpose. The content entry subsystem 1600 retrieves a content data file through HTTP, and stores a cope of the file with delimited field separators. If thES Web page is password protected, the content entr~~r subsystem can automatically provide a password to gain access thereto.
Once retrieved, the content data is converted or otherwise scrubbed to the second format. The content data in the ;second format is stored by a staging database 1605. Preferably, the staging database 1606 substantiall:~r repl:icates the information stored in the server 144.
The content e:nt:ry subsystem 1600 assists in updating the database 148 using the converted data in the staging databa;sE: 1606. In general, the content entry subsystem 1600 updates the database 148 based upon the most recent changes in the staging database 1606.
The content entry subsystem 1600 compares the converted data to existing, acs ive data in the database 148.
Rules are generated to convert the newest data to the active data. Caution is exercised to prevent changes that involve row deletes and key updates. The rules and exceptions can be dynamically generated to interpret changes in the server 144.
*rB
The dif:Eerence between the converted data and the active data is fornnatted to become an entry (update/add/delete) for the staging database 1606. The data is made active upon satisfying an integrity check.
5 Daily changes to the database 1606 are logged. The changes can be summarized in a nightly administrative report gener~ited by the content entry subsystem 1600. A
daily report of the data import process can be communicated by electronic mail or other means to system 10 administratox-s. The logs of updates can be formed using transaction 7_ogs from a database software package such as SQL.
After one or more databases, including the database 148, are updated by the staging database 1606, the data 15 in the staging database 1606 is backed-up by a data backup and recovery system 1610, and purged. The data backup and recovery process 1610 makes available the most recent copy of the staging database 1606.
Manuall~~-entered data received by the 20 administrative interface 1602 can include media location and other information used throughout the system. The media location can be in the form of an electronic address, such as a URL or a Uniform Resource Name (URN), for accessing' the content via the electronic network 25 100. Some ir..formation attributes may be considered optional. Th:e content entry subsystem 1600 accepts a new entry without requiring the optional information attributes. The content entry subsystem 1600 verifies the information attributes. An encoded music file 30 associated with the media location is made available upon verification.
Twa examples of data formats from the server 144 include a broadcast :Format and a content format.
TABLE I shows radio station data extracted from the 35 broadcast format'to generate data in the second format.
TABLE II shows music data extracted from the broadcast format to generate data in the second format. TABLES
III to VII show song data extracted from the Liquid Audio format to generate data in the second format.
The station II) parameter is a code to uniquely identify each radio station. Preferably, the station ID
is not relied upon for identifying the station. The Call Letters parameter provides the call letters identifying the radio station. The Frequency parameter l0 provides the over-t.he-air broadcast frequency of the radio station.. The. Format parameter identifies the format or category o:E content broadcast by the radio station. The City, State, and Country parameters identify the city, state, and country of origin, respectively, of the radio station. The Description parameter provides a description, a monicker, or another identifier of the radio station.
The Station Logo Address parameter includes an electronic address o:E a logo or another image associated with the radio station. Preferably, the logo is stored locally at the server 102 to improve player performance.
The Station WWW Address parameter provides an electronic address such as a URL identifying a Web site for the radio station. The Schedule Address parameter provides an electronic address for a site having a programming schedule for the radio station.
The Audio Stream Pointer Address (LQ) provides an electronic address of a lower-quality audio stream of content broadcast by the radio station. The Audio Stream Address (LQ) provides a file name and electronic address to verify the correct lower-quality audio stream for the station. The Audio Stream Bit Rate (LQ) parameter indicates the bit rate of the lower-quality audio stream.
The Audio Stream Pointer Address {HQ) provides an electronic address of a higher-quality audio stream of content broadcast by the radio station. The Audio Stream Address (HQ) provides a file name and electronic address to verify the correct higher-quality audio stream for the station. The Audio Stream Bit Rate (HQ) parameter indicates the bit rate of the higher-quality audio stream.
The Blackout Period parameter indicates times and/or dates for which content from the radio station is blacked-out ~~r oth~m-wise inhibited from being received via the electronic network 100.
The Album ID ;parameter includes a code to uniquely identify a mvusic item such as an album. Preferably, the AudioNet Album ID :i~c not relied upon to identify the album. The ;album 'ri.tle parameter includes a title of an album or another music item. The Format parameter identifies tlae format of the music item. The Artist Sort Name pa:ramete:r provides a name, used for sorting purposes, of an ari;.i.st associated with the music item.
The Artist N~~me pa:rameter provides a name of the artist to be used for descriptive purposes.
The Album Art Address parameter provides an electronic address of a cover art image associated with the music its=m. Preferably, the cover art image is stored local:Ly by the server 102 to improve player performance. The iWtist WWfnT Address parameter provides an electronic address, such as a UR.L, of a Web site for the artist. The A:Lbum Description parameter provides descriptive :informat.ion for the music item. The Audio Stream Meta l.~'ile Address parameter provides an electronic address,, such as a MetaURL, for providing an audio stream of the music item. The Audio Stream Address parameter provides a file name (such as a .ra or .asf file name) and an electronic address identifying WO 99/276$1 PCT/US98/25092 the audio stream o:f the music item. The Audio Bit Rate parameter in~~.icates the bit rate or encoding bandwidth of the audio stream.
The Label Name parameter identifies a publishing entity for the music item, such as a record company or label. The label Address parameter includes an electronic a<3dress,, such as a URL, for a Web site of the record company or label.
TABLES :III to VII show song data extracted from the content format to generate data in the second format.
The data inc:Ludes sang information, artist information, recording inj~ormation, rights information, watermark information, and miscellaneous information.
TABLE III
Parameter Artists) Son Title Album Title Com oser(Music) Com oser(L rics) Arran er Publisher Genre Language TABLE I:CI illustrates song information parameters extracted from data having the content format. An Artist parameter ide:ntifiea the artist or artists who performed the song. Se~paratE~ parameters may be defined for the "headline" artist, as well as session artists, orchestras, c:onduct:ors, choruses, etc. A Song Title parameter provides a title of a song or like music item.
An Album Title parameter provides a title of an album containing the song. A Composer parameter identifies at least one composer of the song. An additional parameter may identify the writer of the songs lyrics. An Arranger parameter identifies at least one arranger of the song.
The Publisher parameter identifies the publisher of the song. A Genre parameter indicates the genre or category of the song. The Language parameter indicates a language of the lyrics of the song. An ISRC TD parameter includes a 12-digit alphanumeric serial code comprised of a two-letter country code, a three-character author code, a two-digit year code, and a five-digit song identifier.
TABLE V' illustrates recording information parameters extracted from data having the content format. A Format ;parameter indicates an audio or a video format of the song. A Recording Type parameter indicates a recording type of the song. A Publication Date parameter indicates a publication date for the song. A Country of Origin parameter identifies a country of origin for the song. A Playing Time parameter indicates a playing time of the song.
A Recording Studio parameter identifies one or more recording studios 'used to record the song. A Mix Down Studio parameter identifies one or more studios used to mix down the song. A Mastering Studio parameter identifies o:ne or more studios used to master the song.
A Producer parameter identifies one or more producers of the song. An Engineer parameter identifies one or more recording engineers for the song. A
Mastering Engineer parameter identifies one or more 5 mastering engineers for the song. A Remixer parameter identifies any remixers of the song. An ISRC ID
parameter includes a 12-digit alphanumeric serial code comprised of a two-.Letter country code, a three-character author code, a two-digit year code, and a l0 five-digit song identifier.
TABLE v PARAMETER
F~ox:~mat R~ecordin a Publication Date Country of Ori in Pla in Time R~ecordin Studios) M.ix. Down Studios) Ma:>terin Studio ( s ) Producer ( s ) En ineer(s) M<~sterin En ineer(s) Rmixer ( s ) ISRC Code 15 TABLE VI illustrates rights information parameters extracted from dat<~ having the content format. A UPC
Code paramet~=_r inc:Ludes a 20-digit UPC code identifying the album. :Preferably, the UPC is the convention to identify all music titles in a music library from radio WO 99l1768I PCT/US98/25092 station bro~~dcast :>ynchronization signals. A cross-referencing databa~;e can be used to translate between a cart code from a :radio station to a UPC.
TABLE VI
PARAMETER
UPC Code Co ~ ri ht Sound Recordin Co ri ht Performance Ri hts A enc Mechanical Ri hts A enc Record Label Di:>tributors Date Encoded Encoded B
A Copyright parameter provides copyright information for the song. A Sound Recording Copyright parameter provider sound recording copyright information for the song. A 1?erformance Rights Agency identifies a performance rights agency for the song. A Mechanical Rights Agency identifies a mechanical rights agency for the song. ~~ Reco~:d. Label parameter identifies the record labe=L for t:he song. A Distributors parameter identifies one or more distributors of the song.
A Date EncadE~d parameter indicates a date at which the song wa:~ encoded. An Encoded By parameter identifies a party that encoded the song.
TABLE ~JII il:Lustrates watermark information parameters Bind miscellaneous parameters extracted from data having the content format. A Standard Watermark parameter provides a standard digital watermark for identifying a souz-ce of the song. A User-Defined Watermark parameter provides a user-defined digital watermark for the song. A Notes parameter includes notes associated wir_h the song.
TABLE VII
PARAMETER
Standard Watermark U;~er-defined Watermark Notes Referring back to FIG. 1, the audience measuring component 154 monitors and reports listenership l0 information for items played using the player 142.
Preferably, listening activity data is recorded for each instance of an end user playing an audio content item for a duration that attains or exceeds a predetermined listening time threshold. If the duration is less than the predetermined listening time threshold, the listening behavior is not considered significant, and the listening activity data is not recorded.
Preferably, the predetermined listening time threshold is a global system parameter used for all audio content items .
Any of the herein-described audio content items, including but not limited to radio category items, events category items, library category items, and music category items, ca:n be monitored in this way. The data can include an indication of the audio content item, an indication of which end user is playing back the item, a demographic of the end user, a time at which the audio content item is played, and a location of the end user.
Based upon any of the listenership information, the audience measurement component generates and provides reports including actual data and/or summaries thereof.
These reporter can include measurements that are familiar to advertisers, such as Average Quarter Hour, Ctzme, and time spent l.isteni.ng, which are familiar to radio advertisers. Each of these measurements can be derived from data tracked b:y the system. Each report can be specific to one or more radio stations associated with an entity such as a broadcasting company, or to one or more songs a.ssocia.ted with an entity such as a record company, for example. The report is communicated to the entity to provide audience listenership information.
The report can be communicated via the electronic network 100. The report can be stratified by demographics such as gender, age, occupation, and geographical region of the end users. Each report can be automatically generated either at periodic or predetermined times or upon receiving a request therefor.
A particular embodiment of the audience measuring component 154 is as follows. When an end user initially enters the site providing the player 142, an entry is made to a listener :Log database. The listener log database to which the entry is made depends upon which type of audio content item the end user is receiving.
Preferably, the listener log database is selected from a radio log database, a music log database, an events log database, and a library log database. The entry includes an identif:Ler of the end user (e.g. the CustomerID of the end user) and an identifier of the content (e. g. a radio station identifier, an event identifier, an album identifier, and/or a song identifier).
As the end user continues to listen to the content item for a ~~redeterznined time threshold, a subsequent entry is made into the appropriate listener log database. 'this process is repeated so that a new entry is made aftc=r every period having the predetermined time threshold. If the content item has changed, the end time is recorded, a.nd the new entry identifies the new content item. They new content is monitored in the same way as the previous content item. In this way, when the end user leaves the site, only the final seconds of listening (up to a maximum of the predetermined time threshold) are not. tracked. Preferably, a clock (not illustrated; associated with the server 102 is used to reference a:Ll time'-based data for the audience measuring component 154.
The audience measuring component 154 periodically generates reports based upon the listener log databases.
Each report can be' generated daily, weekly, monthly, quarterly, or annually and communicated to a client (e.g. a radio station) via either paper or the electronic networl~; 100 using electronic mail, the World Wide Web, oz- HTML. Each report can be dynamically created rather than stored. Preferably, the report indicates time of day listening habits and numbers of listeners. Demographic data of listeners can also be provided.
The report can include any combination of: (i) a measurement inter~ral or period (e. g. daily, monthly, quarterly, or yearly); (ii) a measurement interval date range; (iii) call letters and band of the radio station;
(iv) a count: of unique listeners; (v) a count of all listeners; I:vi) an average listening time per connection; (vii) an average listening time per unique listener; (viii) a graph interval (e. g. in minutes);
(ix) an average simultaneous users; (x) an average quarterly hour li:>tener metric; and (xi) a cumulative listener metric (c:ume) .
The li:~tener log databases can be maintained by archiving the data, and purging the databases on a daily basis. Preferably, the archived data includes a record of the start: time and end time for each end user based upon a plurality c>f entries in the listener log databases.
Still with reference to FIG. 1, a detailed description of the' advertising component 160 is provided. 'The advertising component 160 maintains a database of advertising records. Each advertising record can include an advertisement type, an electronic address, such as aWURL, for an audible or visible advertisement, cli.e:nt information identifying the advertiser, and information designating a target audience (e. g. based on customer display information, music, and radio s~t~ation genre). Preferably, there are four types of advE:rtisements: a banner advertisement, an attraction advertisement, a feature advertisement, and an audio advertisement.
A plurality c>f banner advertisements from the database are: queued for display with the player 142.
The banner advertisements are successively displayed based on an automated process performed by the advertising component 160. For example, a subsequent banner advertisement in the queue can be displayed every 150 seconds in the banner advertising region 1304 described with reference to FIG. 47.
A plurality of attractions advertisements from the database are queued for display with the player 142.
The attractions advertisements are successively displayed based on. an automated process performed by the advertising component 160. For example, the attractions WO 99l27b81 PCTNS98/25092 advertisements can be displayed in the attractions region 1306 or the. region 1312 described with reference to FIG. 47. Preferably, attractions advertisements are contextuall~r associated with audio content played using the player _L42. For example, an attractions advertisement can promote an upcoming concert or an album signing related to audio content being played using the p7_ayer 7.42. In this way, the advertising component lEiO can provide content-specific advertisements.
A plurality of feature advertisements from the database are selected based upon broadcast signals. The feature advertisements can include static information such as a radio station logo presented continuously while the player 1.42 is playing content from an associated radio ~:tation. The feature advertisements can include dynamic information such as an image of each album being played. Further, the feature advertisements can include a visible advertisement tailored to appear during a broadcast. commercial. The feature advertisements can. be displayed in the information space 1314 descrix>ed wit.h reference to FIG. 47, for example.
The audio advertisements replace advertisements within the f>roadca.st prior to communication to the client apparatus 106. In this way, alternative Internet-based broadcasts and regional-based broadcasts can be generated.
The advertising component 160 can determine an associated subset o:F the advertisements targeted to each end user. Further, the advertising component 160 can determine th.e sequence in which the subset of advertisements are to be presented. Advertisements can be selected for an end user based on any of the following: online and off-line purchasing, demographics, psychographics, geographics, sonagraphics (e. g.
*rB
listening preferences), and listener behavior. In this way, the advertising component 160 can provide user-specific advertiseanents.
The advertisi:nd component 160 tracks viewership and listenership of each of the advertisements in the database. D~~ta is recorded indicative of which end users have seen or heard an advertisement in an active window for at leash a predetermined time duration, and times at whi~~h the advertisement was seen or heard. The l0 data can further track which end users click through or otherwise s elect e<~ch advertisement to get additional information, and track the contemporaneous activity of the end user: .
The advertising component 160 generates reports based upon the tracking data. The reports correlate end user demographics with metrics of the viewing and listening dal~a. Client advertising billing reports can also be generated based upon the tracking data.
It is noted that some of the advertising images and audio files can be cached to the storage device 132 of the client apparatus 106 to improve system performance.
Audio files can be pre-queued and pre-buffered for streaming at the client apparatus 106. Either in-band signaling or out-of-band signaling can be used to trigger the :images and audio files. An example of in-band signaling includes a tone encoded within an audio data stream 1.o identify and trigger content insertion.
An example oi_ out-of-band signaling includes data streamed with the audio data stream.
It is a:Lso noised that to improve system performance, the server 102 can provide the client apparatus l0fi with content, in addition to the active content, based on a nearest subset of content selections on the graph__cal radio dial, presets, or favorites based on the end user's listening behavior. The additional content can be prey-.buffered by the client apparatus 106.
The hex-ein-dEascribed components of the server 102 can interact. with the player 133 (and optionally player 142) to provide pe:r~sonalized content to each of a plurality of end users of client apparatuses 104 and 106. Personalized. content can be provided to a first user by: (i} comm.unicating from the server 144 first audio content associated with a broadcast to a first user location 106, together with control data with information relating to the content, the broadcaster, the user or other attributes such as location of the user, examples of which are set out below; (ii) selecting (at the server 102) second content based upon a first user profile (preferably located at the server 102); and (iii) communicating a first signal to the first user location.
The first signal to the first user location comes from a server such as server 102 or 144, and the player (player 142 and player 133 in combination) causes switching of content; from a first server 102 to a second server 144 or from t:he server 144 to another server (not shown), from which t:he inserted advertisement or other material is ~3erive~d..
The switching of content can take place at the player 133 or at t:he player 142. In the former case, upon detection of the relevent code, the player 133 can cause the additional content to be inserted from either a local storage device 132 or from the additional content server (not shown in FIG 1).
Upon registration of the client with the server 102 the server will pr~e7.oad a queue of advertisments or other content items into the storage device or will preload addresses or. URLs for those content items into the storage ~~evice 1.32. Thereafter, as the client 106 receives content j_rom the server 144 and as it identifies an insertion point from the associated data, instead of presenting any content that it receives from server 144 at that. insertion point, the client will present one of the: preloaded advertisements or other content iterns from its storage device 132.
These advertisements can be of appropriate length in the case of audio advertisements such that an insertion point that indicates an opportunity for (for example) a twenty or thirty second sound advertisement can cause such an advertisement to be retrieved from the storage device 132. Alternatively, these insertion points can indicate addresses or URLs which cause the client 106 t:o turn to another server (not shown) to find 15 a content item to be inserted at that point, and that other server will decide what that content should be.
Another example of an insertion item could be a complete song from a local artist, and the insertion point indicates that this should be the item inserted, whereupon the client refers to the local server and the server delivers whatever is the selected local song for the selected local artist.
Instead of using insertion points identifiable in the data stream from the primary content server 144, the server 102 can prow.ide the client 106 with a schedule of insertion times anal the client 106 can maintain a real time clock a.nd at the designated insertion times it will turn to its next insertion item for insertion into the content being received from server 144.
It is preferred, in the case of streaming audio, that data is interleaved into the audio indicating such information as to the artist or song currently being played. This inter:Leaved data can be used by the client 106 as the trigger for causing a replacement of the data being received from server 144. For example an entire song could be rep~~Laced. Alternatively, that data could have a separate logical connection rather than being interleaved into t:he audio.
Of part=icular interest are cases in which the first audio content and the first signal are communicated via an electronic network including at least one of the Internet, an intranet, and an extranet. The first signal synchronizes playback of the second content with respect to playback of the first audio content.
The second content can include a first at least one image selected in dependence upon the first user profile 150. In this case, the first signal is to synchronize display of t:he first at least one image to playback of the first audio content. The first at least one image can be selected further in dependence upon content within the first audio content. Of particular interest are cases in which. the first image is a content-specific image and/or a broadcaster-specific image.
Personalized visual content can be provided to a second user 104 by communicating the first audio content associated with th.e broadcast (from server 144) to a second user location 104, selecting a second at least one image based upon second user profile stored in customer profile 150, and communicating a second signal to the second user :Location (e.g. from server 102 or from another server not shown). The second signal synchronizes display of the second at least one image to playback of the first audio content. The second at least one image can differ from the first at least one image .
The second content can include second audio content selected in dependence upon the first user profile. In this case, the first signal is to synchronize playback of the second audio content with respect to playback of the first audio content. The second audio content can WO 99/27681 PCTlUS98/25092 be synchronized for insertion within the first audio content. Of particular interest are cases in which the second content includes at least one of advertising content and programrning content.
Personalized audible content can be provided to the second user by communicating the first audio content associated with the broadcast to the second user location, selecting third audio content based upon the second user :profile, and communicating a second signal to the second user profile, and communicating a second signal to the second user location to synchronize playback of the third audio content with respect to playback of the first audio content. To personalize the content, the third audio content can differ from the second audio content:. The third audio content can be synchronized for insertion within the first audio content.
Each user profile is updated by monitoring information ~~ssociat:ed with user-specific, apparatus independent ,ise of a plurality of audio content player apparatus vi~~ the electronic network. For example, the user profile for a user can be based upon his/her use at both the clip=_nt apparatus 106 and the client apparatus 104. Each u;~er profile can include transaction information, demographic information, psychographic information, geographic information, sonagraphic information, and listening behavior information for its associated u:~er.
Thus, there ha:, been described herein several embodiments :includ:ing preferred embodiments of audio content playcsr methods, systems, and articles of manufacture.
Embodiments o:f the present invention can provide an Internet-based dig:it.al audio service that combines an easy-to-use, customizable audio player interface with a WO 99/2'7681 PCT/US98/25092 wide variety of audio content. Users are able to access audio-on-demand through an archive of music and spoken word titles, and are able to tune to live radio broadcasts f=rom around the world. Further, content information is integrated with content distribution. In this way, an end user can obtain information about content to which he/she is listening. Additionally, the end user is provided a means for purchasing the content, such as music content, to which he/she is listening.
User preferences and behavior are tracked to generate information of interest for each user. This information can relate to his/her music taste, geographical location, and/or other personalized criteria. The information can also be used by radio stations ancL record labels to determine which music is worth playing.
Embodiments of the player advantageously support browsing of audio content on the Internet using two metaphors: (i) a radio station metaphor and (ii) a record store listening booth metaphor.
Additional features include: concurrent display of visual information based on material broadcast by a radio station; paging of the end user for scheduled events; an interactive schedule for radio programming;
listing available stations for a day; and a map to show a location of origin of a radio station.
It is noted that as an alternative or in addition to providing audio content, the herein-described methods and systems can be used to provide video content.
It will be apparent to those skilled in the art that the disclosed P~nbodiments may be modified in numerous ways and :may assume many forms other than the preferred form specifically set out and described above.
Accordingly, it is intended that the appended claims cover a1T such modifications which fall within the true spirit and scope of the invention.
GThat i~; claimed is
Claims (10)
1. A method of operation for a server that interacts with a plurality of client apparatuses to provide personalized content to each client apparatus, the method characterized by the steps of:
communicating a broadcast stream of media content, including a first media content and control data associated with the first media content from the server to a particular client apparatus of the plurality of client apparatuses, wherein the control data indicates at least one insertion point of the first media content;
retrieving a user profile associated with the particular client apparatus;
selecting a second media content based on the user profile; and communicating the second media content and a control signal associated with the second media content from the server to the particular client apparatus, wherein the control signal instructs the particular client apparatus to insert the second media content at the at least one insertion point of the first media content.
communicating a broadcast stream of media content, including a first media content and control data associated with the first media content from the server to a particular client apparatus of the plurality of client apparatuses, wherein the control data indicates at least one insertion point of the first media content;
retrieving a user profile associated with the particular client apparatus;
selecting a second media content based on the user profile; and communicating the second media content and a control signal associated with the second media content from the server to the particular client apparatus, wherein the control signal instructs the particular client apparatus to insert the second media content at the at least one insertion point of the first media content.
2. The method of claim 1, wherein the broadcast stream of media content is communicated via wireless communication to at least one wireless receiver and via wireline communication to the particular client apparatus.
3. The method of claim 2, wherein the at least one wireless receiver and the particular client apparatus receive the first media content, but only the particular client apparatus may receive the second media content.
4. The method of claim 1, further characterized by the step of retrieving the user profile from a second server separate from the server.
5. The method of claim 1, further characterized by the step of retrieving the second media content from a second server separate from the server.
6. The method of claim 1, further characterized by the step of storing at least one of the second media content and an address of the second media content in a queue of the particular client apparatus.
7. The method of claim 6, further characterized by the steps of:
detecting the at least one insertion point based on the control signal; and in response to detecting the at least one insertion point, presenting the second media content at the particular client apparatus instead of any content of the first media content at the at least one insertion point.
detecting the at least one insertion point based on the control signal; and in response to detecting the at least one insertion point, presenting the second media content at the particular client apparatus instead of any content of the first media content at the at least one insertion point.
8. The method of claim 1, wherein the first media content includes at least one of an audio content, an image content, and a video content.
9. The method of claim 1, wherein the control signal synchronizes playback of the second media content with playback of the first media content.
10. A method of operation for a server that interacts with a plurality of client apparatuses to provide personalized content to each client apparatus, the method characterized by the steps of:
communicating a broadcast stream of media content, including a first media content and control data associated with the first media content from the server to a particular client apparatus of the plurality of client apparatuses, wherein the control data indicates a schedule of insertion times;
retrieving a user profile associated with the particular client apparatus;
selecting a second media content based on the user profile; and communicating the second media content from the server to the particular client apparatus, wherein the particular client apparatus maintains a time clock to determine when to insert the second media content into the first media content based on the control data.
communicating a broadcast stream of media content, including a first media content and control data associated with the first media content from the server to a particular client apparatus of the plurality of client apparatuses, wherein the control data indicates a schedule of insertion times;
retrieving a user profile associated with the particular client apparatus;
selecting a second media content based on the user profile; and communicating the second media content from the server to the particular client apparatus, wherein the particular client apparatus maintains a time clock to determine when to insert the second media content into the first media content based on the control data.
Applications Claiming Priority (3)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
US97697197A | 1997-11-25 | 1997-11-25 | |
US08/976,971 | 1997-11-25 | ||
PCT/US1998/025092 WO1999027681A2 (en) | 1997-11-25 | 1998-11-24 | Audio content player methods, systems, and articles of manufacture |
Publications (2)
Publication Number | Publication Date |
---|---|
CA2278196A1 CA2278196A1 (en) | 1999-06-03 |
CA2278196C true CA2278196C (en) | 2005-11-15 |
Family
ID=25524685
Family Applications (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
CA002278196A Expired - Fee Related CA2278196C (en) | 1997-11-25 | 1998-11-24 | Audio content player methods, systems, and articles of manufacture |
Country Status (6)
Country | Link |
---|---|
US (1) | US6587127B1 (en) |
EP (1) | EP0962074B1 (en) |
AU (1) | AU1702199A (en) |
CA (1) | CA2278196C (en) |
ES (1) | ES2397501T3 (en) |
WO (1) | WO1999027681A2 (en) |
Families Citing this family (591)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US8352400B2 (en) | 1991-12-23 | 2013-01-08 | Hoffberg Steven M | Adaptive pattern recognition based controller apparatus and method and human-factored interface therefore |
US6769128B1 (en) | 1995-06-07 | 2004-07-27 | United Video Properties, Inc. | Electronic television program guide schedule system and method with data feed access |
US7562392B1 (en) * | 1999-05-19 | 2009-07-14 | Digimarc Corporation | Methods of interacting with audio and ambient music |
US6469753B1 (en) | 1996-05-03 | 2002-10-22 | Starsight Telecast, Inc. | Information system |
US20130203485A1 (en) | 2000-05-31 | 2013-08-08 | Igt | Method and apparatus for conducting focus groups using networked gaming devices |
US9113122B2 (en) | 1997-04-21 | 2015-08-18 | Rovi Guides, Inc. | Method and apparatus for time-shifting video and text in a text-enhanced television program |
BRPI9812104B1 (en) | 1997-07-21 | 2016-12-27 | Guide E Inc | method for navigating an interactive program guide |
US20020002039A1 (en) | 1998-06-12 | 2002-01-03 | Safi Qureshey | Network-enabled audio device |
US6205448B1 (en) * | 1998-01-30 | 2001-03-20 | 3Com Corporation | Method and apparatus of synchronizing two computer systems supporting multiple synchronization techniques |
US20010029582A1 (en) * | 1999-05-17 | 2001-10-11 | Goodman Daniel Isaac | Method and system for copy protection of data content |
US6298446B1 (en) | 1998-06-14 | 2001-10-02 | Alchemedia Ltd. | Method and system for copyright protection of digital images transmitted over networks |
US6826554B2 (en) * | 1998-06-29 | 2004-11-30 | Fujitsu Limited | System and method for adaptively configuring a shopping display in response to a recognized customer profile |
CN1867068A (en) | 1998-07-14 | 2006-11-22 | 联合视频制品公司 | Client-server based interactive television program guide system with remote server recording |
US6141010A (en) * | 1998-07-17 | 2000-10-31 | B. E. Technology, Llc | Computer interface method and apparatus with targeted advertising |
US7197570B2 (en) * | 1998-07-22 | 2007-03-27 | Appstream Inc. | System and method to send predicted application streamlets to a client device |
US6311221B1 (en) * | 1998-07-22 | 2001-10-30 | Appstream Inc. | Streaming modules |
US6898762B2 (en) | 1998-08-21 | 2005-05-24 | United Video Properties, Inc. | Client-server electronic program guide |
US6317722B1 (en) | 1998-09-18 | 2001-11-13 | Amazon.Com, Inc. | Use of electronic shopping carts to generate personal recommendations |
WO2000022551A1 (en) * | 1998-10-13 | 2000-04-20 | Chris Cheah | Method and system for controlled distribution of information over a network |
US6452609B1 (en) * | 1998-11-06 | 2002-09-17 | Supertuner.Com | Web application for accessing media streams |
US6859799B1 (en) | 1998-11-30 | 2005-02-22 | Gemstar Development Corporation | Search engine for video and graphics |
US8266266B2 (en) | 1998-12-08 | 2012-09-11 | Nomadix, Inc. | Systems and methods for providing dynamic network authorization, authentication and accounting |
JP4195746B2 (en) * | 1998-12-11 | 2008-12-10 | インターナショナル・ビジネス・マシーンズ・コーポレーション | Data billing system, content generation apparatus, data billing device and method |
JP3486125B2 (en) * | 1999-01-14 | 2004-01-13 | 富士通株式会社 | Network device control system and device |
US7966078B2 (en) | 1999-02-01 | 2011-06-21 | Steven Hoffberg | Network media appliance system and method |
US7490053B1 (en) * | 1999-02-10 | 2009-02-10 | The Surfer Network | System for modifying and targeting advertising content of internet radio broadcasts |
US6249810B1 (en) * | 1999-02-19 | 2001-06-19 | Chaincast, Inc. | Method and system for implementing an internet radio device for receiving and/or transmitting media information |
US7610607B1 (en) | 1999-02-19 | 2009-10-27 | Chaincast Networks, Inc. | Chaincast method and system for broadcasting information to multiple systems within the internet |
US6901604B1 (en) | 1999-02-19 | 2005-05-31 | Chaincast, Inc. | Method and system for ensuring continuous data flow between re-transmitters within a chaincast communication system |
US6538665B2 (en) * | 1999-04-15 | 2003-03-25 | Apple Computer, Inc. | User interface for presenting media information |
AU4481600A (en) * | 1999-04-22 | 2000-11-10 | Qode.Com, Inc. | System and method for providing electronic information upon receipt of a scannedbar code |
US7565294B2 (en) * | 1999-05-19 | 2009-07-21 | Digimarc Corporation | Methods and systems employing digital content |
US7224790B1 (en) * | 1999-05-27 | 2007-05-29 | Sbc Technology Resources, Inc. | Method to identify and categorize customer's goals and behaviors within a customer service center environment |
US7086007B1 (en) * | 1999-05-27 | 2006-08-01 | Sbc Technology Resources, Inc. | Method for integrating user models to interface design |
US6920479B2 (en) * | 1999-06-16 | 2005-07-19 | Im Networks, Inc. | Internet radio receiver with linear tuning interface |
US6519564B1 (en) * | 1999-07-01 | 2003-02-11 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Content-driven speech-or audio-browser |
US7113918B1 (en) * | 1999-08-01 | 2006-09-26 | Electric Planet, Inc. | Method for video enabled electronic commerce |
US7324953B1 (en) * | 1999-08-13 | 2008-01-29 | Danny Murphy | Demographic information database processor |
US7072863B1 (en) | 1999-09-08 | 2006-07-04 | C4Cast.Com, Inc. | Forecasting using interpolation modeling |
US7178107B2 (en) * | 1999-09-16 | 2007-02-13 | Sharp Laboratories Of America, Inc. | Audiovisual information management system with identification prescriptions |
US9451310B2 (en) | 1999-09-21 | 2016-09-20 | Quantum Stream Inc. | Content distribution system and method |
WO2001025948A1 (en) * | 1999-10-05 | 2001-04-12 | Zapmedia, Inc. | System and method for distributing media assets to user devices and managing user rights of the media assets |
US7020704B1 (en) | 1999-10-05 | 2006-03-28 | Lipscomb Kenneth O | System and method for distributing media assets to user devices via a portal synchronized by said user devices |
US8145776B1 (en) * | 1999-10-15 | 2012-03-27 | Sony Corporation | Service providing apparatus and method, and information processing apparatus and method as well as program storage medium |
WO2001031861A1 (en) * | 1999-10-22 | 2001-05-03 | Nomadix, Inc. | Systems and methods for dynamic bandwidth management on a per subscriber basis in a communications network |
EP2448155A3 (en) | 1999-11-10 | 2014-05-07 | Pandora Media, Inc. | Internet radio and broadcast method |
JP4478263B2 (en) * | 1999-11-12 | 2010-06-09 | ソニー株式会社 | Information processing apparatus and method, and program storage medium |
US20040098449A1 (en) * | 2000-01-20 | 2004-05-20 | Shai Bar-Lavi | System and method for disseminating information over a communication network according to predefined consumer profiles |
JP2001202338A (en) * | 2000-01-20 | 2001-07-27 | Sony Corp | System and method for providing contents, device and method for monitoring contents providing condition and device and method for using contents |
US6389467B1 (en) | 2000-01-24 | 2002-05-14 | Friskit, Inc. | Streaming media search and continuous playback system of media resources located by multiple network addresses |
KR20010077968A (en) * | 2000-01-26 | 2001-08-20 | 한기형 | System and method of advertisement on internet |
JP2001209586A (en) * | 2000-01-26 | 2001-08-03 | Toshiba Corp | Unit and method of controlling contents for computer |
JP2001290490A (en) * | 2000-01-31 | 2001-10-19 | Casio Comput Co Ltd | Graphic data generating and editing system, digital audio player, graphic data generating and editing method and recording medium |
US20020047856A1 (en) * | 2000-02-07 | 2002-04-25 | Baker Ronald K. | Web based stacked images |
US6956833B1 (en) * | 2000-02-08 | 2005-10-18 | Sony Corporation | Method, system and devices for wireless data storage on a server and data retrieval |
US6651086B1 (en) * | 2000-02-22 | 2003-11-18 | Yahoo! Inc. | Systems and methods for matching participants to a conversation |
CN100334583C (en) * | 2000-02-28 | 2007-08-29 | 360度网络股份有限公司 | Smart card enabled mobile personal computing environment system |
US7788339B1 (en) * | 2000-03-02 | 2010-08-31 | Qwest Communications International Inc. | System and method for automated download of multimedia files |
US7856485B2 (en) * | 2000-03-08 | 2010-12-21 | Music Choice | Systems and methods for providing customized media channels |
US7076561B1 (en) | 2000-03-08 | 2006-07-11 | Music Choice | Personalized audio system and method |
US7028082B1 (en) * | 2001-03-08 | 2006-04-11 | Music Choice | Personalized audio system and method |
US8463780B1 (en) | 2000-03-08 | 2013-06-11 | Music Choice | System and method for providing a personalized media service |
US7320025B1 (en) | 2002-03-18 | 2008-01-15 | Music Choice | Systems and methods for providing a broadcast entertainment service and an on-demand entertainment service |
US7325043B1 (en) * | 2000-03-08 | 2008-01-29 | Music Choice | System and method for providing a personalized media service |
US7275256B1 (en) | 2001-08-28 | 2007-09-25 | Music Choice | System and method for providing an interactive, visual complement to an audio program |
US7783722B1 (en) | 2000-03-08 | 2010-08-24 | Music Choice | Personalized audio system and method |
US7624172B1 (en) * | 2000-03-17 | 2009-11-24 | Aol Llc | State change alerts mechanism |
US9736209B2 (en) | 2000-03-17 | 2017-08-15 | Facebook, Inc. | State change alerts mechanism |
US7187947B1 (en) | 2000-03-28 | 2007-03-06 | Affinity Labs, Llc | System and method for communicating selected information to an electronic device |
JP2001282803A (en) * | 2000-03-28 | 2001-10-12 | Pioneer Electronic Corp | Audio-visual information processing system and recorded machine readable medium for audio-visual data processing program |
US7398312B1 (en) * | 2000-03-29 | 2008-07-08 | Lucent Technologies Inc. | Method and system for caching streaming multimedia on the internet |
US7031931B1 (en) * | 2000-03-30 | 2006-04-18 | Nokia Corporation | Portable device attached to a media player for rating audio/video contents |
AU5005601A (en) | 2000-03-31 | 2001-10-15 | United Video Properties Inc | Systems and methods for reducing cut-offs in program recording |
WO2001076248A2 (en) | 2000-03-31 | 2001-10-11 | United Video Properties, Inc. | Systems and methods for improved audience measuring |
US7213048B1 (en) * | 2000-04-05 | 2007-05-01 | Microsoft Corporation | Context aware computing devices and methods |
US7228341B2 (en) * | 2000-04-07 | 2007-06-05 | Giacalone Jr Louis D | Method and system for electronically distributing, displaying and controlling advertising and other communicative media |
US20020032019A1 (en) * | 2000-04-24 | 2002-03-14 | Marks Michael B. | Method for assembly of unique playlists |
US20010032028A1 (en) * | 2000-04-27 | 2001-10-18 | Volpe Anthony S. | Virtual disc jockey |
JP2001312496A (en) | 2000-05-01 | 2001-11-09 | Sony Corp | Method and system for providing information |
US7162482B1 (en) | 2000-05-03 | 2007-01-09 | Musicmatch, Inc. | Information retrieval engine |
US8352331B2 (en) | 2000-05-03 | 2013-01-08 | Yahoo! Inc. | Relationship discovery engine |
US6670971B1 (en) * | 2000-05-11 | 2003-12-30 | Onder Uzel | Internet television system and method with user selectable genres and schedule |
US7668936B1 (en) | 2000-05-26 | 2010-02-23 | Krikorian Thomas M | Continuous media playback system controlled over a distributed communication system |
US7424446B2 (en) * | 2000-05-26 | 2008-09-09 | Comverse Network System, Ltd. | Apparatus and method for storing predetermined multimedia information |
US8028314B1 (en) | 2000-05-26 | 2011-09-27 | Sharp Laboratories Of America, Inc. | Audiovisual information management system |
AU2001268320A1 (en) * | 2000-06-12 | 2001-12-24 | Cachestream Corporation | Personalized content management |
US7028268B1 (en) * | 2000-06-15 | 2006-04-11 | Conley Jr Ralph F | Multiple destination banners |
JP3556884B2 (en) * | 2000-06-16 | 2004-08-25 | イー・エー・ユー株式会社 | Request music broadcasting system using information system |
US20020059099A1 (en) * | 2000-06-26 | 2002-05-16 | Coletta Craig J. | Method and apparatus for collecting on-line consumer data and streaming advertisements in response to sweepstakes participation |
USRE47053E1 (en) | 2000-06-30 | 2018-09-18 | Benhov Gmbh, Llc | Method and system for subscriber-based audio service over a communication network |
US7206775B2 (en) * | 2000-07-06 | 2007-04-17 | Microsoft Corporation | System and methods for the automatic transmission of new, high affinity media |
US20020070978A1 (en) * | 2000-07-13 | 2002-06-13 | Clayton Wishoff | Dynamically configurable graphical user environment |
US20040068536A1 (en) * | 2000-07-14 | 2004-04-08 | Demers Timothy B. | Multimedia player and browser system |
US20020013947A1 (en) * | 2000-07-26 | 2002-01-31 | Russell Stephen Grant | Provision of broadcast network services |
US20020013784A1 (en) * | 2000-07-31 | 2002-01-31 | Swanson Raymond H. | Audio data transmission system and method of operation thereof |
EP1180862A1 (en) * | 2000-08-18 | 2002-02-20 | Sony International (Europe) GmbH | Broadcast receiver that is turned on automatically in accordance with a schedule of a transmitted service |
US20020165781A1 (en) * | 2000-10-31 | 2002-11-07 | Mckay Brent | Interactive media management system and method for network applications |
US8543456B2 (en) * | 2003-12-15 | 2013-09-24 | Ip Mining Corporation | Media targeting system and method |
US20050195173A1 (en) * | 2001-08-30 | 2005-09-08 | Mckay Brent | User Interface for Large-Format Interactive Display Systems |
US20060122886A1 (en) * | 2003-12-15 | 2006-06-08 | Mckay Brent | Media targeting system and method |
US20050166220A1 (en) * | 2001-08-30 | 2005-07-28 | Mckay Brent | Visual Network Appliance System |
US20020059440A1 (en) * | 2000-09-06 | 2002-05-16 | Hudson Michael D. | Client-side last-element cache network architecture |
US7840691B1 (en) | 2000-09-07 | 2010-11-23 | Zamora Radio, Llc | Personal broadcast server system for providing a customized broadcast |
US7058694B1 (en) * | 2000-09-07 | 2006-06-06 | Clix Network, Inc. | Method for comparing two trinary logic representations in the process of customizing radio broadcasting |
US8020183B2 (en) | 2000-09-14 | 2011-09-13 | Sharp Laboratories Of America, Inc. | Audiovisual management system |
US7051315B2 (en) | 2000-09-26 | 2006-05-23 | Appstream, Inc. | Network streaming of multi-application program code |
DE10047902A1 (en) * | 2000-09-27 | 2002-04-25 | Siemens Ag | Procedure for the transmission of a personalized radio program |
JP2002108350A (en) * | 2000-09-28 | 2002-04-10 | Internatl Business Mach Corp <Ibm> | Method and system for music distribution |
US7103906B1 (en) | 2000-09-29 | 2006-09-05 | International Business Machines Corporation | User controlled multi-device media-on-demand system |
US20020042754A1 (en) | 2000-10-10 | 2002-04-11 | Del Beccaro David J. | System and method for receiving broadcast audio/video works and for enabling a consumer to purchase the received audio/video works |
AU2002211570A1 (en) | 2000-10-11 | 2002-04-22 | United Video Properties, Inc. | Systems and methods for caching data in media-on-demand systems |
JP2002189870A (en) * | 2000-10-11 | 2002-07-05 | E Magazines Kk | System for issuing mail magazine for distributing music information |
KR20190096450A (en) | 2000-10-11 | 2019-08-19 | 로비 가이드스, 인크. | Systems and methods for delivering media content |
US7277765B1 (en) | 2000-10-12 | 2007-10-02 | Bose Corporation | Interactive sound reproducing |
JP4378590B2 (en) * | 2000-10-12 | 2009-12-09 | ソニー株式会社 | Information processing apparatus, information processing method, and program storage medium |
US20060230357A1 (en) * | 2000-10-13 | 2006-10-12 | Cher Esque | Software and Method for Internally Organizing Marketing Tasks and Related Information Within a Business Entity |
US8122236B2 (en) | 2001-10-24 | 2012-02-21 | Aol Inc. | Method of disseminating advertisements using an embedded media player page |
DE60137454D1 (en) | 2000-10-24 | 2009-03-05 | Aol Llc | METHOD OF MEASURING THE SIDE OF AN EMBEDDED MEDIA PLAYING DEVICE |
US7667669B2 (en) * | 2000-10-27 | 2010-02-23 | Audiovox Corporation | Vehicle display device having a wireless transmitter |
US20070091015A1 (en) * | 2000-10-27 | 2007-04-26 | Lavelle Patrick M | Vehicle seat entertainment system incorporating a databus |
US7679578B2 (en) * | 2003-05-15 | 2010-03-16 | Audiovox Corporation | Headrest mountable video system |
US7839355B2 (en) * | 2000-10-27 | 2010-11-23 | Audiovox Corporation | Vehicle display device having a wireless transmitter |
US8271333B1 (en) * | 2000-11-02 | 2012-09-18 | Yahoo! Inc. | Content-related wallpaper |
JP2002150140A (en) * | 2000-11-15 | 2002-05-24 | Nec Corp | Voice banner advertising system and voice banner advertising method |
AU2001238104A1 (en) * | 2000-11-17 | 2002-05-27 | Wheretheheckisit.Com, Llp | Virtual directory |
US20020103920A1 (en) * | 2000-11-21 | 2002-08-01 | Berkun Ken Alan | Interpretive stream metadata extraction |
JP2002164857A (en) * | 2000-11-24 | 2002-06-07 | Nec Corp | Information distribution system |
JP4218345B2 (en) * | 2000-12-06 | 2009-02-04 | ソニー株式会社 | Information processing apparatus, information processing method, and recording medium |
US20020072982A1 (en) * | 2000-12-12 | 2002-06-13 | Shazam Entertainment Ltd. | Method and system for interacting with a user in an experiential environment |
US7099834B2 (en) * | 2000-12-15 | 2006-08-29 | International Business Machines Corporation | Method, system, and program for transferring data between servers through a client computer over a network |
KR100401012B1 (en) * | 2000-12-15 | 2003-10-30 | 김연경 | A music providing system having music selecting function by human feeling and a music providing method using thereof |
US7035871B2 (en) * | 2000-12-19 | 2006-04-25 | Intel Corporation | Method and apparatus for intelligent and automatic preference detection of media content |
US6944679B2 (en) * | 2000-12-22 | 2005-09-13 | Microsoft Corp. | Context-aware systems and methods, location-aware systems and methods, context-aware vehicles and methods of operating the same, and location-aware vehicles and methods of operating the same |
US7277955B2 (en) * | 2000-12-22 | 2007-10-02 | Verizon Corporate Services Group Inc. | Streaming content |
US20020091761A1 (en) * | 2001-01-10 | 2002-07-11 | Lambert James P. | Technique of generating a composite media stream |
GB0103130D0 (en) * | 2001-02-08 | 2001-03-28 | Newsplayer Ltd | Media editing method and software thereof |
US20020165720A1 (en) * | 2001-03-02 | 2002-11-07 | Johnson Timothy M. | Methods and system for encoding and decoding a media sequence |
KR20020072453A (en) * | 2001-03-10 | 2002-09-16 | 삼성전자 주식회사 | Reproducing apparatus and additional information providing server system therefor |
US7072908B2 (en) * | 2001-03-26 | 2006-07-04 | Microsoft Corporation | Methods and systems for synchronizing visualizations with audio streams |
US7278102B2 (en) | 2001-03-26 | 2007-10-02 | Microsoft Corporation | Methods, system and media players for rendering different media types |
US6904566B2 (en) * | 2001-03-26 | 2005-06-07 | Microsoft Corporation | Methods, systems and media players for rendering different media types |
US8260656B1 (en) | 2001-04-19 | 2012-09-04 | Amazon.Com, Inc. | Mining of user-generated playlists for data regarding relationships between digital works |
US7904814B2 (en) | 2001-04-19 | 2011-03-08 | Sharp Laboratories Of America, Inc. | System for presenting audio-video content |
WO2002093408A1 (en) | 2001-05-11 | 2002-11-21 | Wildseed, Ltd. | Method and system for collecting and displaying aggregate presence information for mobile media players |
US7962482B2 (en) * | 2001-05-16 | 2011-06-14 | Pandora Media, Inc. | Methods and systems for utilizing contextual feedback to generate and modify playlists |
US7409441B2 (en) * | 2001-05-18 | 2008-08-05 | Sony Computer Entertainment Inc. | Display apparatus for accessing desired web site |
US20020184183A1 (en) * | 2001-06-01 | 2002-12-05 | Cherry Darrel D. | Personalized media service |
US6629034B1 (en) * | 2001-06-06 | 2003-09-30 | Navigation Technologies Corp. | Driving profile method and system |
WO2002103997A2 (en) * | 2001-06-14 | 2002-12-27 | Dizpersion Group, L.L.C. | Method and system for providing network based target advertising |
CA2463922C (en) | 2001-06-27 | 2013-07-16 | 4 Media, Inc. | Improved media delivery platform |
US8032909B2 (en) * | 2001-07-05 | 2011-10-04 | Digimarc Corporation | Watermarking and electronic program guides |
US8122465B2 (en) | 2001-07-05 | 2012-02-21 | Digimarc Corporation | Watermarking to set video usage permissions |
US7499863B2 (en) * | 2001-07-06 | 2009-03-03 | Dialogic Corporation | System and method for constructing phrases for a media server |
US20030014755A1 (en) * | 2001-07-13 | 2003-01-16 | Williams Marvin Lynn | Method and system for processing correlated audio-video segments with digital signatures within a broadcast system |
US7065201B2 (en) * | 2001-07-31 | 2006-06-20 | Sbc Technology Resources, Inc. | Telephone call processing in an interactive voice response call management system |
US20030036352A1 (en) * | 2001-08-17 | 2003-02-20 | Sony Corporation | Embedded e-marker and communication system |
US20030074660A1 (en) * | 2001-10-12 | 2003-04-17 | Liberate Technologies | System method and apparatus for portable digital identity |
US8079045B2 (en) * | 2001-10-17 | 2011-12-13 | Keen Personal Media, Inc. | Personal video recorder and method for inserting a stored advertisement into a displayed broadcast stream |
US7474698B2 (en) | 2001-10-19 | 2009-01-06 | Sharp Laboratories Of America, Inc. | Identification of replay segments |
US20030083977A1 (en) * | 2001-10-26 | 2003-05-01 | Majid Syed | System and method for providing electronic bulk buying |
US20030088768A1 (en) * | 2001-11-02 | 2003-05-08 | International Business Machines Corporation | Transmitting a broadcast via the internet within a limited distribution base of listeners |
US20040064500A1 (en) * | 2001-11-20 | 2004-04-01 | Kolar Jennifer Lynn | System and method for unified extraction of media objects |
BR0105727A (en) * | 2001-11-26 | 2002-03-26 | Carlos Cesar Moretzsohn Rocha | System to provide an individual data processing environment, with each user's personal identification and content stored on a portable device, which interacts with a workstation to operate application programs on servers |
SE520674C2 (en) * | 2001-12-14 | 2003-08-12 | Television And Wireless Applic | Method and system for conditional access |
KR100465818B1 (en) * | 2002-01-21 | 2005-01-13 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Multimedia data management system and method of controlling the same |
US7305070B2 (en) | 2002-01-30 | 2007-12-04 | At&T Labs, Inc. | Sequential presentation of long instructions in an interactive voice response system |
US6947772B2 (en) | 2002-01-31 | 2005-09-20 | Qualcomm Incorporated | System and method for providing messages on a wireless device connecting to an application server |
IL163908A0 (en) * | 2002-03-06 | 2005-12-18 | Sidereus Group | User controllable computer presentation of interfaces and information selectively provided via a network |
US7617295B1 (en) | 2002-03-18 | 2009-11-10 | Music Choice | Systems and methods for providing a broadcast entertainment service and an on-demand entertainment service |
US8214741B2 (en) | 2002-03-19 | 2012-07-03 | Sharp Laboratories Of America, Inc. | Synchronization of video and data |
US7096234B2 (en) * | 2002-03-21 | 2006-08-22 | Microsoft Corporation | Methods and systems for providing playlists |
US7159000B2 (en) * | 2002-03-21 | 2007-01-02 | Microsoft Corporation | Methods and systems for repairing playlists |
US6941324B2 (en) * | 2002-03-21 | 2005-09-06 | Microsoft Corporation | Methods and systems for processing playlists |
US7220910B2 (en) * | 2002-03-21 | 2007-05-22 | Microsoft Corporation | Methods and systems for per persona processing media content-associated metadata |
US7707221B1 (en) | 2002-04-03 | 2010-04-27 | Yahoo! Inc. | Associating and linking compact disc metadata |
US20030216958A1 (en) * | 2002-05-15 | 2003-11-20 | Linwood Register | System for and method of doing business to provide network-based in-store media broadcasting |
US7945636B2 (en) * | 2002-05-15 | 2011-05-17 | In-Store Broadcasting Network, Llc | Providing a multi-tier enterprise level application |
KR100502710B1 (en) * | 2002-05-24 | 2005-07-20 | 주식회사 아이큐브 | Optical disk regenerative apparatus |
KR100483451B1 (en) * | 2002-05-27 | 2005-04-15 | 주식회사 아이큐브 | Method for editing a contents file and a navigation information, medium recorded a information by the method |
US7644172B2 (en) * | 2002-06-24 | 2010-01-05 | Microsoft Corporation | Communicating via a connection between a streaming server and a client without breaking the connection |
US20030236711A1 (en) * | 2002-06-25 | 2003-12-25 | Sony Corporation | E-marker dot promotion |
US7711791B2 (en) | 2002-06-26 | 2010-05-04 | Clear Channel Management Services, Inc. | Using multiple media players to insert data items into a media stream of a streaming media |
US10986403B2 (en) * | 2002-06-27 | 2021-04-20 | Piranha Media Distribution, Inc. | Interactive digital media and advertising presentation platform |
US7028036B2 (en) * | 2002-06-28 | 2006-04-11 | Microsoft Corporation | System and method for visualization of continuous attribute values |
US8161411B2 (en) | 2003-04-25 | 2012-04-17 | Apple Inc. | Graphical user interface for browsing, searching and presenting media items |
US7234117B2 (en) * | 2002-08-28 | 2007-06-19 | Microsoft Corporation | System and method for shared integrated online social interaction |
US7039398B2 (en) | 2002-08-30 | 2006-05-02 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Server processing of interactive screens for a wireless device |
US6996394B2 (en) * | 2002-08-30 | 2006-02-07 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Server processing in providing messages for a wireless device connecting to a server |
US10373420B2 (en) * | 2002-09-16 | 2019-08-06 | Touchtunes Music Corporation | Digital downloading jukebox with enhanced communication features |
US7657907B2 (en) | 2002-09-30 | 2010-02-02 | Sharp Laboratories Of America, Inc. | Automatic user profiling |
US8370203B2 (en) * | 2002-10-07 | 2013-02-05 | Amazon Technologies, Inc. | User interface and methods for recommending items to users |
US7124125B2 (en) * | 2002-11-01 | 2006-10-17 | Loudeye Corp. | System and method for providing media samples on-line in response to media related searches on the internet |
US20050192934A1 (en) * | 2003-03-31 | 2005-09-01 | Steven Ellis | Custom media search tool |
WO2004046909A1 (en) * | 2002-11-15 | 2004-06-03 | Pump Audio Llc | Portable custom media server |
US20040182225A1 (en) * | 2002-11-15 | 2004-09-23 | Steven Ellis | Portable custom media server |
US7640306B2 (en) | 2002-11-18 | 2009-12-29 | Aol Llc | Reconfiguring an electronic message to effect an enhanced notification |
US7636755B2 (en) | 2002-11-21 | 2009-12-22 | Aol Llc | Multiple avatar personalities |
US8037150B2 (en) | 2002-11-21 | 2011-10-11 | Aol Inc. | System and methods for providing multiple personas in a communications environment |
CN1723502A (en) * | 2002-12-11 | 2006-01-18 | 皇家飞利浦电子股份有限公司 | Mobile device that uses removable medium for playback of content |
US20040142747A1 (en) * | 2003-01-16 | 2004-07-22 | Pryzby Eric M. | Selectable audio preferences for a gaming machine |
US7367886B2 (en) | 2003-01-16 | 2008-05-06 | Wms Gaming Inc. | Gaming system with surround sound |
US7493646B2 (en) | 2003-01-30 | 2009-02-17 | United Video Properties, Inc. | Interactive television systems with digital video recording and adjustable reminders |
US20070168863A1 (en) * | 2003-03-03 | 2007-07-19 | Aol Llc | Interacting avatars in an instant messaging communication session |
US7908554B1 (en) | 2003-03-03 | 2011-03-15 | Aol Inc. | Modifying avatar behavior based on user action or mood |
US20040179039A1 (en) * | 2003-03-03 | 2004-09-16 | Blattner Patrick D. | Using avatars to communicate |
US20070113181A1 (en) * | 2003-03-03 | 2007-05-17 | Blattner Patrick D | Using avatars to communicate real-time information |
US7913176B1 (en) | 2003-03-03 | 2011-03-22 | Aol Inc. | Applying access controls to communications with avatars |
US7158169B1 (en) * | 2003-03-07 | 2007-01-02 | Music Choice | Method and system for displaying content while reducing burn-in of a display |
US7626609B1 (en) | 2003-03-07 | 2009-12-01 | Music Choice | Method and system for displaying content while reducing burn-in of a display |
JP2004287965A (en) * | 2003-03-24 | 2004-10-14 | Fujitsu Ltd | Device and method for retrieving recommended music and computer readable storage medium having recommended music retrieval program stored therein |
US20040190869A1 (en) * | 2003-03-31 | 2004-09-30 | Bcom Electronics Inc. | Navigation device |
US20070159926A1 (en) * | 2003-04-17 | 2007-07-12 | Nike, Inc. | Adaptive Watch |
US20060051059A1 (en) | 2004-09-08 | 2006-03-09 | Krakirian Haig H | Video recorder having user extended and automatically extended time slots |
US7831199B2 (en) | 2006-01-03 | 2010-11-09 | Apple Inc. | Media data exchange, transfer or delivery for portable electronic devices |
US7724716B2 (en) | 2006-06-20 | 2010-05-25 | Apple Inc. | Wireless communication system |
US9406068B2 (en) | 2003-04-25 | 2016-08-02 | Apple Inc. | Method and system for submitting media for network-based purchase and distribution |
US6728729B1 (en) * | 2003-04-25 | 2004-04-27 | Apple Computer, Inc. | Accessing media across networks |
EP2270730A1 (en) | 2003-04-25 | 2011-01-05 | Apple Inc. | Method and system for network-based purchase and distribution of media |
US8243636B2 (en) | 2003-05-06 | 2012-08-14 | Apple Inc. | Messaging system and service |
US7609946B2 (en) * | 2003-05-15 | 2009-10-27 | Audiovox Corporation | Portable video system |
US7909397B2 (en) * | 2003-05-15 | 2011-03-22 | Audiovox Corporation | In-vehicle docking station for a portable media player |
US7954894B2 (en) * | 2003-05-15 | 2011-06-07 | Audiovox Corporation | Headrest mountable video system |
US7791586B2 (en) * | 2003-05-15 | 2010-09-07 | Audiovox Corporation | Entertainment system mountable in a vehicle seat |
US20070050262A1 (en) * | 2003-06-03 | 2007-03-01 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Multimedia purchasing apparatus, purchasing and supplying method |
US20040267812A1 (en) * | 2003-06-26 | 2004-12-30 | Microsoft Corporation | Media platform |
US11294618B2 (en) | 2003-07-28 | 2022-04-05 | Sonos, Inc. | Media player system |
US8290603B1 (en) | 2004-06-05 | 2012-10-16 | Sonos, Inc. | User interfaces for controlling and manipulating groupings in a multi-zone media system |
US11650784B2 (en) | 2003-07-28 | 2023-05-16 | Sonos, Inc. | Adjusting volume levels |
US11106425B2 (en) | 2003-07-28 | 2021-08-31 | Sonos, Inc. | Synchronizing operations among a plurality of independently clocked digital data processing devices |
US8086752B2 (en) | 2006-11-22 | 2011-12-27 | Sonos, Inc. | Systems and methods for synchronizing operations among a plurality of independently clocked digital data processing devices that independently source digital data |
US8234395B2 (en) * | 2003-07-28 | 2012-07-31 | Sonos, Inc. | System and method for synchronizing operations among a plurality of independently clocked digital data processing devices |
US10613817B2 (en) | 2003-07-28 | 2020-04-07 | Sonos, Inc. | Method and apparatus for displaying a list of tracks scheduled for playback by a synchrony group |
US11106424B2 (en) | 2003-07-28 | 2021-08-31 | Sonos, Inc. | Synchronizing operations among a plurality of independently clocked digital data processing devices |
US7149693B2 (en) * | 2003-07-31 | 2006-12-12 | Sony Corporation | Automated digital voice recorder to personal information manager synchronization |
US20060161474A1 (en) * | 2003-08-06 | 2006-07-20 | David Diamond | Delivery of targeted offers for move theaters and other retail stores |
US20070282874A1 (en) * | 2003-08-19 | 2007-12-06 | Rapid Intelligence Pty Ltd. | Content System |
US7346556B2 (en) * | 2003-08-29 | 2008-03-18 | Yahoo! Inc. | System and method for performing purchase transactions utilizing a broadcast-based device |
US20050076383A1 (en) * | 2003-08-29 | 2005-04-07 | Manish Upendran | System and method for providing a user interface |
US20050050576A1 (en) * | 2003-08-29 | 2005-03-03 | Manish Upendran | System and method for integrating broadcast content and non-broadcast content |
US20050076384A1 (en) * | 2003-08-29 | 2005-04-07 | Manish Upendran | System and method for presenting non-broadcast content on a broadcast-based device |
WO2005026916A2 (en) | 2003-09-10 | 2005-03-24 | Musicmatch, Inc. | Music purchasing and playing system and method |
JP3615750B2 (en) * | 2003-09-12 | 2005-02-02 | イー・エー・ユー株式会社 | Request song broadcasting system using information system |
US20060143674A1 (en) * | 2003-09-19 | 2006-06-29 | Blu Ventures, Llc | Methods to adapt search results provided by an integrated network-based media station/search engine based on user lifestyle |
US20050081155A1 (en) * | 2003-10-02 | 2005-04-14 | Geoffrey Martin | Virtual player capable of handling dissimilar content |
US20070271366A1 (en) * | 2003-10-09 | 2007-11-22 | Demers Timothy B | Multimedia player and browser system |
US8588582B2 (en) * | 2003-11-17 | 2013-11-19 | Diana Lynn Fitzgerald | System and method for on-demand storage of randomly selected data |
US8615157B1 (en) | 2003-11-17 | 2013-12-24 | David C. Isaacson | System and method for on-demand storage of randomly selected data |
FI116764B (en) * | 2003-12-22 | 2006-02-15 | Nokia Corp | Method for Sharing Calendar Content in a Communication System, a Communication System, and a Terminal |
US20050188403A1 (en) * | 2004-02-23 | 2005-08-25 | Kotzin Michael D. | System and method for presenting and editing customized media streams to a content providing device |
US7594245B2 (en) | 2004-03-04 | 2009-09-22 | Sharp Laboratories Of America, Inc. | Networked video devices |
US8356317B2 (en) | 2004-03-04 | 2013-01-15 | Sharp Laboratories Of America, Inc. | Presence based technology |
US8949899B2 (en) | 2005-03-04 | 2015-02-03 | Sharp Laboratories Of America, Inc. | Collaborative recommendation system |
US7900151B2 (en) * | 2004-03-05 | 2011-03-01 | Sap Ag | Maintaining individual object data |
US7487441B2 (en) | 2004-03-11 | 2009-02-03 | Yahoo!Inc. | Method and system of enhanced messaging |
US9374607B2 (en) | 2012-06-26 | 2016-06-21 | Sonos, Inc. | Media playback system with guest access |
US9977561B2 (en) | 2004-04-01 | 2018-05-22 | Sonos, Inc. | Systems, methods, apparatus, and articles of manufacture to provide guest access |
JP4492190B2 (en) * | 2004-04-07 | 2010-06-30 | ソニー株式会社 | Information processing apparatus and method, program |
US7856469B2 (en) * | 2004-04-15 | 2010-12-21 | International Business Machines Corporation | Searchable instant messaging chat repositories using topic and identifier metadata |
US7899802B2 (en) * | 2004-04-28 | 2011-03-01 | Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. | Moveable interface to a search engine that remains visible on the desktop |
US20050262449A1 (en) * | 2004-05-03 | 2005-11-24 | Microsoft Corporation | Online service switching and customizations |
US8028038B2 (en) * | 2004-05-05 | 2011-09-27 | Dryden Enterprises, Llc | Obtaining a playlist based on user profile matching |
US9826046B2 (en) | 2004-05-05 | 2017-11-21 | Black Hills Media, Llc | Device discovery for digital entertainment network |
US8028323B2 (en) * | 2004-05-05 | 2011-09-27 | Dryden Enterprises, Llc | Method and system for employing a first device to direct a networked audio device to obtain a media item |
JP4075883B2 (en) * | 2004-05-12 | 2008-04-16 | セイコーエプソン株式会社 | Droplet ejection device, electro-optical device manufacturing method, and electro-optical device |
KR100548006B1 (en) * | 2004-05-15 | 2006-02-01 | 삼성테크윈 주식회사 | Method for controlling digital photographing apparatus, and digital photographing apparatus using the method |
US20060005226A1 (en) * | 2004-05-17 | 2006-01-05 | Lee Peter S | System and method for synchronization of a portable media player to a user's profile |
US8868698B2 (en) | 2004-06-05 | 2014-10-21 | Sonos, Inc. | Establishing a secure wireless network with minimum human intervention |
US8326951B1 (en) | 2004-06-05 | 2012-12-04 | Sonos, Inc. | Establishing a secure wireless network with minimum human intervention |
US8346157B1 (en) | 2004-06-16 | 2013-01-01 | Colby Steven M | Content customization in asymmertic communication systems |
US8365083B2 (en) * | 2004-06-25 | 2013-01-29 | Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. | Customizable, categorically organized graphical user interface for utilizing online and local content |
US7551889B2 (en) * | 2004-06-30 | 2009-06-23 | Nokia Corporation | Method and apparatus for transmission and receipt of digital data in an analog signal |
KR100606785B1 (en) * | 2004-07-07 | 2006-08-01 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | Synchronization method of video and iamge data in system for providing remote multimedia service through network |
US7920577B2 (en) * | 2004-07-08 | 2011-04-05 | Avaya Communication Israel Ltd. | Power saving in wireless packet based networks |
US20060015246A1 (en) * | 2004-07-15 | 2006-01-19 | Alvin Hui | Method and apparatus for specifying destination using previous destinations stored in navigation system |
US7873911B2 (en) * | 2004-08-31 | 2011-01-18 | Gopalakrishnan Kumar C | Methods for providing information services related to visual imagery |
US20060075003A1 (en) * | 2004-09-17 | 2006-04-06 | International Business Machines Corporation | Queuing of location-based task oriented content |
US7610011B2 (en) * | 2004-09-19 | 2009-10-27 | Adam Albrett | Providing alternative programming on a radio in response to user input |
US20060080166A1 (en) * | 2004-10-12 | 2006-04-13 | Aiichiro Takahashi | Advertising box and its use in an online advertising system |
KR101213913B1 (en) * | 2004-11-18 | 2012-12-18 | 콘텐트가드 홀딩즈 인코포레이티드 | Method, system, and device for license-centric content consumption |
US8660961B2 (en) * | 2004-11-18 | 2014-02-25 | Contentguard Holdings, Inc. | Method, system, and device for license-centric content consumption |
JP4528964B2 (en) * | 2004-11-22 | 2010-08-25 | 独立行政法人産業技術総合研究所 | Content search and display device, method, and program |
US8170468B2 (en) * | 2004-12-15 | 2012-05-01 | General Motors Llc | Method and system for presenting media content in a mobile vehicle communication system |
US8270901B2 (en) * | 2004-12-17 | 2012-09-18 | Martin E. Hellman | Dropout-resistant media broadcasting system |
US7865917B2 (en) * | 2004-12-17 | 2011-01-04 | Martin E Hellman | Security enhanced tiered subscription broadcast system |
US8627354B2 (en) | 2004-12-17 | 2014-01-07 | Martin E. Hellman | Tiered subscription broadcast system |
US9652809B1 (en) | 2004-12-21 | 2017-05-16 | Aol Inc. | Using user profile information to determine an avatar and/or avatar characteristics |
US7468729B1 (en) | 2004-12-21 | 2008-12-23 | Aol Llc, A Delaware Limited Liability Company | Using an avatar to generate user profile information |
EP1835455A1 (en) * | 2005-01-05 | 2007-09-19 | Musicstrands, S.A.U. | System and method for recommending multimedia elements |
US20060167994A1 (en) * | 2005-01-11 | 2006-07-27 | Yen-Fu Chen | System and method for automatically segmenting content from an instant messaging transcript and applying commands contained within the content segments |
US8275832B2 (en) * | 2005-01-20 | 2012-09-25 | International Business Machines Corporation | Method to enable user selection of segments in an instant messaging application for integration in other applications |
US7693887B2 (en) * | 2005-02-01 | 2010-04-06 | Strands, Inc. | Dynamic identification of a new set of media items responsive to an input mediaset |
US7734569B2 (en) * | 2005-02-03 | 2010-06-08 | Strands, Inc. | Recommender system for identifying a new set of media items responsive to an input set of media items and knowledge base metrics |
US7797321B2 (en) | 2005-02-04 | 2010-09-14 | Strands, Inc. | System for browsing through a music catalog using correlation metrics of a knowledge base of mediasets |
US9219634B1 (en) | 2005-02-16 | 2015-12-22 | Creative Technology Ltd. | System and method for searching, storing, and rendering digital media content using virtual broadcast channels |
US8229856B1 (en) | 2005-02-17 | 2012-07-24 | Sprint Spectrum Lp. | Music subscription and distribution for wireless devices |
US7818350B2 (en) | 2005-02-28 | 2010-10-19 | Yahoo! Inc. | System and method for creating a collaborative playlist |
US20060212898A1 (en) * | 2005-03-17 | 2006-09-21 | Ryan Steelberg | System and method for broadcast target advertising |
US20060218613A1 (en) * | 2005-03-22 | 2006-09-28 | Bushnell William J | System and method for acquiring on-line content via wireless communication device |
US9973817B1 (en) | 2005-04-08 | 2018-05-15 | Rovi Guides, Inc. | System and method for providing a list of video-on-demand programs |
US7840570B2 (en) * | 2005-04-22 | 2010-11-23 | Strands, Inc. | System and method for acquiring and adding data on the playing of elements or multimedia files |
US8321041B2 (en) * | 2005-05-02 | 2012-11-27 | Clear Channel Management Services, Inc. | Playlist-based content assembly |
US7775428B2 (en) * | 2005-05-06 | 2010-08-17 | Berkun Kenneth A | Systems and methods for generating, reading and transferring identifiers |
WO2006127097A2 (en) * | 2005-05-23 | 2006-11-30 | Google Inc. | System and method for broadcast tagging and target advertising |
WO2006138620A2 (en) | 2005-06-15 | 2006-12-28 | Music Choice | Systems and methods for facilitating the acquisition of content |
US8365218B2 (en) | 2005-06-24 | 2013-01-29 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Networked television and method thereof |
US20060294572A1 (en) * | 2005-06-24 | 2006-12-28 | Sbc Knowledge Ventures, L.P. | System and method to promptly startup a networked television |
US8635659B2 (en) | 2005-06-24 | 2014-01-21 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Audio receiver modular card and method thereof |
US7840178B2 (en) * | 2005-07-12 | 2010-11-23 | Martin E. Hellman | FM broadcast system competitive with satellite radio |
AU2006272401B2 (en) | 2005-07-22 | 2011-03-31 | Fanvision Entertainment Llc | System and methods for enhancing the experience of spectators attending a live sporting event |
US7680824B2 (en) * | 2005-08-11 | 2010-03-16 | Microsoft Corporation | Single action media playlist generation |
US7681238B2 (en) * | 2005-08-11 | 2010-03-16 | Microsoft Corporation | Remotely accessing protected files via streaming |
WO2007021107A1 (en) * | 2005-08-16 | 2007-02-22 | Lg Electronics Inc. | Terminal for supporting dynamic contents delivery service, and system thereof |
US8166416B2 (en) * | 2005-08-17 | 2012-04-24 | Cyber Group Usa, Inc. | Play menu and group auto organizer system and method for a multimedia player |
US20070049193A1 (en) * | 2005-09-01 | 2007-03-01 | Visteon Global Technologies, Inc. | Satellite receiver for building selection list based on time |
US20070055993A1 (en) * | 2005-09-02 | 2007-03-08 | Microsoft Corporation | Media content galleries |
US7877387B2 (en) * | 2005-09-30 | 2011-01-25 | Strands, Inc. | Systems and methods for promotional media item selection and promotional program unit generation |
US20070079342A1 (en) | 2005-09-30 | 2007-04-05 | Guideworks, Llc | Systems and methods for managing local storage of on-demand content |
US20090070267A9 (en) * | 2005-09-30 | 2009-03-12 | Musicstrands, Inc. | User programmed media delivery service |
US20070118442A1 (en) * | 2005-10-07 | 2007-05-24 | Collas James P | Method and system for a digital video disk catalog |
US8949154B2 (en) * | 2005-10-07 | 2015-02-03 | Google Inc. | Content feed user interface with gallery display of same-type items |
ES2451645T3 (en) * | 2005-11-07 | 2014-03-28 | Audiovox Corporation | Audio-visual system that can be mounted on a vehicle seat and its assembly and visualization procedures |
US7827300B2 (en) | 2005-11-23 | 2010-11-02 | Andreas Ingvarsson | Method for free internet streaming of music |
US8613024B2 (en) | 2005-12-13 | 2013-12-17 | United Video Properties, Inc. | Cross-platform predictive popularity ratings for use in interactive television applications |
EP1963957A4 (en) | 2005-12-19 | 2009-05-06 | Strands Inc | User-to-user recommender |
US20070162546A1 (en) * | 2005-12-22 | 2007-07-12 | Musicstrands, Inc. | Sharing tags among individual user media libraries |
US9681105B2 (en) | 2005-12-29 | 2017-06-13 | Rovi Guides, Inc. | Interactive media guidance system having multiple devices |
US7774708B2 (en) | 2006-01-04 | 2010-08-10 | Apple Inc. | Graphical user interface with improved media presentation |
US20100017827A1 (en) * | 2006-01-04 | 2010-01-21 | Audiovox Corporation | Receiver and distribution unit for vehicle entertainment system |
US7930367B2 (en) * | 2006-01-04 | 2011-04-19 | Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications Ab | Low storage portable media player |
US8713613B2 (en) * | 2006-01-04 | 2014-04-29 | Voxx International Corporation | Data distribution unit for vehicle entertainment system |
US20070244880A1 (en) * | 2006-02-03 | 2007-10-18 | Francisco Martin | Mediaset generation system |
WO2007092053A1 (en) * | 2006-02-10 | 2007-08-16 | Strands, Inc. | Dynamic interactive entertainment |
JP5075132B2 (en) | 2006-02-10 | 2012-11-14 | アップル インコーポレイテッド | System and method for prioritizing mobile media player files |
US20070198415A1 (en) * | 2006-02-17 | 2007-08-23 | Humberto Herrera | Method and apparatus for categorized reception of an audio program |
US8689253B2 (en) | 2006-03-03 | 2014-04-01 | Sharp Laboratories Of America, Inc. | Method and system for configuring media-playing sets |
US8521611B2 (en) | 2006-03-06 | 2013-08-27 | Apple Inc. | Article trading among members of a community |
US8438646B2 (en) * | 2006-04-28 | 2013-05-07 | Disney Enterprises, Inc. | System and/or method for distributing media content |
US20070270208A1 (en) * | 2006-05-02 | 2007-11-22 | Caspers Chris J | Wagering game with improved payline and payline-wager amount indicators |
US20070266031A1 (en) * | 2006-05-15 | 2007-11-15 | Adams J Trent | Identifying content |
US8073984B2 (en) | 2006-05-22 | 2011-12-06 | Apple Inc. | Communication protocol for use with portable electronic devices |
US20070271116A1 (en) | 2006-05-22 | 2007-11-22 | Apple Computer, Inc. | Integrated media jukebox and physiologic data handling application |
US7643895B2 (en) | 2006-05-22 | 2010-01-05 | Apple Inc. | Portable media device with workout support |
US7475078B2 (en) * | 2006-05-30 | 2009-01-06 | Microsoft Corporation | Two-way synchronization of media data |
US20080126177A1 (en) * | 2006-06-13 | 2008-05-29 | Crawford Michael S | Stage play advertising and distribution methodology |
US8903843B2 (en) * | 2006-06-21 | 2014-12-02 | Napo Enterprises, Llc | Historical media recommendation service |
US8805831B2 (en) * | 2006-07-11 | 2014-08-12 | Napo Enterprises, Llc | Scoring and replaying media items |
US9003056B2 (en) | 2006-07-11 | 2015-04-07 | Napo Enterprises, Llc | Maintaining a minimum level of real time media recommendations in the absence of online friends |
US8059646B2 (en) | 2006-07-11 | 2011-11-15 | Napo Enterprises, Llc | System and method for identifying music content in a P2P real time recommendation network |
US8327266B2 (en) | 2006-07-11 | 2012-12-04 | Napo Enterprises, Llc | Graphical user interface system for allowing management of a media item playlist based on a preference scoring system |
US7970922B2 (en) | 2006-07-11 | 2011-06-28 | Napo Enterprises, Llc | P2P real time media recommendations |
US9633356B2 (en) | 2006-07-20 | 2017-04-25 | Aol Inc. | Targeted advertising for playlists based upon search queries |
US7521620B2 (en) * | 2006-07-31 | 2009-04-21 | Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. | Method of and system for browsing of music |
US8620699B2 (en) * | 2006-08-08 | 2013-12-31 | Napo Enterprises, Llc | Heavy influencer media recommendations |
US8090606B2 (en) * | 2006-08-08 | 2012-01-03 | Napo Enterprises, Llc | Embedded media recommendations |
US8468561B2 (en) | 2006-08-09 | 2013-06-18 | Google Inc. | Preemptible station inventory |
CN101490683A (en) * | 2006-08-30 | 2009-07-22 | 松下电器产业株式会社 | Information presenting device, information presenting method, information presenting program, and integrated circuit |
US7956849B2 (en) | 2006-09-06 | 2011-06-07 | Apple Inc. | Video manager for portable multifunction device |
US7831727B2 (en) * | 2006-09-11 | 2010-11-09 | Apple Computer, Inc. | Multi-content presentation of unassociated content types |
US8689254B2 (en) | 2006-09-11 | 2014-04-01 | Apple Inc. | Techniques and graphical user interfaces for preview of media items |
US9202509B2 (en) | 2006-09-12 | 2015-12-01 | Sonos, Inc. | Controlling and grouping in a multi-zone media system |
US8483853B1 (en) | 2006-09-12 | 2013-07-09 | Sonos, Inc. | Controlling and manipulating groupings in a multi-zone media system |
US8788080B1 (en) | 2006-09-12 | 2014-07-22 | Sonos, Inc. | Multi-channel pairing in a media system |
US8745496B2 (en) | 2006-09-21 | 2014-06-03 | Apple Inc. | Variable I/O interface for portable media device |
US8956290B2 (en) | 2006-09-21 | 2015-02-17 | Apple Inc. | Lifestyle companion system |
US8235724B2 (en) | 2006-09-21 | 2012-08-07 | Apple Inc. | Dynamically adaptive scheduling system |
US8001472B2 (en) | 2006-09-21 | 2011-08-16 | Apple Inc. | Systems and methods for providing audio and visual cues via a portable electronic device |
US8429223B2 (en) | 2006-09-21 | 2013-04-23 | Apple Inc. | Systems and methods for facilitating group activities |
US20080072902A1 (en) * | 2006-09-27 | 2008-03-27 | Nellcor Puritan Bennett Incorporated | Preset breath delivery therapies for a breathing assistance system |
US8645497B2 (en) * | 2006-09-28 | 2014-02-04 | Google Inc. | Bookmark-based access to content feeds |
US8230361B2 (en) | 2006-09-28 | 2012-07-24 | Google Inc. | Content feed user interface |
US8694607B2 (en) * | 2006-10-06 | 2014-04-08 | Google Inc. | Recursive subscriptions to content feeds |
US10657168B2 (en) | 2006-10-24 | 2020-05-19 | Slacker, Inc. | Methods and systems for personalized rendering of digital media content |
US20100106852A1 (en) * | 2007-10-24 | 2010-04-29 | Kindig Bradley D | Systems and methods for providing user personalized media content on a portable device |
US8712563B2 (en) | 2006-10-24 | 2014-04-29 | Slacker, Inc. | Method and apparatus for interactive distribution of digital content |
US20080162570A1 (en) | 2006-10-24 | 2008-07-03 | Kindig Bradley D | Methods and systems for personalized rendering of digital media content |
JP4183003B2 (en) * | 2006-11-09 | 2008-11-19 | ソニー株式会社 | Information processing apparatus, information processing method, and program |
TWI330795B (en) * | 2006-11-17 | 2010-09-21 | Via Tech Inc | Playing systems and methods with integrated music, lyrics and song information |
US9417758B2 (en) * | 2006-11-21 | 2016-08-16 | Daniel E. Tsai | AD-HOC web content player |
US20080120346A1 (en) * | 2006-11-22 | 2008-05-22 | Anindya Neogi | Purging of stored timeseries data |
US8356039B2 (en) * | 2006-12-21 | 2013-01-15 | Yahoo! Inc. | Providing multiple media items to a consumer via a simplified consumer interaction |
WO2008109889A1 (en) | 2007-03-08 | 2008-09-12 | Slacker, Inc. | System and method for personalizing playback content through interaction with a playback device |
US7801888B2 (en) | 2007-03-09 | 2010-09-21 | Microsoft Corporation | Media content search results ranked by popularity |
DK2143256T3 (en) * | 2007-03-14 | 2020-01-13 | Slacker Inc | Portable Personalized Radio Systems and Methods |
US8226007B2 (en) | 2007-03-23 | 2012-07-24 | Ltt, Ltd | Method and apparatus for using a limited capacity portable data carrier |
US20080244668A1 (en) * | 2007-03-28 | 2008-10-02 | At&T Knowledge Ventures, L.P. | System and apparatus for searching media stations |
EP2343660A1 (en) * | 2007-03-31 | 2011-07-13 | Sony Deutschland GmbH | Method for content recommendation |
US9224427B2 (en) * | 2007-04-02 | 2015-12-29 | Napo Enterprises LLC | Rating media item recommendations using recommendation paths and/or media item usage |
US8112720B2 (en) | 2007-04-05 | 2012-02-07 | Napo Enterprises, Llc | System and method for automatically and graphically associating programmatically-generated media item recommendations related to a user's socially recommended media items |
US7739596B2 (en) | 2007-04-06 | 2010-06-15 | Yahoo! Inc. | Method and system for displaying contextual advertisements with media |
WO2008128068A1 (en) * | 2007-04-13 | 2008-10-23 | Opus Iii | System and method for providing packaged programming to electronic media players |
US8712474B2 (en) * | 2007-04-20 | 2014-04-29 | Telefonaktiebolaget L M Ericsson (Publ) | Secure soft SIM credential transfer |
US8671000B2 (en) | 2007-04-24 | 2014-03-11 | Apple Inc. | Method and arrangement for providing content to multimedia devices |
AU2008247579B2 (en) * | 2007-05-02 | 2013-03-28 | Google Llc | User interfaces for web-based video player |
US20080288343A1 (en) * | 2007-05-15 | 2008-11-20 | Tp Lab | Method and System to Process Digital Media Product Codes |
US8301623B2 (en) | 2007-05-22 | 2012-10-30 | Amazon Technologies, Inc. | Probabilistic recommendation system |
US9037632B2 (en) * | 2007-06-01 | 2015-05-19 | Napo Enterprises, Llc | System and method of generating a media item recommendation message with recommender presence information |
US8839141B2 (en) | 2007-06-01 | 2014-09-16 | Napo Enterprises, Llc | Method and system for visually indicating a replay status of media items on a media device |
US9164993B2 (en) * | 2007-06-01 | 2015-10-20 | Napo Enterprises, Llc | System and method for propagating a media item recommendation message comprising recommender presence information |
US8285776B2 (en) * | 2007-06-01 | 2012-10-09 | Napo Enterprises, Llc | System and method for processing a received media item recommendation message comprising recommender presence information |
US20090049045A1 (en) | 2007-06-01 | 2009-02-19 | Concert Technology Corporation | Method and system for sorting media items in a playlist on a media device |
US20090019492A1 (en) | 2007-07-11 | 2009-01-15 | United Video Properties, Inc. | Systems and methods for mirroring and transcoding media content |
US20090048992A1 (en) * | 2007-08-13 | 2009-02-19 | Concert Technology Corporation | System and method for reducing the repetitive reception of a media item recommendation |
US9699232B2 (en) | 2007-08-24 | 2017-07-04 | Iheartmedia Management Services, Inc. | Adding perishable content to media stream based on user location preference |
US11265355B2 (en) | 2007-08-24 | 2022-03-01 | Iheartmedia Management Services, Inc. | Customized perishable media content based on user-specified preference for static or variable location |
US8719349B2 (en) * | 2007-08-24 | 2014-05-06 | Clear Channel Management Services, Inc. | System and method for providing a radio-like experience |
US9990655B2 (en) | 2007-08-24 | 2018-06-05 | Iheartmedia Management Services, Inc. | Live media stream including personalized notifications |
WO2009032157A1 (en) * | 2007-08-29 | 2009-03-12 | Clear Channel Management Services, L.P. | System and method for providing broadcast listener participation |
US9058608B2 (en) | 2007-09-12 | 2015-06-16 | Google Inc. | Placement attribute targeting |
US8060634B1 (en) | 2007-09-26 | 2011-11-15 | Google Inc. | Determining and displaying a count of unread items in content feeds |
US10025871B2 (en) | 2007-09-27 | 2018-07-17 | Google Llc | Setting and displaying a read status for items in content feeds |
US20090106331A1 (en) * | 2007-10-22 | 2009-04-23 | General Electric Company | Dynamic two-stage clinical data archiving and retrieval solution |
US7680699B2 (en) * | 2007-10-23 | 2010-03-16 | Mozes Oncorporated | Method, system, and medium for sharing digital content and purchasing products at live performances |
US7865522B2 (en) * | 2007-11-07 | 2011-01-04 | Napo Enterprises, Llc | System and method for hyping media recommendations in a media recommendation system |
US9060034B2 (en) | 2007-11-09 | 2015-06-16 | Napo Enterprises, Llc | System and method of filtering recommenders in a media item recommendation system |
US20090132591A1 (en) * | 2007-11-20 | 2009-05-21 | Toms Mona L | Method and system for displaying and accessing music data files |
US9122751B2 (en) * | 2007-12-07 | 2015-09-01 | International Business Machines Corporation | Method of tagging instant messaging (IM) conversations for easy information sharing |
US9224150B2 (en) * | 2007-12-18 | 2015-12-29 | Napo Enterprises, Llc | Identifying highly valued recommendations of users in a media recommendation network |
US8402025B2 (en) * | 2007-12-19 | 2013-03-19 | Google Inc. | Video quality measures |
US9734507B2 (en) * | 2007-12-20 | 2017-08-15 | Napo Enterprise, Llc | Method and system for simulating recommendations in a social network for an offline user |
US8396951B2 (en) | 2007-12-20 | 2013-03-12 | Napo Enterprises, Llc | Method and system for populating a content repository for an internet radio service based on a recommendation network |
US9015147B2 (en) | 2007-12-20 | 2015-04-21 | Porto Technology, Llc | System and method for generating dynamically filtered content results, including for audio and/or video channels |
US8117193B2 (en) | 2007-12-21 | 2012-02-14 | Lemi Technology, Llc | Tunersphere |
US8316015B2 (en) | 2007-12-21 | 2012-11-20 | Lemi Technology, Llc | Tunersphere |
US8060525B2 (en) | 2007-12-21 | 2011-11-15 | Napo Enterprises, Llc | Method and system for generating media recommendations in a distributed environment based on tagging play history information with location information |
US20090175131A1 (en) * | 2008-01-09 | 2009-07-09 | Jackson Michael J | Alarm Clock Having Audio File Playback Capabilities |
US20090234714A1 (en) * | 2008-03-12 | 2009-09-17 | Clevx, Llc | Software distribution system with advertising revenue subsidy and method of operation thereof |
US8554891B2 (en) * | 2008-03-20 | 2013-10-08 | Sony Corporation | Method and apparatus for providing feedback regarding digital content within a social network |
US8725740B2 (en) | 2008-03-24 | 2014-05-13 | Napo Enterprises, Llc | Active playlist having dynamic media item groups |
US20090259621A1 (en) * | 2008-04-11 | 2009-10-15 | Concert Technology Corporation | Providing expected desirability information prior to sending a recommendation |
US8484311B2 (en) | 2008-04-17 | 2013-07-09 | Eloy Technology, Llc | Pruning an aggregate media collection |
US20090265740A1 (en) * | 2008-04-21 | 2009-10-22 | Thomas Mullen | Media storefront for interactive media service device |
US20090276368A1 (en) * | 2008-04-28 | 2009-11-05 | Strands, Inc. | Systems and methods for providing personalized recommendations of products and services based on explicit and implicit user data and feedback |
US20110295669A1 (en) * | 2008-05-30 | 2011-12-01 | Jonathan Stiebel | Internet-Assisted Systems and Methods for Building a Customer Base for Musicians |
EP2304597A4 (en) * | 2008-05-31 | 2012-10-31 | Apple Inc | Adaptive recommender technology |
US20090307314A1 (en) * | 2008-06-05 | 2009-12-10 | Patrick Martin Luther Smith | Musical interest specific dating and social networking process |
US20100017455A1 (en) * | 2008-07-17 | 2010-01-21 | Lemi Technology, Llc | Customized media broadcast for a broadcast group |
WO2010011637A1 (en) * | 2008-07-21 | 2010-01-28 | Strands, Inc | Ambient collage display of digital media content |
US9496003B2 (en) | 2008-09-08 | 2016-11-15 | Apple Inc. | System and method for playlist generation based on similarity data |
US20100076576A1 (en) * | 2008-09-24 | 2010-03-25 | Apple Inc. | Systems, methods, and devices for providing broadcast media from a selected source |
US8452228B2 (en) * | 2008-09-24 | 2013-05-28 | Apple Inc. | Systems, methods, and devices for associating a contact identifier with a broadcast source |
US8886112B2 (en) * | 2008-09-24 | 2014-11-11 | Apple Inc. | Media device with enhanced data retrieval feature |
US20100075695A1 (en) * | 2008-09-24 | 2010-03-25 | Apple Inc. | Systems, methods, and devices for retrieving local broadcast source presets |
US8332406B2 (en) | 2008-10-02 | 2012-12-11 | Apple Inc. | Real-time visualization of user consumption of media items |
US8484227B2 (en) | 2008-10-15 | 2013-07-09 | Eloy Technology, Llc | Caching and synching process for a media sharing system |
US8880599B2 (en) | 2008-10-15 | 2014-11-04 | Eloy Technology, Llc | Collection digest for a media sharing system |
US20100125507A1 (en) * | 2008-11-17 | 2010-05-20 | Escape Media Group, Inc. | Method and system for presenting sponsored content |
US10063934B2 (en) | 2008-11-25 | 2018-08-28 | Rovi Technologies Corporation | Reducing unicast session duration with restart TV |
US8494899B2 (en) | 2008-12-02 | 2013-07-23 | Lemi Technology, Llc | Dynamic talk radio program scheduling |
US8352871B2 (en) | 2008-12-04 | 2013-01-08 | International Business Machines Corporation | System and method for virtual environment preservation based on automated item reduction |
US8700072B2 (en) | 2008-12-23 | 2014-04-15 | At&T Mobility Ii Llc | Scalable message fidelity |
KR101547936B1 (en) | 2008-12-24 | 2015-08-27 | 삼성전자 주식회사 | Display apparatus and control method thereof |
US20100169328A1 (en) * | 2008-12-31 | 2010-07-01 | Strands, Inc. | Systems and methods for making recommendations using model-based collaborative filtering with user communities and items collections |
US20100178938A1 (en) * | 2009-01-13 | 2010-07-15 | Apple Inc. | Systems and methods for customizing radio presets |
US8200602B2 (en) | 2009-02-02 | 2012-06-12 | Napo Enterprises, Llc | System and method for creating thematic listening experiences in a networked peer media recommendation environment |
US8572513B2 (en) | 2009-03-16 | 2013-10-29 | Apple Inc. | Device, method, and graphical user interface for moving a current position in content at a variable scrubbing rate |
US8243949B2 (en) * | 2009-04-14 | 2012-08-14 | Plantronics, Inc. | Network addressible loudspeaker and audio play |
JP5788866B2 (en) * | 2009-04-20 | 2015-10-07 | コーニンクレッカ フィリップス エヌ ヴェ | Method and system for rating items |
US8806047B2 (en) | 2009-04-29 | 2014-08-12 | Lemi Technology, Llc | Skip feature for a broadcast or multicast media station |
US7657337B1 (en) | 2009-04-29 | 2010-02-02 | Lemi Technology, Llc | Skip feature for a broadcast or multicast media station |
US20100306023A1 (en) * | 2009-05-29 | 2010-12-02 | Adobe Systems Incorporated | Systems and Methods of Selecting Advertisements Using a Local User Profile |
US8352278B2 (en) * | 2009-06-02 | 2013-01-08 | Ford Global Technologies, Llc | Methods and systems for resolving the incompatibility of media items playable from a vehicle |
US9641625B2 (en) * | 2009-06-09 | 2017-05-02 | Ford Global Technologies, Llc | Method and system for executing an internet radio application within a vehicle |
US20110060738A1 (en) | 2009-09-08 | 2011-03-10 | Apple Inc. | Media item clustering based on similarity data |
US9166714B2 (en) | 2009-09-11 | 2015-10-20 | Veveo, Inc. | Method of and system for presenting enriched video viewing analytics |
US9014546B2 (en) | 2009-09-23 | 2015-04-21 | Rovi Guides, Inc. | Systems and methods for automatically detecting users within detection regions of media devices |
US20110258676A1 (en) * | 2009-10-19 | 2011-10-20 | Gaskins Iii James A | Interactive Video Subscription Player |
US8606617B2 (en) * | 2010-01-14 | 2013-12-10 | Clear Channel Management Services, Inc. | Method for computing reach of an arbitrary radio advertising schedule |
US8140570B2 (en) | 2010-03-11 | 2012-03-20 | Apple Inc. | Automatic discovery of metadata |
US8423525B2 (en) | 2010-03-30 | 2013-04-16 | International Business Machines Corporation | Life arcs as an entity resolution feature |
US9312969B2 (en) * | 2010-04-15 | 2016-04-12 | North Eleven Limited | Remote server system for combining audio files and for managing combined audio files for downloading by local systems |
KR101582436B1 (en) * | 2010-05-04 | 2016-01-04 | 샤잠 엔터테인먼트 리미티드 | Methods and systems for syschronizing media |
US8296422B2 (en) * | 2010-05-06 | 2012-10-23 | Sony Computer Entertainment Inc. | Method and system of manipulating data based on user-feedback |
US20120017150A1 (en) * | 2010-07-15 | 2012-01-19 | MySongToYou, Inc. | Creating and disseminating of user generated media over a network |
US20120109971A1 (en) * | 2010-11-02 | 2012-05-03 | Clear Channel Management Services, Inc. | Rules Based Playlist Generation |
US8863256B1 (en) | 2011-01-14 | 2014-10-14 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | System and method for enabling secure transactions using flexible identity management in a vehicular environment |
US11429343B2 (en) | 2011-01-25 | 2022-08-30 | Sonos, Inc. | Stereo playback configuration and control |
US11265652B2 (en) | 2011-01-25 | 2022-03-01 | Sonos, Inc. | Playback device pairing |
DE102011003914A1 (en) * | 2011-02-10 | 2012-08-16 | Bayerische Motoren Werke Aktiengesellschaft | Method for operating a route acquisition system and route acquisition system |
US8840013B2 (en) * | 2011-12-06 | 2014-09-23 | autoGraph, Inc. | Consumer self-profiling GUI, analysis and rapid information presentation tools |
EP2718890A4 (en) | 2011-06-06 | 2014-11-05 | Nfluence Media Inc | Consumer driven advertising system |
US20130024287A1 (en) * | 2011-07-19 | 2013-01-24 | Ford Global Technologies, Llc | Methods and Apparatus for Managing a Content Stream |
US9286384B2 (en) | 2011-09-21 | 2016-03-15 | Sonos, Inc. | Methods and systems to share media |
US8983905B2 (en) | 2011-10-03 | 2015-03-17 | Apple Inc. | Merging playlists from multiple sources |
US8872647B2 (en) | 2011-10-21 | 2014-10-28 | Ford Global Technologies, Llc | Method and apparatus for context adaptive multimedia management |
US8909667B2 (en) | 2011-11-01 | 2014-12-09 | Lemi Technology, Llc | Systems, methods, and computer readable media for generating recommendations in a media recommendation system |
US20130144725A1 (en) * | 2011-12-02 | 2013-06-06 | General Instrument Corporation | Presenting content to a user in accordance with an agreed upon content-presentation policy |
US9348554B2 (en) * | 2011-12-20 | 2016-05-24 | Audible, Inc. | Managing playback of supplemental information |
US8805418B2 (en) | 2011-12-23 | 2014-08-12 | United Video Properties, Inc. | Methods and systems for performing actions based on location-based rules |
US9665339B2 (en) | 2011-12-28 | 2017-05-30 | Sonos, Inc. | Methods and systems to select an audio track |
US9344292B2 (en) | 2011-12-30 | 2016-05-17 | Sonos, Inc. | Systems and methods for player setup room names |
US9654821B2 (en) | 2011-12-30 | 2017-05-16 | Sonos, Inc. | Systems and methods for networked music playback |
US9197937B1 (en) | 2012-04-26 | 2015-11-24 | Music Choice | Automatic on-demand navigation based on meta-data broadcast with media content |
US9729115B2 (en) | 2012-04-27 | 2017-08-08 | Sonos, Inc. | Intelligently increasing the sound level of player |
US9674587B2 (en) | 2012-06-26 | 2017-06-06 | Sonos, Inc. | Systems and methods for networked music playback including remote add to queue |
US9137564B2 (en) | 2012-06-28 | 2015-09-15 | Sonos, Inc. | Shift to corresponding media in a playback queue |
US9081806B2 (en) * | 2012-09-07 | 2015-07-14 | Sap Se | Automated Database Archiving |
US9008330B2 (en) | 2012-09-28 | 2015-04-14 | Sonos, Inc. | Crossover frequency adjustments for audio speakers |
US8863162B2 (en) * | 2012-12-03 | 2014-10-14 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | System and method of content and merchandise recommendation |
US9311418B2 (en) * | 2012-12-13 | 2016-04-12 | Sony Corporation | Information processing apparatus, information processing method , information management apparatus, information management method, recording medium, and information processing system |
US9510055B2 (en) | 2013-01-23 | 2016-11-29 | Sonos, Inc. | System and method for a media experience social interface |
US9607083B2 (en) * | 2013-03-15 | 2017-03-28 | Bose Corporation | Audio systems and related devices and methods |
US10275463B2 (en) | 2013-03-15 | 2019-04-30 | Slacker, Inc. | System and method for scoring and ranking digital content based on activity of network users |
US9330169B2 (en) | 2013-03-15 | 2016-05-03 | Bose Corporation | Audio systems and related devices and methods |
US9247363B2 (en) | 2013-04-16 | 2016-01-26 | Sonos, Inc. | Playback queue transfer in a media playback system |
US9501533B2 (en) | 2013-04-16 | 2016-11-22 | Sonos, Inc. | Private queue for a media playback system |
US9361371B2 (en) | 2013-04-16 | 2016-06-07 | Sonos, Inc. | Playlist update in a media playback system |
US9798510B2 (en) | 2013-05-29 | 2017-10-24 | Sonos, Inc. | Connected state indicator |
US9953179B2 (en) | 2013-05-29 | 2018-04-24 | Sonos, Inc. | Private queue indicator |
US9735978B2 (en) | 2013-05-29 | 2017-08-15 | Sonos, Inc. | Playback queue control via a playlist on a mobile device |
US10715973B2 (en) | 2013-05-29 | 2020-07-14 | Sonos, Inc. | Playback queue control transition |
US9703521B2 (en) | 2013-05-29 | 2017-07-11 | Sonos, Inc. | Moving a playback queue to a new zone |
US9684484B2 (en) | 2013-05-29 | 2017-06-20 | Sonos, Inc. | Playback zone silent connect |
US9495076B2 (en) | 2013-05-29 | 2016-11-15 | Sonos, Inc. | Playlist modification |
US9232277B2 (en) | 2013-07-17 | 2016-01-05 | Sonos, Inc. | Associating playback devices with playback queues |
US9633669B2 (en) * | 2013-09-03 | 2017-04-25 | Amazon Technologies, Inc. | Smart circular audio buffer |
US9380383B2 (en) | 2013-09-06 | 2016-06-28 | Gracenote, Inc. | Modifying playback of content using pre-processed profile information |
US9933920B2 (en) | 2013-09-27 | 2018-04-03 | Sonos, Inc. | Multi-household support |
US9720576B2 (en) | 2013-09-30 | 2017-08-01 | Sonos, Inc. | Controlling and displaying zones in a multi-zone system |
US20150095679A1 (en) | 2013-09-30 | 2015-04-02 | Sonos, Inc. | Transitioning A Networked Playback Device Between Operating Modes |
US9654545B2 (en) | 2013-09-30 | 2017-05-16 | Sonos, Inc. | Group coordinator device selection |
US9288596B2 (en) | 2013-09-30 | 2016-03-15 | Sonos, Inc. | Coordinator device for paired or consolidated players |
US10028028B2 (en) | 2013-09-30 | 2018-07-17 | Sonos, Inc. | Accessing last-browsed information in a media playback system |
US9674563B2 (en) | 2013-11-04 | 2017-06-06 | Rovi Guides, Inc. | Systems and methods for recommending content |
US9300647B2 (en) | 2014-01-15 | 2016-03-29 | Sonos, Inc. | Software application and zones |
US20150220498A1 (en) | 2014-02-05 | 2015-08-06 | Sonos, Inc. | Remote Creation of a Playback Queue for a Future Event |
US9226087B2 (en) | 2014-02-06 | 2015-12-29 | Sonos, Inc. | Audio output balancing during synchronized playback |
US9226073B2 (en) | 2014-02-06 | 2015-12-29 | Sonos, Inc. | Audio output balancing during synchronized playback |
USD768665S1 (en) | 2014-02-27 | 2016-10-11 | Amazon Technologies, Inc. | Display screen having a graphical user interface |
US9679054B2 (en) | 2014-03-05 | 2017-06-13 | Sonos, Inc. | Webpage media playback |
US10599706B2 (en) * | 2014-03-20 | 2020-03-24 | Gracenote Digital Ventures, Llc | Retrieving and playing out media content for a personalized playlist |
US9223862B2 (en) | 2014-03-21 | 2015-12-29 | Sonos, Inc. | Remote storage and provisioning of local-media index |
US10331736B2 (en) | 2014-03-21 | 2019-06-25 | Sonos, Inc. | Facilitating streaming media access via a media-item database |
WO2015145421A1 (en) * | 2014-03-23 | 2015-10-01 | Eran Bida | Webcasting station platform |
US9495447B1 (en) * | 2014-03-28 | 2016-11-15 | Amazon Technologies, Inc. | Music playlists for geographical regions |
US10587693B2 (en) | 2014-04-01 | 2020-03-10 | Sonos, Inc. | Mirrored queues |
US9705950B2 (en) | 2014-04-03 | 2017-07-11 | Sonos, Inc. | Methods and systems for transmitting playlists |
US20150324552A1 (en) | 2014-05-12 | 2015-11-12 | Sonos, Inc. | Share Restriction for Media Items |
US20150355818A1 (en) | 2014-06-04 | 2015-12-10 | Sonos, Inc. | Continuous Playback Queue |
US9363255B2 (en) | 2014-06-04 | 2016-06-07 | Sonos, Inc. | Cloud queue playhead |
US9720642B2 (en) | 2014-06-04 | 2017-08-01 | Sonos, Inc. | Prioritizing media content requests |
US20150356084A1 (en) | 2014-06-05 | 2015-12-10 | Sonos, Inc. | Social Queue |
US9672213B2 (en) | 2014-06-10 | 2017-06-06 | Sonos, Inc. | Providing media items from playback history |
JP6367374B2 (en) * | 2014-06-24 | 2018-08-01 | アップル インコーポレイテッド | User interface during music playback |
US9646085B2 (en) | 2014-06-27 | 2017-05-09 | Sonos, Inc. | Music streaming using supported services |
US9460755B2 (en) | 2014-07-14 | 2016-10-04 | Sonos, Inc. | Queue identification |
US9485545B2 (en) | 2014-07-14 | 2016-11-01 | Sonos, Inc. | Inconsistent queues |
US9467737B2 (en) | 2014-07-14 | 2016-10-11 | Sonos, Inc. | Zone group control |
US10498833B2 (en) | 2014-07-14 | 2019-12-03 | Sonos, Inc. | Managing application access of a media playback system |
US10462505B2 (en) | 2014-07-14 | 2019-10-29 | Sonos, Inc. | Policies for media playback |
US10209947B2 (en) | 2014-07-23 | 2019-02-19 | Sonos, Inc. | Device grouping |
US9671997B2 (en) | 2014-07-23 | 2017-06-06 | Sonos, Inc. | Zone grouping |
US10362094B2 (en) * | 2014-07-25 | 2019-07-23 | Gracenote Digital Ventures, Llc | Retrieval and playout of media content |
US9874997B2 (en) | 2014-08-08 | 2018-01-23 | Sonos, Inc. | Social playback queues |
CN113824998A (en) | 2014-09-02 | 2021-12-21 | 苹果公司 | Music user interface |
US9723038B2 (en) | 2014-09-24 | 2017-08-01 | Sonos, Inc. | Social media connection recommendations based on playback information |
US9860286B2 (en) | 2014-09-24 | 2018-01-02 | Sonos, Inc. | Associating a captured image with a media item |
US9959087B2 (en) | 2014-09-24 | 2018-05-01 | Sonos, Inc. | Media item context from social media |
US10645130B2 (en) | 2014-09-24 | 2020-05-05 | Sonos, Inc. | Playback updates |
US9690540B2 (en) | 2014-09-24 | 2017-06-27 | Sonos, Inc. | Social media queue |
WO2016049342A1 (en) | 2014-09-24 | 2016-03-31 | Sonos, Inc. | Social media connection recommendations based on playback information |
US9667679B2 (en) | 2014-09-24 | 2017-05-30 | Sonos, Inc. | Indicating an association between a social-media account and a media playback system |
US10776739B2 (en) | 2014-09-30 | 2020-09-15 | Apple Inc. | Fitness challenge E-awards |
US10219027B1 (en) | 2014-10-24 | 2019-02-26 | Music Choice | System for providing music content to a user |
US9876780B2 (en) | 2014-11-21 | 2018-01-23 | Sonos, Inc. | Sharing access to a media service |
US10248376B2 (en) | 2015-06-11 | 2019-04-02 | Sonos, Inc. | Multiple groupings in a playback system |
US10098082B2 (en) | 2015-12-16 | 2018-10-09 | Sonos, Inc. | Synchronization of content between networked devices |
US9886234B2 (en) | 2016-01-28 | 2018-02-06 | Sonos, Inc. | Systems and methods of distributing audio to one or more playback devices |
US9721239B1 (en) * | 2016-06-30 | 2017-08-01 | Oppa Inc. | Content access management in a social network using permission-value avatars |
US9967689B1 (en) | 2016-09-29 | 2018-05-08 | Sonos, Inc. | Conditional content enhancement |
US10712997B2 (en) | 2016-10-17 | 2020-07-14 | Sonos, Inc. | Room association based on name |
US10091549B1 (en) | 2017-03-30 | 2018-10-02 | Rovi Guides, Inc. | Methods and systems for recommending media assets based on the geographic location at which the media assets are frequently consumed |
US10992795B2 (en) | 2017-05-16 | 2021-04-27 | Apple Inc. | Methods and interfaces for home media control |
US11431836B2 (en) | 2017-05-02 | 2022-08-30 | Apple Inc. | Methods and interfaces for initiating media playback |
US10928980B2 (en) | 2017-05-12 | 2021-02-23 | Apple Inc. | User interfaces for playing and managing audio items |
US20220279063A1 (en) | 2017-05-16 | 2022-09-01 | Apple Inc. | Methods and interfaces for home media control |
CN111343060B (en) | 2017-05-16 | 2022-02-11 | 苹果公司 | Method and interface for home media control |
US10512017B2 (en) * | 2017-05-16 | 2019-12-17 | II John Thomas Walker | Device for radio communications and method for establishing and maintaining communications between device and fixed location radio communication facilities |
US10936653B2 (en) | 2017-06-02 | 2021-03-02 | Apple Inc. | Automatically predicting relevant contexts for media items |
KR101983635B1 (en) * | 2017-09-22 | 2019-05-29 | 정우주 | A method of recommending personal broadcasting contents |
US10545720B2 (en) * | 2017-09-29 | 2020-01-28 | Spotify Ab | Automatically generated media preview |
US10459686B1 (en) * | 2018-08-08 | 2019-10-29 | Nuance Communications, Inc. | Audio stream mixing system and method |
US11184666B2 (en) | 2019-04-01 | 2021-11-23 | Sonos, Inc. | Access control techniques for media playback systems |
US11010121B2 (en) | 2019-05-31 | 2021-05-18 | Apple Inc. | User interfaces for audio media control |
KR20220027295A (en) | 2019-05-31 | 2022-03-07 | 애플 인크. | User interfaces for audio media control |
USD920350S1 (en) * | 2019-10-25 | 2021-05-25 | Eli Lilly And Company | Display screen with animated graphical user interface |
US11636855B2 (en) | 2019-11-11 | 2023-04-25 | Sonos, Inc. | Media content based on operational data |
CN114730580A (en) * | 2019-11-11 | 2022-07-08 | 苹果公司 | User interface for time period based cull playlist |
US11392291B2 (en) | 2020-09-25 | 2022-07-19 | Apple Inc. | Methods and interfaces for media control with dynamic feedback |
USD1003913S1 (en) * | 2021-07-27 | 2023-11-07 | Google Llc | Display screen or portion thereof with transitional graphical user interface |
USD1014551S1 (en) * | 2021-07-27 | 2024-02-13 | Google Llc | Display screen or portion thereof with transitional graphical user interface |
US20230125352A1 (en) * | 2021-10-21 | 2023-04-27 | Poarch Band of Creek Indians, d/b/a PCI Gaming Authority | Computer-implemented systems and methods for managing user account data and award redemptions |
Family Cites Families (9)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US5629867A (en) * | 1994-01-25 | 1997-05-13 | Goldman; Robert J. | Selection and retrieval of music from a digital database |
CA2140850C (en) * | 1994-02-24 | 1999-09-21 | Howard Paul Katseff | Networked system for display of multimedia presentations |
US5699089A (en) * | 1994-03-03 | 1997-12-16 | Applied Voice Technology | Central control for sequential-playback objects |
US5583561A (en) * | 1994-06-07 | 1996-12-10 | Unisys Corporation | Multi-cast digital video data server using synchronization groups |
US6005561A (en) * | 1994-12-14 | 1999-12-21 | The 3Do Company | Interactive information delivery system |
US5710884A (en) * | 1995-03-29 | 1998-01-20 | Intel Corporation | System for automatically updating personal profile server with updates to additional user information gathered from monitoring user's electronic consuming habits generated on computer during use |
US6018768A (en) * | 1996-03-08 | 2000-01-25 | Actv, Inc. | Enhanced video programming system and method for incorporating and displaying retrieved integrated internet information segments |
US5809242A (en) | 1996-04-19 | 1998-09-15 | Juno Online Services, L.P. | Electronic mail system for displaying advertisement at local computer received from remote system while the local computer is off-line the remote system |
US5721827A (en) * | 1996-10-02 | 1998-02-24 | James Logan | System for electrically distributing personalized information |
-
1998
- 1998-11-24 ES ES98961780T patent/ES2397501T3/en not_active Expired - Lifetime
- 1998-11-24 WO PCT/US1998/025092 patent/WO1999027681A2/en active Application Filing
- 1998-11-24 EP EP98961780A patent/EP0962074B1/en not_active Expired - Lifetime
- 1998-11-24 US US09/198,732 patent/US6587127B1/en not_active Expired - Lifetime
- 1998-11-24 AU AU17021/99A patent/AU1702199A/en not_active Abandoned
- 1998-11-24 CA CA002278196A patent/CA2278196C/en not_active Expired - Fee Related
Also Published As
Publication number | Publication date |
---|---|
CA2278196A1 (en) | 1999-06-03 |
WO1999027681A3 (en) | 2000-02-17 |
ES2397501T3 (en) | 2013-03-07 |
AU1702199A (en) | 1999-06-15 |
US6587127B1 (en) | 2003-07-01 |
EP0962074B1 (en) | 2012-12-19 |
WO1999027681A2 (en) | 1999-06-03 |
EP0962074A1 (en) | 1999-12-08 |
Similar Documents
Publication | Publication Date | Title |
---|---|---|
CA2278196C (en) | Audio content player methods, systems, and articles of manufacture | |
US7680829B1 (en) | List building system | |
KR100587763B1 (en) | The method of providing multimedia files combined with advertisements over the Internet | |
US6662231B1 (en) | Method and system for subscriber-based audio service over a communication network | |
US9361372B2 (en) | System and method for providing broadcast listener participation | |
US7720686B2 (en) | Method and system for providing listener-requested music over a network | |
US8171078B2 (en) | System and method of package creation that includes audio content and audio advertising | |
US7324953B1 (en) | Demographic information database processor | |
US20130297467A1 (en) | Method and system for accounting for download transactions and social network interaction | |
US7684996B2 (en) | Responding to requests for data | |
US7421391B1 (en) | System and method for voice-over asset management, search and presentation | |
USRE47053E1 (en) | Method and system for subscriber-based audio service over a communication network | |
KR101028902B1 (en) | Method and apparatus for organizing and playing data | |
US20050144083A1 (en) | Method and system for locating, selecting, purchasing and delivering small unit research information | |
JPH11238088A (en) | Copyright charge managing device | |
JP2001337960A (en) | Music software information retrieval system |
Legal Events
Date | Code | Title | Description |
---|---|---|---|
EEER | Examination request | ||
MKLA | Lapsed |